JP6605072B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

As a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine equipped with a so-called shutter (attacker) that is closed during a normal gaming state and is easily opened during a big hit gaming state to easily win a game ball (for example, Patent Document 1, Patent) Reference 2). The attacker in this gaming machine has, for example, a rectangular plate material, and the lower piece of the plate material is pivotally supported with respect to the board surface, and can swing so that the upper piece moves back and forth with respect to the board surface. When the attacker in the closed state swings and the upper piece moves forward, the attacker opens. When the attacker in the open state swings and the lower piece moves backward, the attacker Close.

JP 2006-263263 A JP 2013-70995 A

  There is still room for contrivance for the above-mentioned attackers, and there are a lot of voices that desire game machines with contrivances.

Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with a device.

A gaming machine according to the present invention that has solved the above-mentioned problems is provided with a game board having a game area where game balls flow down, and a winning lottery is performed based on the fact that the game balls have passed through a start port provided in the game board. A game machine to be executed, wherein the open / close member is closed to prevent the game ball from entering, and the open / close member is opened to allow the game ball to enter. A ball apparatus is provided in the game board, and when a winning lottery result is obtained by the winning lottery, advantageous game state control means for controlling to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, and controlled to the advantageous gaming state. When the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the opening / closing member that is in the closed state is opened, and as a condition for closing the opening / closing member, a predetermined number of game balls enter the ball entering device, or Predetermined time A closing operation means for executing a closing operation for closing the opening and closing member when over the open state the closing member closing the open-close operation means the opening and closing member slightly not meet the condition for closing the time by in Limited closing means for bringing the opening / closing member into a state, wherein the advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the opening / closing member is repeatedly opened and closed, and the closing state by the limited closing means is repeatedly executed. The advantageous game state is such that the time until the opening / closing member in the closed state is opened is longer than the first time and the first time. 2 so that the closed state by the limited closing means does not appear after the open state in which the opening and closing member is opened in the second time. Game machine, characterized in that it was.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has been devised .

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen afterwards. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which removed the rear case of the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a figure for demonstrating the function of the periphery control board 4010 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launching power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel according to an embodiment different from the example of FIG. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear in FIG. 104. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 104 cut in the vertical direction. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board which omits and shows the part which can be seen through a game panel. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back lower. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back decoration unit in the back unit of a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back decoration unit in the back unit of a game board from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit in the back unit of a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper movable production | presentation unit in the back unit of a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable production | generation unit into the upper movable unit and the raising / lowering unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable production | generation unit into the upper movable unit and the raising / lowering unit, and was seen afterwards. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable unit of the upper movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a top view of the upper movable unit in the upper movable effect unit, (b) is a front view of the upper movable unit, and (c) is a front view of the upper movable unit shown in a state where the figure is rotated. is there. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit of the upper movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view which shows later the principal part of the raising / lowering mechanism in an upper movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view for explaining raising and lowering of the upper movable unit in the upper movable effect unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating raising / lowering of an upper movable unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the right-and-left movable production unit in the back unit of a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the right-and-left movable production unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left-right movable production | presentation unit into the rotary body unit and the slide unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left-right movable production | presentation unit into the rotary body unit and the slide unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a perspective view which shows one rotary body unit in a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body unit of the left-right movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body unit of the left-right movable production | presentation unit, and was seen afterwards. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the rotation decoration body in the rotary body unit of a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the rotation decoration body following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the rotation decoration body following FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the slide unit of the right unit in a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the slide unit of the right unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the slide unit of the right unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view which shows the slide unit of the left unit in a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the slide unit of the left unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the slide unit of the left unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the right unit in a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the left unit in a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower movable production unit in the back unit of a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower movable production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower movable production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen afterwards. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the raising / lowering unit in a lower movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the motion of the raising / lowering decoration body in a lower movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the upper movable production | presentation unit of a back unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the right-and-left movable production | presentation unit of the back unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the lower movable production | presentation unit of a back unit in a game board. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 170. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. 172 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG. 172; It is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board, It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process (step S1210). It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 1st big hit lottery on a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 2nd big hit lottery on a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the advantageous game state generate | occur | produced according to the lottery result in the 1st big hit lottery and the 2nd big hit lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the normal lottery with a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the production | presentation in a periphery control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the rotation detection piece of a driven gear and two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the rotation detection piece of a driven gear and two rotation detection sensors accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. (A) is a table | surface figure which shows ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit, (B) is accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of a dial operation part. It is a list figure which shows ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device (production | presentation means, symbol display means) when an operation unit functions as an operation means. (A)-(E) are explanatory drawings which show an example of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when an operation unit functions as an operation means. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when determining whether selection operation by a dial operation part is substituted. It is a flowchart which shows the selection operation detection process by an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the selection operation detection process in an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 2 of the selection operation detection process in an effect control process. (A)-(D) are explanatory drawings which show an example of the operation unit which functions as a movable production | presentation means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show an example of the operation unit which functions as a movable production | presentation means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show an example of the operation unit which functions as a movable production | presentation means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(D) are explanatory drawings which show an example of the operation unit which functions as a movable production | presentation means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. It is a flowchart showing a rotation notice control process in the effect control process. (A)-(D) are explanatory drawings which show an example of the operation unit which functions as a movable production | presentation means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(D) are explanatory drawings which show an example of the operation unit which functions as a movable production | presentation means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation unit which functions as an operation description means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation unit which functions as an operation description means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation display pattern table in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation display pattern table in this embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows the example of a pseudo | simulation continuous production. It is a timing chart of a short time production. It is a figure for demonstrating the display image in a time reduction production. It is a timing chart of a series of effects during probability change. It is a figure for demonstrating the candidate displayed by a roulette effect. It is a front view which shows simply the principal part of an accessory and a liquid crystal display device. It is a front view which shows simply the principal part which is operate | moving, and the principal part of a liquid crystal display device. (A) is a front view which shows the outline of the mode at the time of performing the expectation suggestion effect in a normal game state, (b) is a front view which shows the outline of the state following (a). 227 is a front view schematically showing a state following FIG. 226. FIG. (A) is a front view which shows the outline of the mode at the time of performing the expectation suggestion effect in a probability variation game state, (b) is a front view which shows the outline of the state following (a). 229 is a front view schematically showing a state following FIG. 228. FIG. 229 is a front view schematically showing a state following FIG. 229. FIG. It is a figure which shows an effect determination table. It is a front view which shows the outline of the liquid crystal display device on which the decorative pattern which fluctuates was displayed. It is a front view which shows the outline of the liquid crystal display device on which the small chance effect was displayed. It is a front view which shows the outline of the liquid crystal display device on which the big chance effect was displayed. It is sectional drawing which shows the state in which a game ball enters into the open / close member of the opened big winning opening. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the opening-and-closing member of the open big prize opening | mouth opened the game ball. It is explanatory drawing explaining operation | movement of the opening-and-closing member of the special winning opening which eliminates a ball spot.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5, are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 has a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 when viewed from the front, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 107). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame depending from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 64) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 67, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 94) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is inserted into a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 64) of the main body frame 3. 21 support protrusions 21d are required to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. Moreover, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an extruded mold material of a lightweight metal (for example, an aluminum alloy), it becomes possible to reduce the thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 64, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the rear after being disassembled from the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 below the lower end. A pair of side speaker covers 290 disposed and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. .

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows the wiring state for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. The frame base body 110, the upper bracket 120 for fixing the upper decorative unit attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and the lower left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 A pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110, and the front side of the door frame base body 110 are attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a side surface of the side speaker 130 and a front side of a wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the right side speaker 130 in front view. Is further provided with a cover member 134 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and holds the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. Can be done.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base main body, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a door pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring cord 196 that connects the frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 that connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a cutout portion of a rectangular shape 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Part 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment part 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and four of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, a rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes a predetermined amount rearward from its lower side, and this door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has an attachment portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130, and an attachment hole 110h (FIGS. 18, 24, and 24) for attaching the side speaker cover 290. Are formed at appropriate positions.

  In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right ones are arranged so as to pass through the glass unit support stepped portions 110a into which the glass units 590 are fitted from the rear side. In a state where the glass unit 590 is removed from the 110 (door frame 5), the glass unit 590 can be detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110 h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is configured such that the rear side is covered by fixing the security cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, first, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must be removed from the door frame base body 110. Accordingly, it is possible to take time for removing the side speaker cover 290 to allow a person who performs an illegal act to remove the relatively large glass unit 590. The removal work can be made conspicuous, and the deterrence (safety) against fraud etc. can be enhanced by deceiving theft acts on the side speakers 130 and the fraudulent acts on the game area 1100 etc. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the upper center of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and both left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. The upper bracket 120 is partially inserted into the upper decorative unit 280 so that the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is like that.

  Further, although the detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) from the center of the game area 1100 in the front view. .5 m) and is fixed obliquely so that the sound is most efficiently delivered to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, and the cross section is formed in an I-shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a paired up and down with a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction of closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved to the main body frame 3 side so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (breakage of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. When the wiring 196 is drooping, it is caught by another member and disconnected. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body side electrical equipment, and the door side can be prevented. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, a ball rental unit 360, a handle as electrical equipment Location 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 simply bends partially with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197. ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage and disconnection.

  Furthermore, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 with enhanced strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. In addition, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wirings 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing problems.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 4 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Furthermore, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141, as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage opening 115 when attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  This handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side of the cylinder part 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical part of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot be rotated relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attaching portion 114 inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110 of the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the side of the support shaft side of 110, the open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft support portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper surface and the lower end portion of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 27), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 bent forward toward the front right side (open side) of the upper long edge. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 extending in the vertical direction after being bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at a lower end of a unit frame 592 of a glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protrusion 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open-side reinforcing metal plate 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open-side outward bent projecting pieces 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing metal plate 151 and the lower reinforcing metal plate 154. As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 107). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 107), insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime projection piece 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. In addition, the rear side crime prevention end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Thus, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101 and the glass unit 590 are arranged from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking protrusion 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook for operation. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208; a side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side; and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210 It is equipped with.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A substrate 214 and a right side lower decorative substrate 216 which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; A right side upper decorative substrate cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214, and a right side that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216. The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left portion in front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the upper rear side of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202, and a side sub-lens 228 attached to a predetermined position on a side surface of the side upper cover 208 from the inside. Yes. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper decoration board 214 on the right side is arranged so that the LED 214c is decorated for light emission.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are translucent members. The side upper cover 208 is almost entirely milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently decorated with light by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. Note that the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 202a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 202a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, the outer frame 202b and the inner frame The inner frame 2 is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the lower end frame 202d that connects the lower end edges of 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 202b.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decorative frame 202 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 202b has a rear end at a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 formed in a straight line at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in a circular arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. In addition, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 202 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b by a plurality of partition frames 202f. Is a light emitting decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. In addition, the radiating lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition wall frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the slit 202e and the light emitting decoration opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and is also provided on the rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 has a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 204a. A plurality of light guides 206a capable of protruding is provided. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204, it may appear as if a jewel has been fitted in the opening 204a. It can be done. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 204 can be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. In addition, the tip of the light guide 206a can be shined as a jewel.

  The side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 has an upper surface and a right side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). The shape is substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 is provided with a mounting step 208a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, or the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 or the like is formed on the end surface. Also, two cutouts 208b arranged on the upper and lower sides are formed on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208 so that the side sub lens 228 attached to the inside through the cutouts 208b is desired to the front side. It has become. By inserting the side sub lens 228 into the cutout portion 208b of the side upper cover 208, only this portion can emit light in a different manner.

  The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape that is substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. A peripheral lens portion 210 a and a radiating lens portion 210 b inserted into the slit 202 e of the side decorative frame 202 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. It is made the accommodation step part 210c made. The accommodation step 210c accommodates an upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the side lens 210 includes an attachment portion 210 d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208 a in the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition wall frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the circumferential lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the circumferential lens portion 210a is not uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 210a to exhibit a sparkling characteristic appearance.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are formed in the side lens 210 as shown in the figure. The rear portion of the main body portion 212a is recessed from the rear end of the main body portion 212a and protrudes forward from the main body portion 212a and corresponds to the radiation lens portion 210b (the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202). And a plate-like light guide part 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed in a state where the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The light transmitted through the main body part 212a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body part 212a.

  By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be birefringently refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. In addition, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape as well as the irregular refraction can make the appearance of the side lens 210 (circumferential lens portion 210a) sparkle and make the perspective feel unclear.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 202g of the side decorative frame 202 (the periphery of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 202e (side lens 210 of the side lens 210) is used. The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). Note that the LED 214c of the upper decorative substrate 214 on the right side that decorates the side sub lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in this example.

  The right upper speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, like the side speaker 130, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that projects obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper end back side of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in front view. It has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The surface is formed into a polyhedron, and the thickness of the plate becomes non-uniform so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted.

  The upper speaker cover 226 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. In addition, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 includes a side decoration frame 242 that forms a skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250 It is equipped with.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is arranged on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 It is attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration board 256. That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 disposed at the upper right part in a front view of the side decoration frame 242 and an upper part that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to the upper rear side of the side decoration frame 242. The speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and a left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The substantially entire side upper cover 248 is milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although not shown in detail, the side surfaces of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 242a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper end frame 242c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, the outer frame 242b and the inner frame A lower end frame 242d for connecting the lower end edges of 242a, and the inner frame 2 arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 242b has a rear end at a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 formed in a straight line at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in a circular arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. In addition, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242f is disposed on the radiation that extends radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b by a plurality of partition walls 242f. Is a light emitting decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 to be described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition wall frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light emitting decoration opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242 and is also provided on the rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 has a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244 and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 244a. A plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude is provided. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it can appear as if gems are also fitted in the opening 244a. It can be done. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 may be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide 246a can be shined as a jewel.

  The side upper cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has an upper surface and a left side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). The shape is substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 is formed with a mounting step 248a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 includes a covering portion 248b that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side on the outer side surface (left side surface in front view).

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emission decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 later. A peripheral lens portion 250a and a radiation lens portion 250b to be inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 242g contacting the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is made the accommodation step part 250c made. The housing step 250c accommodates an upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the side lens 250 includes an attachment portion 250 d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 250 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 248 a in the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition wall frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron can provide a distinctive appearance in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is sparkling.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 250 where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are formed, as illustrated. It corresponds to the main body 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body 252a and projects forward from the main body 252a. And a plate-shaped light guide portion 252b disposed at the position. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted because the thickness of the main body 252a is not uniform.

  By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubled and refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 250 (circumferential lens portion 250a) to have a sparkling appearance and make the perspective feel unclear.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (the periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 242e (side lens 250 of the side lens 250) is used. The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. And the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper end back side of the horn part 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn part 264a in front view. It has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edges on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a that penetrates largely to the center and the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 that has a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 A central lens 282 fitted from the inner side, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281, and an outer shape in front view The shape is similar to that of the front decorative member 281 and the center lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 are placed in front. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decorative member 281 so as to be sandwiched between the decorative members 281; an upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the main body member 285 and mounted with a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b on the front surface; And a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so as to cover the upper decorative board 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent continuously from the lower end of the front decorative member 281, and the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is downward A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from the upper side and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287, It is equipped with. In this example, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

  The front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 of this example has an inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a in a circular arc shape in which the central upper end is a side extending left and right, the central lower end is a vertex, and each side is loose in front view. And has three protrusions extending from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the lower end vertex to the central opening 281a. Further, the front decorative member 281 is formed with a plurality of streaks extending obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281a. A side opening 281b is formed so as to follow the line carving as well as the shape of the blade extending.

  The central lens 282 fitted into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward. Are formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing in different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless and transparent, colored and transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that is trillant cut, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel base. .

  The inner lens 283 disposed on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and a fine lens (or prism) is formed on the surface. A plurality of light sources are formed so that light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be diffused widely toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been. Note that a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, as with the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. Can emit light.

  The inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of being clouded by a plurality of fine lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side cannot be clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 has an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening is inclined downward and closed. Center portion 285a inclined obliquely upward, and a closed rear end disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a is positioned substantially at the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286, penetrating the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b. ing. In the main body member 285, when the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central part 285a and the side part 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side so that light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  The lower decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The shape of the end portion of the upper speaker frame 266 near the upper end frame 202c, 242c is substantially the same as the end shape of the upper speaker cover 226, 266 closer to the upper end frame 202c, 242c. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like. It is arranged between.

  The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 that has an annular opening that is formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the dish unit 300 that is disposed below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is made of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected.

  In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a translucent member having a milky white color similar to that of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

  The side speaker cover 290 of this example is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300, and the door frame base main body. Through a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position 110, the door frame base main body 100 is fixed to the door frame base main body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side.

  Thereby, after removing the security cover 180 in the door frame 5, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the screws attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5. The side speaker 130 can be removed by removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5. Therefore, even if the side speaker 130 needs to be replaced for some reason, the front side of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like from the door frame 5. Only the side speaker cover 290 that covers can be easily removed, and the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

  Thus, in this example, in order to replace the side speaker 130 attached between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. First, since the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door that closes the front surface of the main body frame 3 After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the body member 292 from the rear side of the door frame 5 to the door frame base body 110, the body member 292 and the cover body 291 are attached to the door frame base body 110 (door frame 5). When it is moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 faces from the front side of the door frame 5. Since the side speaker 130 is sandwiched by the speaker bracket 132 attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the front side, the speaker for the door frame base main body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after the main body member 292 is removed. By removing the bracket 132 and releasing the holding of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 are moved to the door frame 5 (the door frame base main body 110. The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without being removed from the door frame 5, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced.

  Further, even when a player or the like hits the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is damaged, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily removed. Since it can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the exchange of the side speakers 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is prolonged, so that the player becomes irritated and less interested and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame 5 ( Since it can be attached to the door frame base body 110), the side speaker 130 does not need to be provided with a mounting piece, a mounting hole or the like, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 291 that covers the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, the cover body 291 is not affected even if a player or the like hits the cover body 291. The deformation or breakage can be reduced as much as possible, the side speakers 130 can be sufficiently protected to prevent the occurrence of defects, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. .

  Moreover, since the side speaker cover 290 which covers the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 is positioned relatively close to the player. However, as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the side speaker 130 is arranged as close as possible to the player, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be heard by the player more efficiently, and a powerful sound is provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by making the sound production enjoyable.

  Further, since the side speaker 130 is disposed between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200 and 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit can be maintained. 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 can be connected without a sense of incongruity, and the side speaker cover 290 can prevent the appearance from deteriorating, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed on the side decoration units 200 and 240. It is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200, 240, etc. The design of the front surface of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

  Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5. It may take a little time to remove the glass, and it is possible to make the removal work troublesome for a person who intends to perform an illegal act, etc., and to make the removal work conspicuous by removing a relatively large glass unit 590. The pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence power (safety) against fraudulent acts etc. can be made by deceiving theft or fraudulent acts.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed at the approximate center of the front surface, opened upward and rearward, and has a large left side (shaft support side) in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction There is a plurality of light guides 318a that are disposed between the front dish decoration member 316, the upper dish front decoration member 316, and the upper dish upper panel 314 and are fitted into the opening 316a of the upper dish decoration member 316. did The right pair of upper dish upper lens 318 and upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged on opposite sides of the upper dish upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 and have a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a on the upper surface. Are mounted between the upper plate upper decorative panel 320 and the upper plate upper decorative panel 314 and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322. The upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light to the upper plate upper lens 318 side.

  The dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-shaped lower dish top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower dish top plate 326 and the lower dish body 324 and that covers the outer periphery of the opening 328a A cover 328, a dish side middle cover 330 having openings 330 a that are disposed on both left and right sides of the lower dish cover 328 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and an opening 330 a of the dish side middle cover 330 A dish-side middle cover lens 332 fitted from the side, and a dish-side outer cover 334 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 and extending in the left-right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. Note that the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front is formed with a lock hole 330b at a right end portion thereof to face a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the right dish side outer cover 334 when viewed from the front.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6; see FIG. 172).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. The dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) of the ball rental unit mounting part 310b, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction, and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends in a cylindrical shape rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, the guide recess 310j is guided to roll in the right direction when viewed from the front, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue supplying (releasing) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game with the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310 d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344 a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The notch part 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 The upper plate ball removal base 344 is connected to the ball removal passage 344c.

  In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by this enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g early due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 301.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 is such that the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d of the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the intermediate position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 at the front end, and a decoration attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting an operation unit 400, which will be described later, formed in a step shape lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the plate body 312.

  Although not described in detail, the decoration mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 has upper and lower positions at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 attached to the lower surface. An opening or a notch penetrating in the direction is formed, and an opening or the like through which a wiring cord connecting the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can be passed is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. .

  The upper front decoration member 316 has a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314, and the light guide part 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 from the lower side to the plurality of openings 316a. And the upper plate upper lens 318 can be held between the upper plate upper panel 314 by being attached to the decorative attachment portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on the surface is disposed below the upper dish upper lens 318, and the upper dish right decorative board 320 and the upper dish left decorative board 322 are disposed. Is sufficiently diffused so that the entire upper dish lens 318 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly. As shown in the drawing, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the opening 316a is the same. It is shaped, and by fitting this light guide portion 318a, it appears to have an appearance that a pair-shaped gemstone is fitted into the opening 316a of the upper dish front decorative member 316. .

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction so that the approximate center of the upper surface is lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line shape, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plates 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed in an inverted triangle shape with the outer shape in front view bulging downward and arcs on each side, and includes an opening 328a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is made of translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along the lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from a substantially center in the left and right direction to a side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 includes an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, the right (open side) dish side middle cover 330 in the front view has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

  The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is like that. In addition, a part of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The dish-side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 when viewed from the front. It is formed in a box shape. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a part thereof is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side excluding the central portion of the lower plate body 324 is covered with the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. And an operation piece 342 supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310 and moved upward and downward by the vertical movement of the operation piece 342, and a ball feed unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 is provided with a contact piece 343a that comes into contact with the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is slidable in the vertical direction. And an upper dish ball removal base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is provided so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. Further, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344 and the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removal base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 has an opening 344 a communicating with the upper dish ball discharge port 310 d, and a lower end of a ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is a ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end of the upper plate ball removal base 344 adjacent to the ball guide passage 344 b communicates with the ball outlet 581 b of the ball feed unit 580 through the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 slides the upper plate ball removal slider 343 downward and also contacts the contact piece 343a protruding backward. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball release member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, the balls are discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g to the lower dish 302 via the lower dish ball supply rod 310h of the dish unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  The ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is supplied vigorously on the partitioning portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball removal base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 in front view and left and right. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and rotating the opening / closing shutter 352 and lower dish A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball opening hole 324b, and a shutter ball opening hole that is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction so as to substantially match the lower dish ball opening hole 324b. 352b, and a closing portion 352a is biased by a coil spring between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a.

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can contact the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin contacts the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower dish ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. Can be done.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right dish side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the horizontal direction of the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300. The surface shape is such that the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330 is smoothly continuous.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 moves to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 and the like. Yes, the lower plate ball hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves backward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the open state and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept pressed while being held in a state of being aligned with the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, and the closing portion 352a is moved to the lower plate by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball rental unit 360 is pushed into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the cash balance and prepaid card inserted after the portion of the loaned portion is drawn back are returned. Yes. Further, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing the anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-like drive gear 412 meshing with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 to which the drive gear 412 is fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attachment portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support substrate 430 having a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface, having an opening 430a through which button support tube 416b and inner tube portion 401a of dial operation portion 401 can pass. Are fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 and A button decoration board 432 having a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rolling, a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a color LED 432d mounted on an upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405; It is equipped with.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting on the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower side than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. When the sliding gear 410 is inserted into the button support cylinder 416b and the sliding surface 410a is brought into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends face each other and project inward, and these connection locking claws 410b are provided in the dial operation unit 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are connected to each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same length.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the drive gear 412 (rotary shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from the upper side; And a pair of board holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly and can accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  The base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed above the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located above the different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c, in a state where the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 includes a claw-like locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and protrudes outward at the lower end. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a penetrating in the vertical direction in the center and allowing the dial operation portion 401 (excluding the flange portion 401d) to pass through, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. .

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In this state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw with the front cover 428 removed, and then the cover body 426 is attached. The surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 includes the circumferential length of the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. The pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. As a result, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. In which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step with the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 is in contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck by chance. The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, it is possible to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like by dispersing the impact from the operation parts 401 and 405, and the impact resistance and load resistance by the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be reduced. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e that protrude downward from positions that support the operation parts 401 and 405, and the leg parts 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by coming into contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed) so that the shock from the operation parts 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, thereby enabling the dial operation unit It is possible to make the production using 401 (press operation unit 405) more diverse and less tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in games from being lowered.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is apparently adjusted to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating. That can withstand high loads. It can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, and it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an experience that has a bodily sensation, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 through the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Also, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and has a smaller diameter on the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a formed by the step 407 is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to the upper end of the operation unit 400. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, any of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is determined. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  In addition, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 including the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from behind. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle A rotating handle body front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and integrally rotatable with the rotating handle body rear 504, and disposed on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. Rotating handle body front 506 and rotation in cooperation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 includes a shaft member 510 that is mounted and fixed at the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side and has a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A rotation position detection sensor 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that is fitted to 510a and is rotatable and is fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502 so as not to rotate, and the rotation position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502 and the rotation position detection sensor 512. A sensor support member 514 having a through hole 514a that is fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and through which the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch sensor 516 is a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a sensor support A single button 520 that is pivotally supported with respect to the member 514 and activates the firing stop switch 518, and a rotation handle body front 506 and a rotation handle body rear 504 that are arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510 are initially rotated ( A handle return spring 522 that urges the actuator to return to a counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this example has a cylindrical shape in which the front end side has a hemispherical bulge shape spreading toward the front side, and the rear end side is a cylindrical shape with the rear end open. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on a cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle, and three attachment bosses 508a projecting rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through a slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle. Thus, the rotational range of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front of the rotary handle body 506 coming into contact with the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b that protrudes rearward is formed on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. , And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514, and the rotary handle body 504 is held by the handle return spring 522. , 506 are biased to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the apparatus 500 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and the rotation operation is easily performed.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotational handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is detected via the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is like that. When the touch sensor 516 detects the player's contact, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 are rotated, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball Can be typed in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, The player can be prevented from playing a game different from the original, and the load (burden) associated with the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational driving of the firing solenoid 654. It is like that. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is electrically detected by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then the emission control is performed based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the unit 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine, It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the door frames 5 are linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration relating to the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. Can be eliminated, and the occurrence of defects in the joint unit can be eliminated. And it is capable to suppress.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of the present example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right as viewed from the front, a second sphere inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a, and a second A second ball inlet 542c that communicates with the ball passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front is provided. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 101 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is rotated to the left in the front view. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes a ground rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped ground metal 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the back. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. If the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 even when the upper plate 301 is full, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 further. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 80). From the full tank outlet 776, the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540 are provided. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer be taken out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 and stay in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and also provides the player with a dish unit. Notification is made to prompt the player to discharge the game balls in 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. It becomes non-detection and the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear after removing the rear case. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and having the rear opened, and closing the rear end of the front cover 581 and opening the front. And a rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying game balls entering through the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launching device 650. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. a ball-extracting member 583 having a, and game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feed member 584 that is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis, and a ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in the front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a which is located below the entrance port 581a and partitions the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feed member 584, and the partition portion 583a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side of the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis side, and a rod-like flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partitioning portion 583a and at the same time the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partitioning portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and entered from the entrance 581a onto the partition portion 583a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding unit 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking unit 584a and stays on the partition unit 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with a vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 57) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward in the vertical direction by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, so that the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, and the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (a ball feed member 584 or a ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 provided with a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are arranged. The ball feeding member 584 and the hit ball launching device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. The player can be prevented from feeling annoying and the interest can be prevented from being reduced, and the dish unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper dish 301. The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that attracts the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball removal member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removal member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The structure concerning a transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, a transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened is compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side. By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage and malfunction or break, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  In addition, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  The partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection, as described above. The effect of this can be achieved.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and discharge ports are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that a defect has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 that does not have a defect. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing the rotating member 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotating hook portion 583b. Can be increased.

  In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are The movement in the direction can be minimized, and the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be improved to be discharged well. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can serve as a discharging mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 107). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a that are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at the left and right ends and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate that extends in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extends downward. Shaped locking piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 23, FIG. 28, etc.).

  As described above, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the gaming window 101 having a vertically long elliptical shape, For driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right and upper sides of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. Appearance with continuous integration.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 and the like provided in the units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. In addition, light emission decoration can be performed with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround the opening 328a of the lower plate cover 328. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, on the rear side of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. By turning on and off the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256 arranged, the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same emission mode (the emission color and the emission pattern are the same), the overall illumination pattern can be substantially uniform, and the emission modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. If it is, it can be set as the light emission decoration which was interrupted in the circumferential direction, and if those light emission modes are different so as to emphasize the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, it shines radially around the center of the game window 101. It can be a light-emitting decoration, and can attract a player's interest strongly.

  In the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of aluminum alloy by die-casting, and the base member 420 is attached to the plate unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since the operation unit mounting portion 314c is suspended, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed to bend and the base member 420 is lowered. The contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c through the cover 424 can alleviate the impact on the dial operation unit 401, the pressing operation unit 405, and the like, and can prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged. It can be done.

  Further, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is included together even if a player or the like tries to strike the pressing operation unit 405 strongly. Therefore, the impact hit by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the impact can be prevented from being concentrated to be hard to break. In addition, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly protrude from the upper surface from below. When the impact hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can contact the upper surface and receive the impact, it is possible to reduce the load on the operation portion holding member 416 and to prevent the gear rail 416a from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased.

  Further, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the plate unit 300 from the upper side, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced even if the operation unit 400 is damaged. It is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from being lowered by replacing the unit 400.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming window 101 at the center in the left-right direction. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are surrounded by side decorative frames 202 and 242 that are opaque (in this example, have a plating layer on the surface). Is surrounded.

  Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are disposed on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the body inner portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The plate-shaped light guides 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend to a position as close as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens units 210b and 250b. Has been. Although not shown in detail in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface thereof, and the decorative substrates 214, 216 and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can diffuse light.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 include peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a disposed at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are provided. In this example, LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decorations). Normal luminance lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the unit 280). In addition, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 in the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red LEDs.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction. The upper center of the gaming window 101 is decorated. The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. The lower lens 289 is disposed. The central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent white (milky white) member. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface, and can diffuse and refract light, so that it passes through the transparent central lens 282. When the inner lens 283 is viewed, the central lens 282 appears to be deep, and the central lens 282 itself appears to shine. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

  The upper decorative board 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed behind the inner lens 283, and the rear lenses 284 and the lower lens 289. A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, respectively) on the left and right sides. In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-intensity white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, a plurality of jewel-like light guides 318 a in the upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged along the front end of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. The front decoration member 316 is lined up so as to be exposed through the opening 316a. When viewed from the front, the upper side front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 allow the outer side of the lower side of the gaming window 101 to be shown in the figure. (Lower) is designed to decorate. Below the upper dish upper lens 318, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper dish upper inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318, and diffuses and refracts light. In the same way as the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 is given a deep and sparkling brightness to guide it. The light part 318a looks like a jewel. In addition, the upper dish upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are not seen from the player side through the light guide 318a by the upper dish upper inner lens 319.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the dish unit 300, a plurality of (six in this example) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper pan right decorative substrate 320 and the upper pan left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Moreover, the surface (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 is also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation unit 401 and a light-transmitting columnar pressing operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration board 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light as appropriate so as to surround the gaming window 101. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are the first annular group 102 and the first ring group 102. A radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the bicyclic group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the annular shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LEDs 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side in the right side decoration unit 200 are set as the upper right side group 105. The portion (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. Group 106 is designated. The LED 286a of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference point of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. The LED 286 b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 is appropriately lit to decorate the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106, or above the gaming window 101 (including the upper part). It is possible to decorate the light emission in a V shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320 a corresponding to the light guide portion 318 a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316 a of the upper plate front decoration member 316 in the plate unit 300 that decorates the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 322 a is a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are also illuminated. , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 The operation unit group 109 is configured to emit light. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be decorated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems, a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three at a time from the right side when viewed from the front. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two systems, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. It has doubled 84 systems. Further, the LEDs 286b and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected to each other. In actual light emission control, the number of systems is doubled to 8 systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing is controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) so that the game window 101 is spread outward. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can emit light widely.

  Further, by coordinating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4, the front unit 2000, etc., the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 are provided. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it becomes possible to perform a more expressive light-emitting effect and strongly attract the player's interest. It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Moreover, in the 1st cyclic | annular group 102, the 2nd cyclic | annular group 103, and the lower group 108, light circulates the outer periphery of the game window 101 by light-emitting each system | strain 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 108a-108d suitably. Such as a light emission effect, or light moving toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, or light from the central lens 282 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect that moves. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect that emits light radially around the gaming window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. Further, by emitting light individually from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

  In addition, the central lens 282 as a whole emits light by simultaneously emitting light from the respective systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106, and light is rotated in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each of the systems 106a to 106c. Light emission effects can be performed. In addition, the upper center side group 105 is caused to emit light, so that the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, so that the player has an opportunity and a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probable game) State, short-time gaming state, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from above the player toward the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-intensity LED 286b. .

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 can emit light by decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108 or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109. Or a light-emitting effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, the system 109a, 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 or each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c, and various expressions A rich lighting effect can be performed.

  Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are the first close to the gaming window 101. Since the ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring group 102 can be made to emit light, a plurality of outsides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) are arranged. The pachinko machine can be decorated in a substantially concentric circle shape, and the light surrounding the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can produce a light emitting effect that is not available in conventional pachinko machines, and attracts the player's attention strongly. 1 can be set.

  In addition, one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged in a substantially concentric manner, and even if the appearance looks like one, each LED of the two systems can emit light. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the form of the light emitting decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit by the light emitting decoration) can be made. 240) can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly by increasing the impact of the light-emitting decoration can be obtained.

  In addition, LEDs 214b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 254b, 256b and LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, which are divided in the circumferential direction by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and arranged substantially concentrically. Therefore, the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be decorated in a plurality of rings by causing the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light according to the gaming state. And never seen before on a pachinko machine It is possible to show the cormorants Do not light-emitting decoration to the player, can be a pachinko machine 1 attracted is strong interest in the player.

  Further, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 constituted by the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60). So that the light converges toward the gaming window 101, that is, the gaming area 1100 by emitting light in the order of the second annular group 103 and the first annular group 102 from the outside toward the inside. And can make the player's interest to the game area 1100 and make it think that there is something good in the game area 1100. It can suppress that interest falls. Furthermore, by emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside to the outside, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is something good about the light-emitting effect spreading to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the above-described light-emitting effects can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The player in the game hall can also show the above-mentioned light-emitting effects, attract the interest of other players, and make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. Can do.

  In addition, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 that are radially arranged so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that extend in the circumferential direction in the circumferential direction. Since it is possible to divide the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction by causing these radial groups 104 to emit light, it is possible to add an accent to the luminous decoration, The player's interest can be strongly attracted by changes in the light-emitting decoration. Further, the radial groups 104 arranged in a radial direction cause the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 in the circumferential direction. Are divided into systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a corresponding to the respective peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are caused to emit light independently for the systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j, respectively. Thus, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which light moves in the circumferential direction. By providing a variety of light emission effects, the pachinko machine 1 that does not get tired can be obtained.

  Further, the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a, and radiation lens portions 210b and 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b. Compared with the case where the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and integrated, the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be changed, so that Even when the lighting decoration is not performed, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained. Even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b, the annularly arranged LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a and the radially arranged LEDs 214b and 216b are arranged. , 254b, and 256b in the same light emission mode, it is possible to make an illusion that the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are integrated, and the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 is integrated. Therefore, the light emitting decoration can be performed in a ring shape, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently achieved.

  Further, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are partitioned in the circumferential direction by LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially on one peripheral lens portion 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250. , 216a, 254a, 256a are made to correspond to each other, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are caused to emit light even if the appearance looks like one. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission decoration substantially concentrically, so that it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emission decoration can be increased, and the light emission Increase the impact of decoration and attract players' attention It can be pachinko machine 1 to be kicked.

  Furthermore, the side inner lenses 212, 250 which irradiate the side lenses 210, 250 by diffusing light from the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256. 252 is provided, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the light emitting decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250, and to improve the appearance of the light emitting decoration, in addition to the LEDs 214a, 216a, Even if 254a and 256a are used, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission in a planar shape, so that a light emitting body that emits light in a linear shape (for example, a cold cathode tube (fluorescent tube), a neon tube, an organic EL, etc.) As compared with the case where the LED is used, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are caused to emit light individually, thereby allowing the first annular group 1 to emit light. 2 and the second annular group 103 can also change the light emission in the circumferential direction, can present more diverse light-emitting effects, and suppresses the player's interest from deteriorating and becoming less tired. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest.

  Further, since the light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 is caused by the random refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. It is possible to make it difficult to see the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 placed on the player, and to prevent the player from seeing the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. directly from the player side. Can do.

  Furthermore, the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is guided by the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 to irradiate the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b can be reliably guided to the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b to be decorated with light emission, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized. Further, the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 ensure the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 even when the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is long. Since the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can irradiate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 widely with the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is sufficient between the side lenses 210 and 250. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a that secure the space, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, the side decorative frames 202 and 242 surround the outer periphery of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250, so that the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is emitted from the radiating lens. It is possible to reduce as much as possible that the light from the portions 210b and 250b or from the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b affects the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a, and the respective light emitting decorations interfere with each other. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the light emission.

[1-2M. Peripheral control board configuration]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment described above includes a peripheral control board 4010. The peripheral control board 4010 includes the peripheral controller 4140 described above, a real-time clock controller 4190 described later (hereinafter also referred to as an RTC controller 4190), and a liquid crystal controller 4150 described later. The peripheral control unit 4140 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a described later. Here, the real-time clock function of the peripheral control board 4010 and the RAM backup power supply function will be described.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the function of the peripheral control board 4010 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, FIG. 61A shows a part of the configuration of the peripheral control board 4010 and is a diagram for explaining the real-time clock function. FIG. 61B shows a part of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the peripheral control board 4010, and is a diagram for explaining the backup power supply function of the RAM.

<Real time clock function>
As shown in FIG. 61A, the real-time clock function will be described using the RTC control unit 4190 and the peripheral control MPU 4140a. In the peripheral control board 4010 shown in FIG. 61A, configurations other than the functional blocks described below (for example, a sound source IC 4140c described later) are omitted. As shown in FIG. 61A, the peripheral control MPU 4140a in the peripheral control board 4010 includes a built-in real-time clock 4140aa (hereinafter, built-in RTC 4140aa). The built-in RTC 4140aa may be included in a timer function for measuring a time such as a change time set in the change display pattern in the peripheral control board 4010 of the present embodiment described later.

  The RTC control unit 4190 includes a real-time clock 4192 (hereinafter referred to as RTC 4192), a battery 4194, and a RAM 4196. The RTC 4192 includes a register circuit, a clock input circuit, a clock output circuit, an interrupt output circuit, a data input / output circuit, a control circuit, and the like. The RTC 4192 can output current calendar information and time information. The calendar information includes information related to the date, for example, information such as “year”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, and the like. The time information includes information about time, for example, information such as “hour”, “minute”, “second”, and the like. The RAM 4196 stores information necessary for the operation of the RTC 4192. The battery 4194 is connected to the RTC 4192 and the RAM 4196 and functions as a backup power source for these. As the battery 4194, a primary battery such as a button battery, a rechargeable secondary battery, or a large-capacity capacitor may be used.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a power supply board 851 (see FIG. 170 and the like described later) for supplying power to each board such as a main board 4000 and a peripheral control board 4010 described later. When the power supply board 851 is turned on, power is supplied to each board, and when the power supply board 851 is turned off, supply of power to each board is stopped.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (when the power supply board 851 is turned on), the RTC 4192 receives power from the power supply board 851 and operates. On the other hand, the RTC 4192 cannot receive power from the power board 851 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (when the power board 851 is turned off).

  The built-in RTC 4140aa can output current calendar information and time information. Since the built-in RTC 4140aa operates upon receiving power supply from the power supply board 851, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (when power supply from the power supply board 851 is stopped), the current calendar information and time information are lost. . Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains calendar information and time information from the RTC 4192 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up (when the power is turned on) or when a failure occurs in the power supply board 851 (for example, when an instantaneous power failure occurs). It is received and set in the built-in RTC 4140aa. Thereafter, when using the calendar information and the time information, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not use the calendar information and the time information of the RTC 4192, but uses the calendar information and the time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a cannot acquire calendar information and time information from the RTC 4192, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the RTC 4192 has caused a malfunction and performs error processing. As error processing, operations may be performed by setting predetermined initial values as calendar information and time information. The initial value may be, for example, “Saturday, January 1, 2011, 12:00”.

  Here, a “special date and time” is set in advance in the peripheral control board 4010 (for example, a peripheral control RAM 4140e or RAM 4140f described later), and the peripheral control board 4010 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4140) has its “special”. “Special processing” may be performed. However, even if the current time corresponds to the “special date and time”, if the RTC 4192 malfunctions and the error processing is performed, the calendar information and time information are reset to the initial values. “Special processing” may not be performed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the peripheral control board 4010), the store clerk of the game shop (such as a pachinko hall or a game center) in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed switches the “special date and time” to a suitable date and time. It may have a function that can

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the RTC control unit 4190 operates even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. In this way, the calendar information and time information output from the RTC control unit 4190 can be made accurate. Further, even if the calendar information and the time information are lost by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the built-in RTC 4140aa is newly set with the calendar information and the time information output from the RTC control unit 4190. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can use accurate calendar information and time information without making an inquiry to the RTC 4192 once making an inquiry to the RTC 4192.

  In the present embodiment, the RTC controller 4190 is provided on the peripheral control board 4010. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other boards (for example, relay boards 3014, 3016, 2018, 3020 described later) are provided. Or a lamp driving substrate 4170). Further, the RTC control unit 4190 may include a GPS update unit that periodically acquires current calendar information and time information from GPS satellites in order to make the current calendar information and time information accurate. .

<RAM backup power supply function>
As shown in FIG. 61B, the backup power supply function of the RAM will be described using the peripheral control unit 4140. In the peripheral control unit 4140 in FIG. 61B, configurations other than the functional blocks described below (for example, a sound source IC 4140c described later) are omitted. As shown in FIG. 61B, the peripheral control unit 4140 includes a capacitor BC2, a diode SD0, and a RAM 4140f in addition to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  The RAM 4140f is a memory for storing information that the pachinko gaming machine 1 (power supply board 851) wants to retain without being lost even when the power is turned off. The diode SD0 is connected to the + 5.25V creating circuit 851e of the power supply substrate 851 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 on the anode terminal side, and a voltage of + 5.25V can be applied. The diode SD0 is connected to the RAM 4140f and the capacitor BC2 on the cathode terminal side.

  Capacitor BC2 is an electric double layer capacitor and functions as a backup power source for RAM 4140f. The capacitor BC2 has a negative terminal grounded to the ground, while a positive terminal is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. The power from the + 5.25V generation circuit 851e is supplied to the RAM 4140f and also to the capacitor BC2. Thereby, the capacitor BC2 is charged. Therefore, when the power from the + 5.25V generation circuit 851e is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4010, the charge charged in the capacitor BC2 is supplied to the RAM 4140f, and the stored contents of the RAM 4140f are held. In this case, the diode SD0 can prevent charge from being supplied from the capacitor BC2 to the power supply substrate 851 side.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a appropriately stores information that the pachinko gaming machine 1 (power supply board 851) does not lose even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 (power supply board 851) is turned off in the RAM 4140f, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. When the power is turned on again, continuous control is possible using information stored in the RAM 4140f before the power is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the diode SD0, the capacitor BC2, and the RAM 4140f are provided in the peripheral control unit 4140. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be provided in the liquid crystal control unit 4150, for example. The RAM 4140f may be shared by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68. FIG. 62 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 63 is a rear view of the main body frame. 64 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 65 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 66 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the game ball flow from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the game board 4. Are integrated into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. 69 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 70 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 66). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the inside of about 3/4 of the entire body extends from the upper part to the lower part in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the front frame of the front end frame portion 602 are recessed from the front to the rear, and the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free end portions (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604 and has a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and a game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 which is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and a positioning projection 607 which projects upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 62) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate-like shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 69 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. In addition, the main body frame base 600 is formed at the lower left side of the front side of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 and the cylinder lock through hole 611 formed in the front-rear direction through the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 64, FIG. 99, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 when viewed from the front, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and both the left and right sides when viewed from the front. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 67 and the like). The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 62 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606, and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 are engaged with and locked by the locking projections 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000, and the front end frame 602. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is locked. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 64).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially horizontal center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 substantially at the horizontal center. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that is allowed to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely at the upper left of the opening portion 614, and a locking device 1000 on the right side (opening side) side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 is appropriately provided with mounting bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the hitting ball launcher 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. The front extending portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the shaft support pin 633 when viewed from the front. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 64, etc.) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 66 and 108) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame pivot support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end portion of the front view 642a and that regulates the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the mounting portion 644a in a plate-like mounting portion 644a. A front extension part 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension part 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 with the shaft support pins 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support holes (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Is located on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is positioned coaxially, and the door is arranged such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper shaft support 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 72 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hit ball launching device 650 of this embodiment, a metal plate launching base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left when viewed from the front and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is restricted from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stopper piece 662. And a stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a reciprocates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the hitting ball basket 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654, and a gently extending arc shape from the fixed portion 656a, and a tip thereof with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A hook part 656b that faces the normal direction and has a hook part 658b fixed to the tip, and a stopper part 656c that extends to the opposite side of the hook part 656b with the fixing part 656a interposed therebetween and can come into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 99) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball basket 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict a rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 64, FIG. 99, and the like, when the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is substantially lower in the left-right direction. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601), and the outer side of the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example hits the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 by firing the gaming ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the firing rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is used. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state, the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side, so that the launch solenoid 654 is driven almost simultaneously with the ball feed solenoid 585 of this ball feed unit 580. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 to 80. 73 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 74 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen after being disassembled. FIG. 79 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and the game ball to be paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a when viewed from the back. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 74 and 76).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so as to be along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and on the upper side, the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 76, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is disposed on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, the tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720, and beside the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper side lower end of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall And an attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the back. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted on the prize ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 77, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear portion at 722, and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the flange portion 724 in plan view, a baseball tank formed near the base end of the shaft portion 725 and at both ends on the front side of the outer peripheral wall 722 720 in the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. Further, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 80) that opens downward to the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 75) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  This tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and that can contact the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball retainer plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not become one step by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by a half pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls that have flowed down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. In addition, when the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b having a predetermined space communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b in communication with the lower left side (open side) and bent substantially in a letter shape. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. The plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 through the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward, and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching a supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attachment / detachment button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 disposed on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and has an upper end bulging backward. At the top of the back cover 742, a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attach / detach button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and relay board mounting The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and heat generated by the payout motor 744 is generated. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detecting board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748. The detection slit 749a is formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball device 740 of the present example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or a ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. And a third gear 747 that meshes with the rotation. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. The payout rotator 748 and the rotation detection board 749 are fixed together with the third gear 747. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls discharged to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d by the ball extraction passage 741d from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d are a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit. It can be discharged outside the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 75, 76, and 80. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a that is latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the upper center of the front and rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 that receives a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 that is arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 80). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 80) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward to the front of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens to the right end of the view and a full passage 775 that guides the game ball from the position away from the right side of the back view of the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 toward the front side (see FIG. 80). A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball receiving port 777 that opens upward at the left end portion of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extracting passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 80) for guiding the game ball received at the opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and A ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and released from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed to communicate with the upper right side upper end of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 779 is the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received by the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the top of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 through the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, it is possible to easily find out foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branching unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, and the like without disassembling the full tank branching unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 until the game balls are full. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out directly below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are combined with a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the past are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 small, it becomes possible to make the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), so that the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained and played. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs is increased.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 773 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is determined. Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be seen from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG. 81 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 82 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 83 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held by the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending via the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and the rear end of the driving rod 793b. The driving rod 793b protrudes rearward from the leading end of the opening 791b and is slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the middle upper surface of the driving rod 793b And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. A normal ball outlet 774 and a full tank outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 can be visually recognized.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction at the same time as the opening / closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front-rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which is inserted. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to be automatically opened. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from after being disassembled. FIG. 88 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 89A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 89B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 90A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 that is attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 that is attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The substrate unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the board unit base 810. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game ball flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 to which the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are attached at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily through the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side. Thus, a housing recess for housing the launching power supply board box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. This speaker box 820 has a horizontally-long rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a deeper bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831 and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above into an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thus, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 64).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 90, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat radiation holes on its upper and lower surfaces in order to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is provided as a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall to the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat release hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. When the heat is released to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Accordingly, the emission power supply board 831 can be easily handled by downsizing the discharge power supply board 831 and the replacement work of the emission power supply board 831 can be facilitated, thereby contributing to the reduction of the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830 can be replaced.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be solved very easily, the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be resolved at an early stage, and the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. In contrast, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from an AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration accompanying charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 which is separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it is necessary to change the capacity in order to change the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831, and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been illegally modified and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 for controlling the hitting ball launcher 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When replacing the game board 4 due to a model change, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. Replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the driving characteristics makes it possible to change the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is prevented from being reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be resolved, the game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation or disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the unauthorized tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being cheated on the launching power supply substrate 831 and having high defense against fraud.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which shows the effect mentioned above reliably.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball released upward from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 that is opened upward from the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view). The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described in detail later, pass through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front opened, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 87, a power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 85 and 87) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c projecting rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It protrudes to In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal with the wiring cord extending is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to be turned back (turned back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from being detached from the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b that protrudes rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b, the bending state of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 that the power terminal 853 faces. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. It is possible to prevent a large force from acting, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection from occurring.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction). Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c protruding rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the operation process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Further, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-like box base 861 which is horizontally long and opened at the rear, and a thin box-like cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened at the front. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 169) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 63). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and from the outside, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the up-down direction, and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction disposed on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b are provided. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in the figure. It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and has a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b extending through the rear wall portion 873a in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and elastic claw-like engagements that are formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended forward also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has the fixing piece 873h inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871, thereby The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface when viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported on the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. The board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (supported side) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusions 871e and the outer pieces 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even using a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal plate 874, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length between them is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if a gap is formed between the pair of shaft portions 875a, the board box cover 875 can be prevented from being distorted and the gap can be prevented from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b that is a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board are arranged in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In other words, an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the unauthorized entry of the tool from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent a gap from being formed, and it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated in the inside, or is the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself replaced with an unauthorized one? Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decorative boards, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93. FIG. 91A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 91B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 92 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a manner that cannot be opened and closed.

  92 and 93, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically-long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 It includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loose-fitting state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction, and does not fall off from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 protruding forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that passes through the connection notch 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and through the connection cutout portion 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 and the test terminal 4100f. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a substrate management seal 1178 (see FIG. 102) attached to the rear surface of the main control substrate box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated in the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head portion of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is connected to the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-coupled with the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared with engagement by a simple claw. Can not be released and the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned at a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis line connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted The locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Accordingly, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened for maintenance or the like, It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, thereby simplifying the effort for opening and closing the back cover 900.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. This side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction of view (see FIG. 107). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 107).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent a tool for performing an illegal act from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 107). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are increased, so that the strength of the entire main body frame 3 can be increased and the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side face plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Thus, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one position between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041 on the lock device 1000 side (open side), the open side is illegal such as a bar. Even if the tool is scooped by a simple tool, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from spreading and prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the security side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and being cheated. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 94 to 98. FIG. 94A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 94B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 95 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 95 (B) is a glass door slide rod and a main body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass door sliding rod and the body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 98 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, the lock device 1000 is a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are prevented from being illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base formed in an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw stopper 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001 b (see FIG. 96) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw stopper 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper end portion and middle portion of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 96) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the protrusion 1003 is provided, and from the lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusions 1004 are attached to the door hook holes 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 611. Also, the lock attaching portion 625 is fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense with the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the rivet 1006 passes through the upper ends of the rivet slots 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of each of the rivet slots 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 in the open side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations up and down. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034, It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end of the engagement cam 1016 is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the upward engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but illegally use, for example, a piano frame or a wire rod 1050 for the body frame. It is for preventing lowering. As shown in FIG. 96, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side obliquely above the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 98 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (the biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 64, 69, etc.) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and by this, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to interfere with the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 causes the door frame sliding. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is reliably engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet slot 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw portion is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1055 In a normal state where the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The protruding piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1040 are inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  In addition, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for a rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from a lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch portion 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the protrusion moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured such that the guide protrusion 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is performed. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the long holes for rivets 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert a guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after being fixed to the screw 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Further, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip portion of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matching hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001 b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. As shown in FIG. 97, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the urging force of the spring 1048 and connect to this. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as shown in FIG. 97A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again. The eaves 1050 are raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engagement protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push up and raise the door frame sliding rod 1040 against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 97A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the slope is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side slope portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other, and the door frame slide is brought about. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 on the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the locking device 1000 of the present example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the stopper piece portion 1027 is inserted into the fraud prevention cutout portion. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and moves so as to retract from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. Thus, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to lower the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  In addition, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross-section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 and the cylinder lock penetration hole 611 up and down. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 mounted on the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 is discharged to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 A part of the award ball device 740 that is attached to the rear side of the rear side and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of the rear side of the tank rail unit 730 or the award ball device 740. And the transparent back cover 900 arranged in substantially the same plane as the back of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. A pachinko machine that can visually check the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. Can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent any problems from occurring due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can make it difficult to mount unauthorized devices.

  Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and to prevent occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position that is approximately twice the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material having a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918 so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slit 916 of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916 and the like are passed through. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 100 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 103 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 103 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 101 and the like as seen from the front, and FIG. 105 is a game as seen from the rear of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 104 cut in the vertical direction.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is divided into a substantially rectangular shape in front. A member 1110, a plate-like gaming panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the gaming area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, it is provided (see FIGS. 109 to 116, etc.).

  The game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 accommodated in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is located on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the biasing force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (injected into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located below the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111, and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that extends from the front end to a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front component member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 in the security cover 180 on the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of this example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protrusion 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime projecting piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). In the inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and formed in an arc shape on the upper side and recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a notch portion 1122 for a spherical passage that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a horizontally long through-hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through-hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 projecting rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160. A predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fixed to a predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by being fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 102). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a corresponding range, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160. The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 102, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear surface when viewed from the rear. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 whose rear side is opened and a thin horizontal box shape that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is opened on the front side, and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 102 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In addition, since the four sealing parts 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than by visual observation, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 103 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 1st special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol storage result and the first special symbol storage result that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving the game ball to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 made up of one 7-segment LED for display as the first special symbol display 1185 and the second start opening 210 A second special symbol display 1186 comprising one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game balls to the second start port 2102.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate unit 2401 by a game ball that is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate part 2401 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED to be arranged, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, the big prize opening A round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (round number) of the open / close pattern 2103.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, probability variation state, short-time game state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off when the number of reserved is one, and the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the first special lottery that is drawn by the reception of the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and the 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2401. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  In addition, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game symbol passes through the gate portion 2401 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from below according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs. The number can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 103A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 169). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has a function as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or The position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. Compared to the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Accordingly, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game and to make it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a different form from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. FIG. Note that the front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 104 to 106 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass or metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if a failure nail (not shown) is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. The thickness is 8 to 10 mm. In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  This panel board 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction, disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are disposed outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half of the thickness of the panel plate 1210 and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this example, about 20 mm) of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface that has a predetermined amount of clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 in the front-rear direction. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower side and the outer periphery slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height and with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 115, etc.) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601 of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001 in the back box 3001. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 104, these cutout portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and a lower side that penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. And a ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front right direction at the lower right corner portion when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 105) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and is opened downward at the lower end side. And a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it becomes possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the state where the panel holder 1220 is held in the conventional obstacle nail planting device, and it is possible to suppress the increase in the cost for planting the obstacle nail. Can be done.

  Further, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, in the thin panel board 1210, since only the front unit is supported, it is possible to prevent the panel board 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the overall weight of the gaming panel 1200 can be suppressed even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a prize opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 107, the crime prevention structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side face on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. The metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and the metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5 are configured.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold made of metal (for example, an aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction, extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward in a substantially perpendicular direction from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, so that the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It is possible to fully counter the destructive acts. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 108, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 are used. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is connected to the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 116. FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board with the portion that can be seen through the game panel omitted, FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the diagonally right front. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the left front. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. Further, FIG. 115 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from an oblique rear. FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when a player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and when attached to the pachinko machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front component member 1110 when viewed from the front, from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side A function display unit 1180 arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized, and a plurality of penetrating through the front and rear in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 And a plate-like gaming panel 1200 that has an opening 1215 (see FIG. 115) and partitions the rear end of the gaming area 1100.

  The gaming panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel board 1210 having a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110 and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component member 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 so as to be detachable from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110. An opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a rear side of the back unit 3000. A liquid crystal display device 1900 that is attached so as to be visible from the player side and can display a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower part of the back unit from the rear side, and a substrate And a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the holder 1160.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the upper left side of the attacker unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2100 arranged on the upper side of the out port 1151 in the lower part in the game area 1100. A side guide member 2300, a gate member 2400 disposed slightly above and to the left of the upper side of the game area 1100 above the side guide member 2300, and a frame-like shape disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100. A center accessory 2500.

  Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is a box shape attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and opened on the front side, and a back box 3001 having an opening 3001c facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 formed on the rear wall 3001b. A back decoration unit 3100 having a frame-like decoration attached near the front face in the back box 3001, and a ball guiding unit 3200 attached to the lower front part of the back box 3001 to guide a game ball from the front unit 2000 downward. And an upper movable effect unit 3300 which is mounted on the upper side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and is movable according to the gaming state, and a left and right which is mounted on the left and right sides of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and is movable according to the gaming state. It is attached to the lower side of the opening 3001c within the movable effect unit 3400 and the back box 3001, and is movable according to the gaming state. A lower movable direction unit 3600, and a lower decorative member 3002 to decorate both right and left sides of the lower movable direction unit 3600 is arranged between the rear wall 3001b of the lower movable direction unit 3600 and the back box 3001, the.

  The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 has a substantially rectangular opening 3001c penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear wall 3001b, and the display screen faces forward (player side) from the opening 3001c. A liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001.

  Further, on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control board 4010 having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150 is provided, as will be described in detail later. Yes.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged at an upper portion of the out-out 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210), and the attacker unit 2100. A side guide member 2300 that is arranged on the upper left side of the game area 1100 and extends from the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the center side in the left-right direction, and a game panel that is arranged on the upper side of the side guide member 2300 A gate member 2400 supported on the front surface of 1150; and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 supported at the game panel 1150 and disposed at a substantially central portion of the game area 1100.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 has a first start port 2101 in which a game ball can be received at all times, and a game ball passing through the gate portion 2401 of the gate member 2400 that is disposed below the first start port 2101. The second starting port 2102 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn, and the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 arranged below the second starting port 2102 The winning prize opening 2103 that can receive gaming balls according to the result of the special lottery drawn by receiving the gaming balls of the game balls, and the four winning balls that are arranged above the winning prize opening 2103 and are always able to receive gaming balls. And a general winning opening 2104. In addition, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate portion 2401 through which a game ball can pass.

  In addition, in the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210), and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 enter the frame. The peripheral wall portion 2503 for preventing the warp, the warp inlet 2504 opening at a predetermined position of the peripheral wall portion 2503, the warp outlet 2505 for discharging the game ball entering the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and the warp outlet 2505 A stage 2510 that rolls the game ball in the left-right direction and then releases the game ball into the game area 1100 for reflux.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 can be visually recognized without passing through the transparent gaming panel 1200 such as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is arranged on the rear side, the back unit 3000, and the like. A window part 2501, a center logo decoration member 2520 which forms an upper frame of the window part 2501 and has a logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and a right frame decoration member 2530 which forms the right frame of the window part 2501. I have. The center logo decoration member 2520 and the right frame decoration member 2530 of the center accessory 2500 include decoration boards 2523 and 2532 on which LEDs are mounted, respectively, and can be decorated with light emission according to the gaming state. Yes.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear lower side.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed in the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and then the game panel It is fixed to the front surface of 1200 (panel plate 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of reception openings (winning openings) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the first start port 2101 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101, and disposed below the second start port 2102. A rectangular large winning opening 2103 extending greatly in the left-right direction from the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and four general winning openings 2104 arranged at positions higher than the large winning opening 2103, I have.

  The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101 is a pair of blade-like movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on both the left and right sides of the second start port 2102 as shown in the figure. Thus, the space between the first start port 2101 is closed, and in the state shown in the figure, the game ball cannot be received into the second start port 2102. The pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second start port 2102 is pivotally supported at the lower end side, and the second start port is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction away from each other. The game ball is ready to be received at 2102. That is, the second start port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2105.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing member 2106 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported at its lower side so that it can close the special winning opening 2103 to make it impossible to receive a game ball in a substantially vertical state, and the upper side moves forward. When it is turned, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be received. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

  The attacker unit 2100 has a width (width) in which the width of the first start port 2101 in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the game balls can be received one by one. Further, the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other and expanded to be three times the outer shape of the game ball. The width is about 5 times. Further, the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is opened, which is 5 to 8 times the outer shape of the game ball. As a result, in a state where each winning opening 2101, 2102 and 2103 can be received, the lower winning opening becomes easier to receive the game ball.

  Further, two of the four general winning ports 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 are arranged in a state of being opened upward on both the left and right sides with the large winning port 2103 in between, and the remaining two are sandwiched with the large winning port 2103 in between. They are arranged so that they face each other diagonally to the upper left of the general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left side.

  More specifically, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and has a first start port 2101 and a big prize port 2103 at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100. In addition, a plate-shaped base plate 2110 capable of forming the second start port 2102 and the general winning port 2104, and a pair of movable pieces 2105 attached to the lower front surface of the first start port 2101 in the base plate 2110 can be rotated. The center receiving member 2111 is formed with a second start port 2102 and opened on the upper and rear sides, and a general winning port 2104 opened upward is formed on the left and right front surfaces of the large winning port 2103 on the base plate 2110. A pair of side receiving members 2112 which are attached and whose upper and rear sides are opened, and a general winning opening 2104 facing away from each other are formed to form a table. A left side receiving member 2113 attached to the position of the upper left than to the region in which both side members 2112 of the left is attached in 2110, and a.

  The attacker unit 2100 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, pivotally supports an opening / closing member 2106 that opens and closes the grand prize winning opening 2103, and rotationally drives the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the opening / closing member 2106. An attacker driving unit 2120 to be operated, a right back cover 2141 attached to the right side of the attacker driving unit 2120 on the rear side of the base plate 2110, and a left back cover attached to the left side of the attacker driving unit 2120 on the rear side of the base plate 2110. 2142. The right back cover 2141 and the left back cover 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 have a flat rear surface, and the rear surface of the right back cover 2141 and the left back cover 2142 is a panel with the attacker unit 2100 attached to the panel plate 1210. The rear surface of the plate 1210 is substantially flush with the rear surface.

  The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a shallow relief-like decoration on the surface. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and passes through the game ball at a position corresponding to the second start port 2102 and a position where the left side receiving member 2113 is attached. In addition, the base plate 2110 includes a flange 2110b that extends backward from a position where the first start opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 are formed and can guide the game ball.

  The center receiving member 2111 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 in the attacker unit 2000 is provided with a relief such that small jewels are scattered on the outer periphery of a heart-shaped jewel. Although not shown in detail, the center receiving member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions that extend rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the left and right widths of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable piece 2105 can be pivotally supported by these shaft portions.

  Further, both side receiving members 2112 have a relief-like decoration in which the outer periphery of a circular jewel is surrounded by a small jewel on the front surface. The left side receiving member 2113 includes a shelf 2113a that is formed on the upper side of the general prize opening 2104 that is arranged in the back direction and that extends short in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, on the shelf 2113a. The dropped game ball can be guided to the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100.

  Further, the attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 is configured to open and close a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102, and to support the start port solenoid 2121 and to the rear side of the base plate 2110. A start opening drive mechanism base 2123 attached to the opening, an opening / closing member 2106 for closing and opening the prize winning opening 2103, an opening / closing member 2106 for supporting the opening / closing operation, and an opening / closing member 2106 pivotally supported so as to be rotatable. An attacker drive mechanism base 2126 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 under the starter drive mechanism base 2123, and a game ball received at the second starter opening 2102 supported at a predetermined position of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A second start port sensor 2127 to detect, A count sensor 2128 that detects a game ball that is supported at a different position from the start port sensor 2127 and received in the grand prize opening 2103, and a start port solenoid 2121, an attack solenoid 2124, and a second that are supported on the upper surface of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A starter sensor 2127 and an attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100 are provided.

  Although not shown, the start port solenoid 2121 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is biased in a protruding direction by a coil spring. The second start port 2102 is below the first start port 2101. The start port drive mechanism base 2123 supports the plunger so that the plunger projects forward. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the start port solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2121 moves backward against the urging force of the coil spring, and a pair of movable pieces are connected via a transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other, and the second starting port 2102 is in an open state.

  Further, the start port drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so that the start port solenoid 2121 can be accommodated and supported from the front side. A first guiding portion 2123a that guides the game ball that has circulated through the portion 2110b to the right in a front view, and a game ball that is formed below the portion that supports the start port solenoid 2121 and is received in the second start port 2102 A second guiding portion (detailed illustration is omitted) for guiding downward.

  Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2124 in the attacker drive unit 2120 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, as with the start-port solenoid 2121. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the attacker solenoid 2124 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2124 is immersed, and the upper end of the opening / closing member 2106 moves relatively forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The special winning opening 2103 is in an open state.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first start port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 are in a state where they can always accept game balls. On the other hand, in the second starting port 2102, a pair of movable members are driven by energizing the starting port solenoid 2121 in accordance with a normal lottery result in which a game ball passes through the gate portion 2401 in a gate member 2400 described later. The piece 2105 is expanded and can be received. Also, in the big winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (start winning prize) (for example, the special lottery result is “big hit” ”), The opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern to be received by energizing the attacker solenoid 2124.

  Although not shown in the figure, the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a large prize opening decoration board that is supported at the lower part of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface. It can be made to.

  In this attacker unit 2100, a game ball received in a general winning port 2104 arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2101 and the big winning port 2103 is the right passage member 3210 in the ball guiding unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is sent to the start opening passage 3211 and the middle right general winning opening passage 3212. In addition, the attacker unit 2100 receives the game balls received in the general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left side of the big winning opening 2103 so that each of the general winning opening passages of the left passage member 3220 in the ball guiding unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 described later. 3221, 3222, and 3223.

  Also, the attacker unit 2100 is discharged downward after the game ball received in the second starter port 2102 is detected by the second starter port sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. ing. Further, the attacker unit 2100 is configured such that the game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is discharged downward after being detected by the count sensor 2128.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged so that the forward / backward direction of the plunger 2124a is the left / right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged as close as possible to the opening / closing member 2106. Therefore, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% compared to the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured more widely. .

[2-3. Side guide member]
Subsequently, the side guide member 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. The side guide member 2300 in the game board 4 is in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 and below the center in the vertical direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the plate 1210.

  The side guide member 2300 of the present example is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and extends in the left-right direction, and extends forward from a substantially vertical center of the contact portion 2301. And a shelf 2302 that extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the right end side is lowered. The side guide member 2300 can guide the game ball flowing down along the left end of the game area 1100 to the right by the shelf 2302. The side guide member 2300 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the rear side can be seen through the side guide member 2300.

[2-4. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. The gate member 2400 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1215 formed on the left side of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 on the left side and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. Thus, it is fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). The gate member 2200 has a gate portion 2401 having a width through which only one game ball can pass. The gate sensor 2402 disposed in the gate portion 2401 detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2401. Be able to.

  Note that the gate member 2400 of the present example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the conventional gate member, and the portion on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1150 is the thickness of the game panel 1150. It will fit within. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2402 extends from the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

[2-5. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the front. FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the rear. The center accessory 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent plate-like panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and then the panel plate 1210. As shown in the drawing, a large window portion 2501 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided in a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 1100.

  In the center accessory 2500, the shape of the outer periphery of the upper frame is linearly inclined at a steep angle and lowered by a predetermined amount from the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and then gradually decreases toward the left. A plurality of step shapes which are inclined to each other. On the other hand, in the center accessory 2500, the outer peripheral shape on the right side of the upper frame is a curved shape (arc shape) substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. In the center accessory 2500, the upper frame is formed in an arc shape having a predetermined width along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and the shape of the inner periphery of the upper frame is highest at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100. The shape is curved in an arc shape. A center logo decoration member 2520 described later is provided on the upper frame of the center accessory 2500.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral shape of the left frame hangs downward, and the inner peripheral shape of the left frame is such that the upper side and the lower side are on the left with the approximate center in the vertical direction sandwiched therebetween. It is formed in a wave shape curved so as to be recessed in the direction. Further, the center accessory 2500 has an outer peripheral shape of the right frame that is continuous with the curved upper portion, extends downward from the left frame, and has an arc shape substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming area 1100. The inner peripheral shape of the frame is formed in a shape in which three recesses curved in a substantially semicircular shape are arranged in the vertical direction.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 has a lower frame shape that decreases in the right direction from the lower end of the left frame, and increases in the right direction after a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. And it is made into the shape which inclined toward the lower end of the right frame from the position of about 3/4 of the whole from the left end to the right direction.

  As described above, the center accessory 2500 has an outer periphery on the right side of the upper frame and an outer periphery of the right frame substantially shaped along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and is attached to the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200. In this state, a gap slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball is formed on the outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Further, the center accessory 2500 has an upper frame left side, a left frame, and a lower frame as described above, and when attached to the panel board 1210, a game area is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A region having a predetermined width is formed between the inner periphery of 1100.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a plate-like flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a game ball that bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 and flows down in the game area 1100 from the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a peripheral wall portion 2503 for guiding the game ball to the left and right and preventing the game ball from entering the frame. Further, the center accessory 2500 is a warp inlet 2504 that opens to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall 2503 located on the front side of the panel board 1210 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter (see FIG. 112). And a warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and after the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 rolls in the left-right direction, into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100 And a stage 2510 disposed under the lower inner edge of the window 2501 for discharge and reflux.

  The stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the lower side and the front side of the first stage 2511 to which the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 is supplied, and the game ball is received from the first stage 2511. A second stage 2512 to be supplied, and a third stage 2513 which is disposed below and in front of the second stage 2512 and from which the game ball is supplied and can be released into the game area 1100. And.

  The first stage 2511 of the stage 2510 is generally curved so that both ends in the left-right direction are raised, and is wavy so that the position corresponding to the approximate center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction is slightly higher. The game balls can be discharged to the front side (second stage 2512 side) from the lower portions (valleys) on both sides that are slightly higher.

  In addition, the second stage 2512 is formed more slowly in the vertical direction than the first stage 2511, and both ends in the left-right direction are the highest, and the position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is slightly higher. It is formed in a wavy shape. The second stage 2512 can also release the game ball to the front side (third stage 2513) from the lower part (valley part) on both sides of the central part.

  Furthermore, the third stage 2513 is formed more gently than the second stage 2512 and is curved so that the left and right ends are the highest and the position corresponding to the center of the gaming area 1100 is the lowest. A game ball can be emitted from the lowered center to the front side (in the game area 1100).

  The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 has a game ball that opens forward in a standing wall formed between the first stage 2511 at a position corresponding to the substantially horizontal center of the game area 1100 in the second stage 2512. A chance entrance 2514 that can be entered, and a chance exit 2515 that is released immediately after the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 is released and arranged directly below the chance entrance 2514 below the third stage 2513. . The game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 is released from the chance exit 2515 into the game area 1100. Further, as shown in FIG. 109 and the like, this chance exit 2515 is arranged immediately above the first start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2515 has a high probability. It can be received (wins) into the start port 2101.

  In this center accessory 2500, the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and the lower decoration member 3002 of the back unit 3000, the lower movable effect unit 3600, etc., arranged on the rear side through the stage 2510 are the player side. It can be seen from.

  The center accessory 2500 forms a top frame of the window portion 2501 and extends in an arc shape in the left-right direction, and includes a center logo decoration member 2520 having a logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and a right frame of the window portion 2501. And a right frame decoration member 2530 that can be decorated with light emission.

  The center logo decoration member 2520 of the center object 2500 is A logo lens 2521 having a logo (detailed illustration is omitted) in a relief shape and having translucency, A diffusing lens member (not shown) provided on the back side of the logo lens 2521 and provided with a plurality of prisms; A logo decoration substrate 2523 disposed behind the diffusing lens member and having a plurality of color LEDs mounted on the front surface; A logo cover 2524 covering the rear side of the logo decoration board 2523; It has. This center logo decoration member 2520 is By appropriately emitting the LED of the logo decoration substrate 2523, The logo lens 2521 can be decorated with various colors. Also, Center logo decoration member 2520 The back of the logo cover 2524 The thickness in the front-rear direction is thin so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200.

  The right frame decoration member 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is formed in a predetermined shape that forms the surface of the right frame and is partially translucent, and on the rear side of the surface decoration member 2531. A right frame decorative substrate 2532 arranged and mounted with a plurality of color LEDs on the front surface, and a cover lens 2533 having translucency that covers the rear side of the right frame decorative substrate 2532 and decorates the rear side surface of the surface decorative member 2531; It is equipped with. The right frame decoration board 2532 of the right frame decoration member 2530 has a center upper right decoration board 2532a and a center right middle decoration board 2532b from the upper side so as to correspond to the three substantially semicircular recesses formed in the surface decoration member 2531. , And the center lower right decorative board 2532c.

  Further, the cover lens 2533 of the right frame decoration member 2530 includes three upper right cover lenses respectively corresponding to the three center upper right decoration boards 2532a, the center right middle decoration board 2532b, and the center right lower decoration board 2532c of the right frame decoration board 2532. 2533a, right middle cover lens 2533b, and lower right cover lens 2533c.

  The right frame decoration member 2530 can appropriately light-emit the LED mounted on the right frame decoration substrate 2532 so that the surface decoration member 2531 and the cover lens 2533 can be illuminated, and each decoration substrate By appropriately emitting the LEDs 2532a, 2532b, and 2532c, the three substantially semicircular recesses can be individually decorated with light emission.

[2-6. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. 124 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each of the main components and viewed from the rear. is there.

  The back unit 300 of this example includes a back box 3001 that is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and has an open front side, and an opening 3001c that faces the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed on the rear wall 3001b. A back decoration unit 3100 which is attached near the front face in the box 3001 and has a relief-like decoration on the front face and formed in a frame shape, and a first start port 2101 in the front unit 2000 attached to the lower part of the back decoration unit 3100 and A ball guiding unit 3200 for guiding the game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 to a predetermined position below, and an upper movable effect unit 3300 which is attached to the upper side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and moves according to the game state. The left and right movable effects that are attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and move according to the gaming state. The knit 3400, the lower movable effect unit 3600 attached to the lower side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and movable according to the gaming state, and the lower movable effect unit 3600 and the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001 are arranged. A lower decorative member 3002 for decorating the left and right side surfaces of the lower movable effect unit 3600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a panel relay board 3012 that is attached to the rear face of the back wall 3001b of the back box 3001 at the lower left corner in the rear view and relays the connection between the main control board 4100 and the count sensor 2128 of the front unit 2000. I have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged on the right side of the panel relay board 3012 when viewed from the back, and the big prize opening decoration board (not shown) of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, the right frame decoration board 2532 of the center accessory 2500, the back In the unit 3000, the left back decorative board 3112 and the right back decorative board 3122 of the back decoration unit 3100, the lift solenoid 3610, the lift decorative body decoration board 3621, the stage lower right decoration board 3661, and the stage lower left decoration board of the lower movable effect unit 3600. 3662 and a lower relay board 3014 that relays the connection between the peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 169) attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the rear side of the back box 3001 that covers the rear side of the lower relay board 3014 A lower relay board cover 3015 attached to the Eteiru.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is disposed on the rear surface of the back box 3001 and above the opening 3001c, and the logo decoration board 2523 of the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000, the upper and back decoration boards 3132 of the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, Character body drive motor 3315 of movable effect unit 3300, upper movable body lower decorative board 3318, rotation detection sensor 3320, upper movable body rear central decorative board 3334, upper movable body rear side decorative board 3335, lift drive motor 3361, and lift detection An upper relay board 3016 that relays the connection between the sensor 3368 and the peripheral control board 4010, and an upper relay board cover 3017 that covers the rear side of the upper relay board 3016 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is disposed on the rear side of the back side of the back box 3001 on the left side of the opening 3001c (right side of the front view), and the rotation drive motor 3412 of the right unit 3400R in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, 3416, rotation detection sensor 3426, base decoration board 3428, slide drive motors 3525, 3535, 3545, position detection sensors 3526, 3536, 3546, and right relay board 3018 that relays connection with peripheral control board 4010, right A right relay board cover 3019 that covers the rear side of the partial relay board 3018 and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged on the rear side of the opening 3001c on the rear side of the back box 3001 (the left side of the front view), and the rotation drive motor 3412 of the left unit 3400L in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the rotary head decoration board. 3416, rotation detection sensor 3426, base decoration board 3428, slide drive motors 3565, 3575, 3585, position detection sensors 3566, 3576, 3586, and left relay board 3020 that relays connection with peripheral control board 4010, left A left relay board cover 3021 that covers the rear side of the partial relay board 3020 and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 at the substantially center in the left-right direction above the opening 3001c and the substantially center in the up-down direction on the left side of the opening 3001c in rear view. A lock member 3022 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided.

  The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is arranged at appropriate positions before and after the rear wall 3001b in the lower decoration member 3002, the back decoration unit 3100, the ball guiding unit 3200, the upper movable effect unit 3300, the left and right movable effect unit 3400, and the lower movable effect. Mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the unit 3600, the panel relay board 3012, the lower relay board cover 3015, the upper relay board cover 3017, the right relay board cover 3019, the left relay board cover 3021 and the like are provided.

  Further, the back box 3001 includes a flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a extending outward from the front end, and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portion 3001a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 125 and the like, the back box 3001 is mounted such that the entire outer periphery of the opening 3001c including the opening 3001c is shallowly formed in a stepped shape on the rear side of the rear wall 3001b and can be inserted into the liquid crystal display device 1900 A stepped portion 3001d and a pair of fixing pieces 1902 formed on the right portion in the bottom and rear view of the mounting stepped portion 3001d and extending downward from the lower surface and side surface (left side surface in the front view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are inserted. Mounting recess 3001e.

[2-7. Back decoration unit]
Subsequently, the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the back decoration unit in the back unit of the game board as seen from the front. FIG. 129 is a rear perspective view of the back decoration unit in the back unit of the game board. The back decoration unit 3100 of this example is attached to the front end in the back box 3001 so as to close the front opening of the box-shaped back box 3001 whose front side is open. The back decoration unit 3100 includes a left back decoration unit 3110 arranged along the left side of the back box 3001 in a front view, a right back decoration unit 3120 arranged along the right side of the back box 3001, and a left back decoration unit. On the lower side of the back box 3001 between the upper back unit 3130 arranged along the upper side of the back box 3001 between the 3110 and the right back unit 3120, and between the left back unit 3110 and the right back unit 3120. And an underlining unit 3140 arranged along.

  The left back decoration unit 3110 in the back decoration unit 3100 includes a left back decoration member 3111 formed with a relief-like decoration on the surface and partially translucent, and a rear of the left back decoration member 3111. The left back decorative board 3112 which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and is arranged on the rear side of the left back decorative board 3112 to support the left back decoration member 3111 and the left back decorative board 3112 and in the back box 3001 And a transparent left back decoration base 3113 attached to the left side of the front end of the.

  The left back decoration member 3111 of the left back decoration unit 3110 has a left-end shape when viewed from the front and has an arc shape that substantially follows the inner peripheral shape of the game area 1100, and the right-end shape has a substantially semicircular shape to the left. Rotating body units provided in the left unit 3400L of the left and right movable effect unit 3400, each of which has three recessed portions arranged in a vertical direction and three left and right substantially semicircular portions are respectively described later. It has a shape corresponding to the rotating head 3415 of the rotating decoration body 3410A of 3410.

  The left back decoration board 3112 of the left back decoration unit 3110 has a back outer periphery upper left decoration board 3112a and a back outer periphery left left arranged on the left side of the outermost periphery of the three substantially semicircular shapes of the left back decoration member 3111, respectively. An inner decoration board 3112b and a back outer periphery lower left decoration board 3112c are provided, and the three peripheral edges of the left back decoration member 3111 that are recessed in a substantially semicircular shape can be individually decorated with light emission. Further, the left back decorative board 3112 has a back upper left decorative board 3112d, a back left upper decorative board 3112e, a back left lower decorative board 3112f, which decorate light between three portions of the left back decorative member 3111 that are recessed in a substantially semicircular shape. And a back bottom left decorative substrate 3112g.

  The right back decoration unit 3120 in the back decoration unit 3100 includes a right back decoration member 3121 formed with a relief-like decoration on the surface and partially translucent, and a rear of the right back decoration member 3121. Right back decorative board 3122 arranged on the side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and arranged on the rear side of right back decorative board 3122 to support right back decoration member 3121 and right back decorative board 3122 and in the back box 3001 And a right back decoration base 3123 attached to the right side of the front end.

  The right back decoration member 3121 of the right back decoration unit 3120 has a shape in which three parts recessed in a substantially semicircular shape in the right direction in a front view are arranged in the vertical direction, and the three substantially semicircular parts Are shapes corresponding to the rotating body head 3415 of the rotating body unit 3410 provided in the right unit 3400R of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 described later. Also, the right back decoration board 3122 of the right back decoration unit 3120 has a back upper right decoration board 3122a and a back right middle decoration board 3122b that illuminate and decorate between three portions of the right back decoration member 3121 that are recessed in a substantially semicircular shape. , And a back lower right decorative board 3122c.

  The upper back decoration unit 3130 in the back decoration unit 3100 includes an upper back decoration member 3131 formed with a relief-like decoration on the surface and partly translucent, and a rear of the upper back decoration member 3131. And an upper back decorative board 3132 mounted on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. The upper / lower decorative member 3131 of the upper / lower decorative unit 3130 has an upper end in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral shape of the game area 1100, and a lower end in a wave shape that is loosely curved in an M-shape. The shape of the lower end is continuous with the shape of the right end of the left back decoration member 3111 in the left back decoration unit 3110 and the shape of the left end of the right back decoration member 3121 in the right back decoration unit 3120.

  In addition, the upper and lower decorative board 3132 of the upper and lower decorative unit 3130 is disposed along the lower end of the upper and lower decorative member 3131 formed in a wave shape. And a substrate 3132b. The upper and lower decorative board 3132 is attached to the rear side of the upper and lower decorative member 3131, and the LED mounted on the front surface appropriately emits light so that the lower edge of the upper and lower decorative member 3131 formed in a wave shape is light-emitting decorated. It can be made to.

  The upper back decoration unit 3130 is attached to the upper ends of the left back decoration unit 3110 and the right back decoration unit 3120 at the left and right ends, respectively.

  The lower back decoration unit 3140 in the back decoration unit 3100 has a substantially semicircular shape that bulges upward so as to surround the rear outer periphery of the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000. A back decoration member 3141 and a lower back decoration base 3142 that supports the lower back decoration member 3141 from the rear side are provided. The lower decoration member 3141 of the lower decoration unit 3140 is formed so that a relief-like decoration based on a circle is formed on the surface and partially has translucency. The lower back decoration base 3142 extends in the left-right direction from the lower back decoration member 3141 and is formed of a transparent member. The lower back decoration base 3142 includes a plurality of lens portions formed in a polygonal pyramid shape on the surface.

  The back decoration unit 3100 of this example can be visually recognized through the transparent panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 and the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 on the front side, and can decorate the rear side of the game panel 1200. It is like that. The back decoration unit 3100 is formed in a frame shape by the left back decoration unit 3110, the right back decoration unit 3120, the upper back decoration unit 3130, and the lower back decoration unit 3140, and is arranged on the rear side through the frame. The upper movable effect unit, the right movable effect unit, the left movable effect unit, the lower movable effect unit, the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the like can be visually recognized.

[2-8. Ball guidance unit]
Next, the ball guiding unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit in the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 130 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit as seen from the back. The ball passage unit 3200 of this example is arranged near the front surface in the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 near the center in the left-right direction, and receives the game balls received in the first start port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100. It will guide you down. This ball guiding unit 3200 includes a right passage member 3210 disposed on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 and a left passage member 3220 disposed on the left side.

  The right passage member 3210 of the ball guiding unit 3200 has a start port passage 3211 that receives the game ball received in the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and guided rearward by the flange portion 2110b and guides it downward, and the start port Middle right that receives a game ball that is formed adjacent to the passage 3211 and that is received by the general winning port 2104 disposed on the right side of the big winning port 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 and guided rearward by the collar unit 2110b and that guides downward. And a general prize opening passage 3212.

  In addition, the left passage member 3220 of the ball guiding unit 3200 is located on the left side of the big prize opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100, and on the general prize opening 2104 arranged on the right side of the big prize opening 2103, in the general prize opening. The middle left general winning hole passage 3221 that receives the game ball received by the hook 2110b and guided rearward by the collar portion 2110b and guides it downward, and the general right on the right side of the general winning hole 2104 that is arranged to face each other in the attacker unit 2100 A side-right general winning opening passage 3222 that receives the game ball received by the winning opening 2104 and guided rearward by the collar portion 2110b and guides it to the lower portion of the middle left general winning opening passage 3221 and the back side arrangement in the attacker unit 2100 Received by the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the received general winning opening 2104 Includes a side left regular winning opening passage 3223 to induce the lower middle left regular winning opening passage 3221 receives the game ball guided rearward, the by 110b.

  The game balls guided downward by the right passage member 3210 and the left passage member 3220 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160 and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 to the lower side of the game board 4. It has become so.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 3200 of this example includes a first start port sensor 3231 that is attached to a predetermined position of the right passage member 3210 and detects a game ball flowing in the start port passage 3211, a right passage member 3210, and a left passage member. And a general winning opening sensor 3232 for detecting game balls received at the general winning opening 2104, which are respectively attached to predetermined positions 3220. One general winning opening sensor 3232 is provided for each of the middle right general winning opening passage 3212, the middle left general winning opening passage 3221, the side right general winning opening passage 3222, and the side left general winning opening passage 3223. It is possible to determine which of the general winning holes 2104 is a game ball that has won. The general winning port sensor 3232 provided in the middle left general winning port passage 3221 is disposed on the downstream side of the position where the side right general winning port passage 3222 and the side left general winning port passage 3223 merge. The game balls flowing through the right general winning opening passage 3222 and the side left general winning opening passage 3223 are detected by the two general winning opening sensors 3232.

[2-9. Upper movable production unit]
Next, the upper movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. FIG. 131A is a perspective view of the upper movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 131B is a perspective view of the upper movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the upper movable effect unit as seen from the front after being disassembled into the upper movable unit and the lift unit, and FIG. 133 is an exploded view of the upper movable effect unit into the upper movable unit and the lift unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. Further, FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the upper movable production unit as seen from the front and exploded, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the upper movable unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 136 (a) is a plan view of the upper movable unit in the upper movable effect unit, (b) is a front view of the upper movable unit, and (c) is the upper movable unit shown in a state where the figure is rotated. FIG.

  Further, FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front after disassembling the lifting unit, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the lifting unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 139 is a perspective view showing the main part of the lifting mechanism in the upper movable effect unit later. Further, FIG. 140 is a front view for explaining raising and lowering of the upper movable unit in the upper movable production unit, and FIG. 141 is a rear view for explaining raising and lowering of the upper movable unit.

  The upper movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the approximate center in the left-right direction above the opening 3001c in the back box 3001, and the center logo decoration of the center accessory 2500 is assembled with the game board 4 assembled. The member 2520 is located on the rear side. The upper movable effect unit 3300 includes an upper movable unit 3310 having a pair of character bodies 3311 that are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, and an elevating unit 3350 that moves the upper movable unit 3310 up and down.

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the upper movable unit 3310 of the upper movable effect unit 3300 imitates a disc-shaped pedestal portion 3311a and a character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 attached on the pedestal portion 3311a. A pair of character bodies 3311 having a figure 3311b and spaced apart in the left-right direction, a pair of spur gear-like rotation gears 3312 connected to the lower end of the pedestal portion 3311a in each character body 3311, and a pair of rotation gears An intermediate gear 3313 that is arranged between the three gears 3312 and meshes with the right rotation gear 3312 in front view, and a drive gear 3314 that meshes with the intermediate gear 3313 and the left rotation gear 3312 and has the same diameter as the intermediate gear 3313. A character body drive motor 3315 for rotating the drive gear 3314; Rotation gear 3312 to support the Yarakuta body drive motor 3315 to the lower surface, and a rotatably supporting shallow dish-like character-based 3316 the upper is opened by the intermediate gear 3313 and the drive gear 3314 top side.

  The pair of character bodies 3311 that are spaced apart from each other is a figure 3311b of a different character, but the poses of the figure 3311b are formed in substantially the same pose. The left rotation gear 3312 includes a plate-like detection piece 3312a that extends from the lower end in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis and is partially cut off in the circumferential direction. Further, the character base 3316 is formed with a support hole 3316a penetrating in the vertical direction with a smaller diameter than the rotation gear 3312 at a portion where the rotation gear 3312 is disposed.

  The upper movable unit 3310 has a through hole 3317a that covers the opened upper portion of the character base 3316 and through which the pedestal 3311a of the character body 3311 can pass, and a part of the upper surface of which a relief-like decoration is formed. A decorative plate 3317 having translucency, an upper movable lower decorative substrate 3318 mounted on the lower surface of the character base 3316 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper and lower surfaces, and a lower side of the upper movable lower decorative substrate 3318 are covered. A translucent character base cover 3319 attached to the lower surface of the character base 3316.

  Further, the upper movable unit 3310 is attached to the lower surface of the character base 3316 above the character base cover 3319 and detects a detection piece 3312a in the rotation gear 3312 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the lower side of the character base 3316. And a disk-shaped rotary presser 3321 attached to the lower surface of the rotary gear 3312 through the support hole 3316a. The rotation detection sensor 3320 can detect the rotation position of the rotation gear 3312, that is, the character body 3311 by detecting a notch formed in the detection piece 3312 a in the left rotation gear 3312.

  The rotary presser 3321 of the upper movable unit 3310 is attached to the lower surface of the rotary gear 3312 through the support hole 3316a of the character base 3316 so that the character base 3316 can be sandwiched between the rotary gear 3312 and the rotary presser 3321. It has become. As a result, the support hole 3316a serves as a guide so that the rotation gear 3312 is rotatably supported with respect to the character base 3316, and the rotation gear 3312 can rotate along the surface of the character base 3316. The rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction of the rotation gear 3312 can be prevented from tilting. That is, the character body 3311 can be prevented from tilting.

  Further, the upper movable unit 3310 includes a back decoration member 3330 that is attached to the rear end of the character base 3316 and forms the background of the pair of character bodies 3311. The back decoration member 3330 in the upper movable unit 3310 decorates the rear side (background) of the pair of character bodies 3311 above the decoration plate 3317, forms a heart-shaped relief, and has a translucent center. A decorative member 3331, a back side decorative member 3332 having a plurality of star-shaped decorations arranged on the left and right sides of the back central decorative member 3331, and a back frame 3333 that supports the back side decorative member 3332 and the back central decorative member 3331, respectively. The upper movable body rear central decorative board 3334 disposed on the rear side of the rear central decorative member 3331 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and disposed on the rear side of the rear side decorative board 3332 and supported by the rear frame 3333. Upper movable body rear side decoration board 3335 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the upper movable body rear surface Includes rear center ornament member 3331 while being disposed on the rear side of the decorative substrate 3334, a back base 3336 for supporting the rear end of the rear frame 3333, and character-based 3316, the.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the upper movable body rear decoration board 3334 of the rear decoration member 3330 extends downward from the lower end of the rear central decoration member 3331 and is attached to the lower side of the character base 3316. It is the form extended to the rear side. The upper movable body back surface decoration board 3334 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the portion extending to the rear side of the character base cover 3319, so that the character base cover 3316 can also be decorated with light emission. Yes.

  The upper movable unit 3310 in the upper movable effect unit 3300 in this example includes a pair of character bodies 3311 that are spaced apart from each other when the rotation detection sensor 3320 detects a cutout portion of the detection piece 3312a in the rotation gear 3312. Each of the figures 3311b faces the front (see FIG. 136 (b) and the like). When the upper movable unit 3310 rotates and drives the drive gear 3314 by the character body drive motor 3315, the left rotation gear 3312 and the intermediate gear 3313 meshed with the drive gear 3314 rotate in opposite directions to the drive gear 3314, respectively. At the same time, the right rotation gear 3312 meshed with the intermediate gear 3313 rotates in the same direction as the drive gear 3314. In this example, since the driving gear 3314 and the intermediate gear 3313 have the same diameter, the left and right rotating gears 3312 rotate in different directions at the same speed.

  As a result, the character bodies 3311 attached to the pair of rotating gears 3312 spaced apart from each other on the left and right can rotate in different directions around the axis extending in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the pair of character bodies 3311 (figure 3311b) can be directed in directions other than the front, and various movable effects can be performed (see FIG. 136 (c)).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 137 to 139 and the like, the elevating unit 3350 in the upper movable effect unit 3300 includes a shallow box-shaped unit base 3351 attached in the back box 3001 and extending in the left-right direction, and the front side being opened. A long slide rod 3352 having an upper end and a lower end supported at a position on the left side of the center of the base 3351 on the left side in the horizontal direction and extending in the vertical direction, and a slide member 3353 supported by the slide rod 3352 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The upper and lower left sides of the slide member 3353 are attached to the front end of the slide member 3353. The lift slider 3354 has a substantially rectangular plate shape extending vertically and the upper movable unit 3310 is attached to the front surface. The slider 3354 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction and is A guide roller 3355 rotatably supported at the lower part of the front surface of 3351, and attached to a position on the opposite side of the slide rod 3352 across the lifting slider 3354 on the front surface of the unit base 3351. A slide guide 3356 for restricting the right side from moving in the front-rear direction, and attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 on the right side of the slide guide 3356 and supported by a slide rod 3352 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction via a slide member 3353. And an elevating mechanism 3360 for elevating the elevating slider 3354.

  As shown in the drawing, the unit base 3351 of the elevating unit 3350 is formed with a long-hole-shaped guide groove 3351a extending in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction substantially at the center in the left-right direction, and sandwiching the guide groove 3351a. A slide rod 3352 is attached to the left side, and a slide guide 3356 is attached to the right side. The unit base 3351 includes a pair of roller support pins 3351b protruding forward on the left and right sides of the lower end of the guide groove 3351a. The guide roller 3355 is rotated by inserting the guide roller 3355 into the roller support pins 3351b. It can be supported as possible.

  The unit base 3351 includes an arm support pin 3351c that protrudes forward from a position on the right side of the position where the slide guide 3356 is attached and supports a lift arm 3365 of a lift mechanism 3360, which will be described later, in a rotatable manner. The unit base 3351 has a rectangular opening 3351d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position on the left side of the position where the slide rod 3352 is attached. The character body provided in the upper movable unit 3310 through the opening 3351d. A wiring member 3357 for connecting the drive motor 3315, the rotation detection sensor 3320, the decorative boards 3318, 3334, 3335, and the upper relay board 3016 extends to the rear side of the unit base 3351. In this example, the wiring member 3357 is a flexible flat cable.

  The lifting / lowering slider 3354 of the lifting / lowering unit 3350 includes a main body 3354a extending vertically in a rectangular shape, a mounting piece 3354b extending leftward from the upper end of the main body 3354a, and a rightward direction from the upper end of the main body 3354a. An extended plate-shaped piece 3354c that extends and a connecting hole 3354d that is formed at the center of the left and right direction at the upper end of the main body portion 3354a and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. The lift slider 3354 has an attachment piece 3354b attached to the front end of the slide member 3353, and an extension piece 3351c inserted into the slit 3356a of the slide guide 3356. Further, a connecting shaft 3366 of an elevating mechanism 3360 described later is inserted into the connecting hole 3354d of the elevating slider 3354. Note that an attachment hole for attaching the back base 3336 of the upper movable unit 3310 to the main body 3354a is formed at an appropriate position in the elevating slider 3354.

  The guide roller 3355 of the elevating unit 3350 has a cylindrical shape that extends short in the front-rear direction and has a front roller 3355a having a flange that extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis at the front end, and is disposed on the rear side of the front roller 3355a and is short in the front-rear direction. And a rear roller 3355b having a flange that extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis at the rear end. The guide roller 3355 is rotatably supported by being inserted into the roller support pin 3351b of the unit base 3351. The cylindrical portions of the front roller 3355a and the rear roller 3355b are the main body of the lift slider 3354. It comes in contact with the side surface of the portion 3354a.

  Further, the guide roller 3355 is inserted into the roller support pin 3351b so that the flange of the front roller 3355a is positioned on the front side of the elevating slider 3354 and the flange of the rear roller 3355b is positioned on the rear side of the elevating slider 3354. The main body 3354c of the elevating slider 3354 can be sandwiched in the front-rear direction by the flanges of the front roller 3355a and the rear roller 3355b, and the elevating slider 3354 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the guide rollers 3355 arranged on both the left and right sides of the main body portion 3354a of the elevating slider 3354 can smoothly guide in the vertical direction while restricting the main body portion 3354a of the elevating slider 3354 from moving in the front-rear direction. It can be done.

  The slide guide 3356 of the lifting / lowering unit 3350 is formed in a crank shape in which the shape in plan view is located on the left side forward of the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the front-rear direction at the center in the left-right direction and penetrates in the left-right direction. 3356a. In this slide guide 3356, an extending piece 3354c of the elevating slider 3354 is inserted into the slit 3356a from the left side, and the extending piece 3354c can move in the vertical direction and move in the front-rear direction. Can be regulated.

  The elevating mechanism 3360 of the elevating unit 3350 includes an elevating drive motor 3361 having a rotating shaft extending rearward, a spur gear-like drive gear 3362 driven to rotate by the elevating drive motor 3361, and a first transmission gear meshing with the drive gear 3362. A reduction gear 3363 having a second transmission gear having a smaller diameter than that of the first transmission gear 3363b and a second transmission gear 3363b of the reduction gear 3363 meshing with the third transmission gear 3363a and the first transmission gear 3363a. A third transmission gear 3364a having the same diameter as the first transmission gear 3363a, and a cam having a link pin 3364b protruding rearward in parallel to the axial direction from a position eccentric to the rotation axis of the third transmission gear 3364a. A link gear 3364 and a base end that is disposed behind the cam link gear 3364 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 3351 3365a and a base end portion 3365a, and a connecting portion 3365b that is formed at a position separated from the rotating shaft and is connected to the lifting slider 3354, and a link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364. And a rod-like connecting shaft 3366 that is supported by the connecting portion 3365b of the elevating arm 3365 and inserted into the connecting hole 3354d of the elevating slider 3354.

  The elevation mechanism 3360 is disposed in the vicinity of the right end on the front surface side of the unit base 3351 in a front view, and a drive gear 3362, a reduction gear 3363, and a cam link gear 3364 are disposed side by side from the right to the left.

  The elevating arm 3365 of the elevating mechanism 3360 has a base end portion 3365a having a support hole through which the arm support pin 3351c of the unit base 3351 is inserted, and the base end portion 3365a to the axis of the support hole (rotating shaft). A connecting portion 3365b disposed at a position away from the right-angle direction, an arm portion 3365c connecting the connecting portion 3365b and the base end portion 3365a, and a direction shorter than the arm portion 3365c from the base end portion 3365a to the arm portion 3365c. An extended portion 3365d that extends, a connecting portion 3365e that is formed at the tip of the extended portion 3365d and is connected to the link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364, and a plate-like detection that extends outward from the middle of the arm portion 3365c Piece 3365f.

  As shown in the drawing, the lifting arm 3365 has an arm portion 3365c extending from the base end portion 3365a to the center side in the left-right direction with respect to the unit base 3351, and an extending portion 3365d is a right end with respect to the unit base 3351. It extends to the side and is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. Further, the elevating arm 3365 has a connecting portion 3365b and a connecting portion 3365e extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base end portion 3365a and formed in a long hole shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364 is slidably inserted.

  The elevating mechanism 3360 is guided by the guide groove 3351a of the unit base 3351 in the vertical direction and is slidable in the elongated hole-shaped connecting portion 3365b of the elevating arm 3365 and supports the rear end of the connecting shaft 3366. A sliding member 3367, a lifting detection sensor 3368 for detecting the rotation position of the lifting arm 3365 by detecting a detection piece 3365f of the lifting arm 3365 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a front side of the lifting arm 3365 are arranged. And a gear cover 3369 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 and covers the rear side of the drive gear 3362, the reduction gear 3363, and the cam link gear 3364, and a drive gear 3362 and a reduction gear 3363 that are attached to the front surface of the gear cover 3369. , And cam link gear 3364 A motor holder 3370 elevation drive motor 3361 to the front to cover the front side is mounted, further comprising a.

  The gear cover 3369 and the motor holder 3370 of the elevating mechanism 3360 cooperate with each other to support the reduction gear 3363 and the cam link gear 3364 so as to be rotatable. Further, the gear cover 369 is provided with a semicircular slit 3369a through which the link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364 can pass, and a long hole of an elevating arm 3365 in which the link pin 3364b is arranged on the rear side through the slit 3369a. It is inserted in the connection part 3365e of a shape. Reference numeral 3371 in the drawing is a washer for reducing the sliding resistance between the elevating slider 3354 and the elevating arm 3365 with the connecting shaft 3366 inserted.

  Next, raising and lowering of the upper movable unit 3310 in the upper movable effect unit 3300 of this example will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. In this upper movable effect unit 3300, the connecting portion 3365b of the elevating arm 3365 in the elevating unit 3350 is located on the left side in front of the rotation axis (base end portion 3365a) of the elevating arm 3365. Due to the load of the upper movable unit 3310 acting on the elevating arm 3365 via the slider 3354, a force (moment) for rotating the connecting portion 3365b in the direction of moving downward is constantly acting on the elevating arm 3365. .

  As shown in FIG. 109 and the like, the upper movable effect unit 3300 is located at a retracted position where the upper movable unit 3310 is raised in a normal state. In this state, the character base cover 3319 of the upper movable unit 3310 is excluded. Therefore, the character body 3311, the back decoration member 3330, and the like cannot be seen from the player.

  In the state of the retracted position in which the upper movable unit 3310 is raised, the upper movable effect unit 3300 is configured such that the link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364 is a long hole-shaped connecting portion of the lifting arm 3365, as shown in FIG. It is in a state of being in contact with the end portion on the rotating shaft side in 3365e. In the retracted position, the normal line passing through the link pin 3364b with respect to the axis extending the connecting portion 3365e passes below the rotation center of the cam link gear 3364. The rotational moment applied to the arm 3365 causes a force to move the link pin 3364b downward from the connecting portion 3365e (a force to rotate the cam link gear 3364 counterclockwise in the rear view). The link pin 3364b is in contact with the end of the connecting portion 3365e on the rotating shaft side, and the cam link gear 3364 can no longer rotate counterclockwise in the rear view, and the lifting arm 3365 The rotation is restricted (locked). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load of the upper movable unit 3310 from acting on the lift drive motor 3361 via the lift arm 3365, the cam link gear 3364, the reduction gear 3363, and the drive gear 3362. A load is not applied to the lifting drive motor 3361 at the retracted position.

  Further, in a state where the upper movable unit 3310 is positioned at the retreated position, the detection piece 3365f formed on the elevating arm 3365 is detected by the elevating detection sensor 3368. Accordingly, the up / down detection sensor 3368 can detect that the upper movable unit 3310 is located at the retracted position.

  When the up-and-down drive motor 3361 is rotated so that the cam link gear 3364 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view from the state where the upper movable unit 3310 is raised, the link pin 3364b rotates the cam link gear 3364. While revolving around the center, it slides in a direction away from the base end portion 3365a in the elongated hole-like connection portion 3365e of the lifting arm 3365. And the raising / lowering arm 3365 will rotate centering | focusing on the base end part 3365a with the revolution of the link pin 3364b sliding in the connection part 3365e.

  On the other hand, on the side of the connecting portion 3365b that supports the upper movable unit 3310 in the elevating arm 3365, a connecting shaft 3366 for connecting the elevating arm 3365 and the elevating slider 3354 is guided to the unit base 3351 via the connecting sliding member 3367. It is guided in the vertical direction by the groove 3351a and is slidably guided in the elongated hole-shaped connecting portion 3365b in the lifting arm 3365. Thus, when the lifting arm 3365 rotates, the connecting sliding member 3365 slides in the connecting portion 3365b of the lifting arm 3365 and simultaneously slides in the guide groove 3351a and is supported by the connecting sliding member 3365. The lift slider 3354, that is, the upper movable unit 3310 slides up and down through the shaft 3366.

  In this example, as described above, the normal line passing through the link pin 3364b in the axis of the connection portion 3365e passes below the rotation center of the cam link gear 3364 in the retracted position state. The lifting arm 3365 rotates counterclockwise in the rear view until 3364b revolves in the clockwise direction in the rear view and the normal passing through the link pin 3364b passes through the rotation center of the cam link gear 3364. It becomes. When the link pin 3364b revolves clockwise in the rear view, the normal passing through the link pin 3364b passes above the rotation center of the cam link gear 3364, and the lifting arm 3365 is rotated clockwise in the rear view. It will rotate in the direction of. Accordingly, when the up / down drive motor 3361 is rotationally driven in the direction of lowering the upper movable unit 3310 in the retracted position, the upper movable unit 3310 is once raised and then lowered.

  Further, the lifting arm 3365 further rotates so that the lower ends of the mounting piece 3354b and the extending piece 3354c of the lifting slider 3354 are in contact with the lower ends of the slits 3356a in the guide roller 3355 and the slider guide 3356, and at the same time, the lifting drive motor 3361. Is stopped, the downward movement of the elevating slider 3354 is stopped, and the upper movable unit 3310 is located at the lowering appearance position (see FIGS. 140 (b) and 141 (b)). .

  In the state in which the upper movable production unit 3300 is located at the position where the upper movable unit 3310 is lowered, the pair of character bodies 3311 and the back surface decoration member 3330 of the upper movable unit 3310 are more than the center logo decoration member 2520 of the center accessory 2500. Also, the character body 3311 and the like can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 166).

  In order to raise the lowered movable unit 3310, the elevating drive motor 3361 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above, and the elevating arm 3365 is rotated in the opposite direction to the lowered direction, thereby moving the elevating slider 3354. Can be raised. When the detection piece 3365f of the lifting arm 3365 is detected by the lifting detection sensor 3368, the upper movable unit 3310 can be returned to the raised retracted position by stopping the rotational driving of the lifting drive motor 3361. ing.

  In this way, the upper movable effect unit 3300 of this example has the pair of character bodies 3311 and the like as the center logo decoration member in the center accessory 2500 when the upper movable unit 3310 including the pair of character bodies 3311 is in the retreated position. Only a part of the character base cover 3319 located on the lower side and located on the lower side and not visible to the player is visible. The character base cover 3319 of the upper movable unit 3310 is decorated with light emission by LEDs mounted on the upper movable body lower decorative substrate 3318 disposed on the upper side and the upper movable body rear central decorative substrate 3334 disposed on the rear side. Thus, the character base cover 3319 facing from the lower end of the center logo decoration member 2520 can be brightly illuminated, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the character base cover 3319 (the rear side of the center logo decoration member 2520). In addition, the inside of the game area 1100 can be made conspicuous by illuminating the inside of the center accessory 2500.

  Further, the upper movable effect unit 3300 rotates the up-and-down drive motor 3361 according to the game state, so that the upper movable unit 3310 including the pair of character bodies 3311 can be played from the retreat position where it cannot be seen from the player side. It can be lowered to the appearance position that can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the appearance of the character body 3311 can make the player think that there is something good, and increase the expectation for the game. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the upper movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the pair of character bodies 3311 that appear by moving up and down around the axis extending in the vertical direction, for example, predetermined music is output in accordance with the rotation of the character body 3311. Thus, the player can be given an illusion that the character body 3311 is dancing to music, and the movement of the character body 3311 can be enjoyed to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating.

  Further, the upper movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the pair of character bodies 3311 around the axis extending in the vertical direction. Thus, the atmosphere of the character can be changed, various messages can be sent to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired of can be obtained by various effects.

[2-10. Left and right movable production unit]
Next, the left and right movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 142 to 159. 142 is a perspective view of the left and right movable effect units in the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the left and right movable effects unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the left and right movable effect unit as seen from the front after being disassembled into the rotating body unit and the slide unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 146 is a perspective view showing one rotating body unit in the left and right movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the left and right movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the right and left movable effect unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  FIG. 149 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the rotating decorative body in the rotating body unit of the left and right movable effect unit, FIG. 150 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the rotating decorative body following FIG. 149, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the rotation decoration body following. 152 is a perspective view showing the right unit slide unit in the left and right movable effect unit, FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit slide unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 154 is the right unit slide unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the slide unit. Further, FIG. 155 is a perspective view showing the left unit slide unit in the left and right movable effect unit, FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit slide unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 157 is the left unit slide unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the slide unit. FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the right unit in the left / right movable effect unit, and FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the left unit in the left / right movable effect unit.

  The left and right movable effect units 3400 in the back unit 3000 are attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001, and a right unit 3400R attached to the right side of the opening 3001c and a left unit 3400L attached to the left side of the opening 3001c. It consists of and. The left and right movable effect unit 3400 of this example includes a plurality of (three each) rotating body units 3410 and a plurality of rotating body units 3410 that slide independently of the right unit 3400R and the left unit 3400L, respectively. Right slide unit 3510 and left slide unit 3550).

  The left-right movable effect unit 3400 includes a rotating decoration body 3410A that is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rotating body unit 3410, and can perform a rotation effect by rotating the rotating decoration body 3410A. It can be done. In addition, the left and right movable effect unit 3400 can slide each rotating body unit 3410 independently in the left and right directions, and can perform a slide effect. Accordingly, various movable effects can be performed by appropriately combining the slide effect of the rotating body unit 3410 and the rotation effect of the rotating decorative body 3410A.

[2-10A. Configuration of rotating body unit]
Next, the configuration of the rotating body unit 3410 in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148 and the like. This rotating body unit 3410 is disposed on the rear side of the rotating body base 3411 and the plate-like rotating body base 3411 attached to the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 of the slide unit 3500, and the rotating shaft rotates. A rotation drive motor 3412 extending through the body base 3411 and extending forward, a disk-shaped rotation coupler 3413 fixed to the rotation shaft of the rotation drive motor 3412 and disposed on the front surface of the rotation body base 3411; A cylindrical shaft member 3414 that is connected to the front face so as to be integrally rotatable and extends forward, and is attached to the front end of the shaft member 3414 and bulges out in a substantially hemispherical shape to form a relief-like decoration on the surface. A translucent rotary head 3415 and a rear surface of the rotary head 3415 and a plurality of A rotary head decorative board 3416 ED is mounted, and a, a substrate bracket 3417 attached to the rotating body based 3411 has a relief-like decoration on the front to support the rotary head decorative substrate 3416 from the front side.

  The rotating body base 3411 of the rotating body unit 3410 has a rectangular shape with the same width (height) as the diameter of a semicircle with a predetermined radius centered on the rotating shaft of the rotary drive motor 3412 attached to the rear side. It is formed in a cannonball shape that combines shapes. The rotating body base 3411 has an opening through which a detection portion of a rotation detection sensor 3426, which will be described later, can be passed, and mounting holes and mounting bosses for fixing each member are formed at appropriate positions. .

  The rotating coupler 3413 of the rotating body unit 3410 is formed so that the rear surface is in contact with the front surface of the rotating body base 3411 and slides, and a plurality of protrusions 3413a are formed on the front surface. The rotary coupler 3413 is made of a material having a low frictional resistance.

  As shown in the figure, the shaft member 3414 of the rotating body unit 3410 includes a disk-shaped flange portion 3414a at the rear end, and a recess 3414b that fits with the protrusion 3413a of the rotary coupler 3413 is formed on the rear surface of the flange portion 3414a. (See FIG. 148). By fitting the protrusion 3413 a of the rotary coupler 3413 into the recess 3414 b of the shaft member 3414, the rotation of the rotary coupler 3413 can be transmitted to the shaft member 3414. As shown in the figure, the front end of the shaft member 3414 has a non-cylindrical outer periphery, and is fitted into a fitting hole 3424a of a turntable front member 3424 described later to rotate the turntable front member 3424 integrally. It can be made to.

  The rotating head 3415 of the rotating body unit 3410 has a heart-shaped translucent portion on a substantially hemispherical surface, and a heart-shaped light emitting decoration is provided by the LED of the rotating head decoration substrate 3416 disposed on the rear side. It has come to be. In addition, the surface of the other part of the rotating head 3415 except for the heart-shaped part has a metallic luster in the form of a plating, and the light from the outside is reflected to glitter. Yes. Note that the left and right movable effect unit 3400 of this example has a rotating head 3415 of the rotating body unit 3410 provided in the right unit 3400R formed in a substantially hemispherical shape, whereas a rotating head provided in the left unit 3400L. 3415 is formed in a hemispherical shape that is slightly crushed in the front-rear direction than the rotary head 3415 of the right unit 3400R. Therefore, the front end of the rotary head 3415 of the right unit 3400R is in a state of protruding forward from the rear surface of the game panel 1200, and the front end of the rotary head 3415 of the left unit 3400L is positioned rearward of the panel plate 1210. It is in a state (see FIG. 114, etc.).

  The rotating body unit 3410 is disposed behind the rotating head 3415 and has a passage hole 3418a through which the shaft member 3414 passes rotatably. The rotating body unit 3410 is formed in the vicinity of the rear end coaxially with the passage hole 3418a. A cylindrical fixed gear member 3418 that has a gear 3418b and is attached to the front surface of the rotating body base 3411, and an inner diameter that is larger than the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418 and a fixed gear 3418b in the fixed gear member 3418. An annular guide ring 3419 that is inserted in a position that is relatively non-rotatable relative to the rear side, the rear end abutting against the front surface of the rotating body base 3411, and the rear end edge is slidable with respect to the front end of the guide ring 3419 And a plate-like turntable rear member 3420 having a through hole 3420a through which the fixed gear member 3418 can pass. That.

  The rotating body unit 3410 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the turntable rear member 3420 and meshes with the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418 to protrude forward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation axis. A movable link gear 3421 having a pin 3421a and a link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 are slidably inserted, and are perpendicular to the axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. The first link groove 3422a having a long hole extending in the direction, extending in parallel with the first link groove 3422a, and symmetrically about the axis line connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. It has a pair of elongated hole-shaped second link grooves 3422b arranged to connect the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. It axially slidable and is a plate-shaped oscillating member 3422, and a.

  Further, the rotating body unit 3410 is slidably inserted along the swing member 3422 from the rear end of the insertion pin 3423a and the insertion pin 3423a which is slidably inserted into the second link groove 3422b of the swing member 3422 and extends in the front-rear direction. A drive arm portion 3423b extending to the outside of the moving member 3422, a shaft portion 3423c formed at the end of the drive arm portion 3423b opposite to the insertion pin 3423a, and rotatably supported by the turntable rear member 3420, a shaft portion 3423c. A pair of arm members 3423 having an operating arm portion 3423d extending in a different direction from the drive arm portion 3423b and having an outer surface decorated, and a turntable so as to cover the arm member 3423 and the swinging member 3422 from the front side The swing member 3422 is attached to the front surface of the rear member 3420 and the shaft core of the movable link gear 3421 and the shaft member. The shaft portion 3423c is supported so as to be slidable in the axial direction connecting the shaft core of 414, and the shaft portion 3423c is rotatably supported in cooperation with the turntable rear member 3420. And a turntable front member 3424 having a fitting hole 3424a that is fitted so as to be integrally rotatable.

  The fixed gear member 3418 of the rotator unit 3410 has a cylindrical inner shape formed so that the rotary coupler 3413 and the shaft member 3414 do not come into contact with each other, and the front end of the shaft member 3414 is located forward in the assembled state. The length is fixed. In this example, the number of teeth of the fixed gear 3418b in the fixed gear member 3418 is 30 and the number of teeth of the movable link gear 3421 meshing with the fixed gear 3418b is 10. Accordingly, when the fixed gear 3418b makes one rotation relatively, the movable link gear 3421 rotates three times, and the movable link gear 3421 revolves around the fixed gear member 3418 (fixed gear 3418b) once. The movable link gear 3421 rotates three times.

  Further, the rotary table front member 3420 of the rotating body unit 3410 extends forward from a position outside the through hole 3420a through which the fixed gear member 3418 can pass through in the front-rear direction and rotatably supports the movable link gear 3421. Are arranged symmetrically on both sides across an axis connecting the center of the shaft pin 3420b and the center of the shaft pin 3420b and the center of the through-hole 3420a, and are arranged at positions away from the radius of the through-hole 3420a from the axis. A bearing portion 3420c that rotatably supports the rear end of the shaft portion 3423c in the arm member 3423, and a through hole 3420a sandwiching the shaft pin 3420b on an axis line connecting the center of the shaft pin 3420b and the center of the through hole 3420a A plate-shaped detection piece 3420d that is disposed on the opposite side and protrudes backward.

  Further, the first link groove 3422a of the swing member 3422 of the rotating body unit 3410 is formed so that the center in the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. Has been. The swinging member 3422 has a U-shaped notch 3422c extending in the direction of the axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. And a guide protrusion 3422d that extends parallel to the axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414 on both sides of the notch 3422c and is guided by the rotating body front member 3424. The second link groove 3422b is disposed outside the guide protrusion 3422d with respect to the axis.

  In addition, the operating arm portion 3423d of the arm member 3423 of the rotating body unit 3410 has a direction in which the tip side opposite to the shaft portion 3423c approaches the axis line connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. It is formed in the shape of a crooked bend, and a circular ornament imitating a hand is formed at the tip.

  Further, the rotating table front member 3424 of the rotating body unit 3410 includes a cylindrical tube portion 3424b having a fitting hole 3424a fitted to the front end of the shaft member 3414 at the front end, and a swing member from the rear end of the tube portion 3424b. And a plate-like main body 3424c that extends in parallel with 3422 and substantially covers the front surface of the rear turntable member 3420. The cylindrical portion 3424b of the turntable front member 3424 is formed such that the inner surface shape thereof is not in contact with the fixed gear member 3418, and can accommodate the front side of the fixed gear member 3418 with respect to the fixed gear 3418b. Yes.

  The turntable front member 3424 extends rearward from a symmetrical position on both sides across the axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414, and rotates the shaft 3423c of the arm member 3423. A pair of support pins 3424d for supporting them, and an oscillating member that extends between a pair of support pins 3424d and extends in parallel with an axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. And a guide portion 3424e that slidably guides the guide protrusion 3422d of 3422 (see FIG. 148). The guide member 3424e of the turntable front member 3424 allows the swinging member 3422 to be slid in the axial direction connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414.

  Further, the rotating body unit 3410 is attached to the rear side of the rotating body base 3411 and covers the mounting portion of the rotation drive motor 3412. The rotating body unit 3410 is sandwiched between the motor cover 3425 and the rotating body base 3411, and the rear rotating table member A rotation detection sensor 3426 for detecting a detection piece 3420d of 3420, a three-dimensional decoration formed on the front surface of the rotating body base 3411, and a part thereof having translucency, and a guide. A through hole 3427a having a size through which the ring 3419 can pass, and a rotating body base decoration 3427 having an opening 3427b through which the detection unit of the rotation detection sensor 3426 can pass.

  The rotating body base decoration 3427 of the rotating body unit 3410 is formed in a bullet shape whose front view is slightly larger than the rotating body base 3411, and a plurality of circular light-transmitting portions 3427c are formed so as to surround the through hole 3427a. They are arranged in a horseshoe shape.

  The rotating body unit 3410 further includes a base decoration board 3428 that is attached to the rear side of the rotating body base decoration 3427 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. As illustrated, the base decoration board 3428 is formed in a horseshoe shape, and LEDs are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of light transmitting portions 3427 c of the rotating body base decoration 3427. The base decoration board 3428 can light-decorate the rotating body base decoration 3427 by appropriately causing the mounted LED to emit light.

  Further, the rotating body unit 3410 is disposed at the front end of the fixed gear member 3418 and on the outer periphery of the sliding washer 3429 disposed in the tube portion 3424b of the turntable front member 3424 and the tube portion 3424b of the turntable front member 3424. A substrate support member 3430 that supports the rotating head decoration substrate 3416 by contacting the front surface of the main body 3424c of the rotating table front member 3424 and the rear end thereof is attached to the front side of the rotating table rear member 3420 and sandwiching the shaft pin 3420b. And a rotating body cover 3431 that covers the front surface opposite to the through hole 3420a.

  The rotary unit 3410 includes a rotary coupler 3413, a shaft member 3414, a rotary head 3415, a rotary table rear member 3420, a movable link gear 3421, a swing member 3422, an arm member 3423, and a rotary table front member 3424 from a rotary drive motor 3412. And the turntable cover 3431 is configured to rotate, and these constitute a rotating decorative body 3410A.

[2-10B. Rotating decorative body operation]
Subsequently, the movement of the rotating decorative body 3410A in the rotating body unit 3410 of the left / right movable effect unit 3400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151. When the rotary unit 3410 of this example rotates the rotary shaft of the rotary drive motor 3412 according to the gaming state, the rotary member 3410 extends forward via a rotary coupler 3413 attached to the rotary shaft of the rotary drive motor 3412. 3414 rotates. A rotary head 3415 is attached to the tip of the shaft member 3414, and a substantially hemispherical rotary head 3415 arranged at the foremost end of the rotary unit 3410 is rotated by a rotary drive motor 3412.

  Further, the front end of the shaft member 3414 in the rotating decorative body 3410A is fitted and inserted into the fitting hole 3424a of the rotating table front member 3424, so that the rotating table front member 3424 rotates together with the shaft member 3414. ing. The front rotating table member 3424 supports the swinging member 3422 so as to be slidable, supports the shaft portion 3423c of the pair of arm members 3423 so as to be rotatable, and further supports a rear rotating table rear member 3420 disposed on the rear side. Since the rotating table front member 3424 rotates through the shaft member 3414, the swinging member 3422, the arm member 3423, and the rotating table rear member 3420 are also moved together with the front table 3424. The shaft member 3414 rotates integrally around the axis. Further, since the turntable rear member 3420 rotatably supports the movable link gear 3421 at a position away from the axis of the shaft member 3414, the movable link gear 3421 is pivoted together with the rotation of the turntable rear member 3420. The member 3414 revolves around the axis.

  On the other hand, the fixed gear member 3418 arranged coaxially with the shaft member 3414 is fixedly attached to the rotating body base 3411 to which the rotation drive motor 3412 is attached, and the rotation shaft of the rotation drive motor 3412 can be driven to rotate. , Not to rotate. Since the movable link gear 3421 that revolves around the axis of the shaft member 3414 is engaged with the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418 that does not rotate, the rear of the turntable that pivotally supports the movable link gear 3421. When the member 3420 rotates, the movable link gear 3421 revolves around the axis of the shaft member 3414 and simultaneously rotates (spins) relative to the turntable rear member 3420.

  The movable link gear 3421 is provided with a link pin 3421a that protrudes forward at a position eccentric from the rotation axis. ) It will revolve around. When the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 revolves, the distance between the shaft core of the shaft member 3414 and the link pin 3421a approaches or separates.

  In the rotating decorative body 3410A of this example, the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis line connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414 in the swing member 3422. Since the swing member 3422 is inserted into the first link groove 3422a and is supported so as to be slidable in the axial direction connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414, the link When the pin 3421a revolves, the link pin 3421a slides in the first link groove 3422a, and at the same time, the link pin 3421a moves the swing member 3422 through the first link groove 3422a and the shaft core of the movable link gear 3421 and the shaft member 3414. The swinging member 3422 is pressed in the axial direction connecting the shaft core of the movable link gear 3421. Connecting the axis of the shaft member 3414 is adapted to slide in the axial direction.

  The swing member 3422 slides reciprocally within the range of the revolution diameter of the link pin 3421a with respect to the axial direction connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. .

  By sliding the swing member 3422, the insertion pin 3423 a of the arm member 3423 inserted into the second link groove 3422 b of the swing member 3422 connects the shaft center of the movable link gear 3421 and the shaft core of the shaft member 3414. When the insertion pin 3423a moves, the arm member 3423 rotates about the shaft portion 3423c. As a result, the pair of arm members 3423 moves such that the distal end (free end) of the operating arm portion 3423d approaches or separates from the axis of the shaft member 3414.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, the rotating body unit 3410 of this example is a rotating body formed in a substantially bullet-like shape in a front view of the heart-shaped portion of the rotating head 3415 in the rotating decorative body 3410A. In a state where the body base decoration 3427 (rotary body base 3411) is positioned so as to face the tip of the shell, the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 is located farthest from the shaft member 3414, and a pair of The distal end of the operating arm portion 3423d of the arm member 3423 is positioned behind the rotary head 3415. As a result, the tip of the arm member 3423 is hardly visible from the player side.

  In this state, for example, when the rotary head 3415 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the rotation drive motor 3412, as described above, the entire rotating decorative body 3410 A rotates around the axis of the shaft member 3414, and the movable link The gear 3421 revolves around the axis of the shaft member 3414, that is, around the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418 fixed to the movable body base 3411 in the clockwise direction. When the movable link gear 3421 revolves around the fixed gear 3418b, the movable link gear 3421 itself rotates (rotates) in the counterclockwise direction. The link pin 3421a revolves in a direction relatively approaching the axis of the shaft member 3414, and the swing member 3422 slides in a direction approaching the shaft member 3414.

  When the swinging member 3422 moves in a direction approaching the shaft member 3414, the pair of arm members 3423 are separated from each other by the second link groove 3422b of the swinging member 3422. And the tip of the operating arm portion 3423d moves to the outside of the rotary head 3415 in a front view. As a result, the tip of the arm member 3423 (actuating arm portion 3423d) can be seen from the player side.

  When the movable link gear 3421 revolves due to the rotation of the rotation decoration member 3410A, and the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 rotates to the position closest to the shaft member 3414, the swinging member 3422 also changes to the shaft member 3414. On the other hand, the closest state is reached, and the ends of the pair of arm members 3423 are also farthest apart (see FIG. 150). In this example, since the number of teeth of the movable link gear 3421 is 1/3 of the number of teeth of the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418, it is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the state of FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 150, the movable link gear 3421 is rotated halfway so that the tips of the pair of arm members 3423 are separated most.

  When the rotating decoration member 3410A is further rotated in the clockwise direction from this state, the sliding member 3422 slides away from the shaft member 3414 by the revolving link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 that rotates by revolving. Then, the sliding of the sliding member 3422 causes the pair of arm members 3423 to rotate in a direction in which the tips approach each other. When the rotating decorative body 3410A rotates 60 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 150, the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 is located farthest from the shaft member 3414, and the ends of the arm members 3423 are also aligned with each other. It is the closest and hidden behind the rotary head 3415 in front view (see FIG. 151).

  In the rotating body unit 3410 of this example, when the rotating decorative body 3410A rotates 120 degrees, the tips of the pair of arm members 3423 appear and disappear once from the rear side of the rotating head 3415. That is, when the rotating decorative body 3410A makes one rotation, the tips of the pair of arm members 3423 appear and disappear three times from the rear side of the rotating head 3415.

  Thus, according to the rotating body unit 3410, when the rotating decorative body 3410A is rotated by the rotation drive motor 3412, the pair of arm members 3423 appears and disappears from the rear side of the rotating head 3415. Therefore, the appearance of the rotating rotating decorative body 3410A Can be greatly changed, the player can be entertained, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, the rotating body unit 3410 has a shaft member 3414 even if a force that moves the front end side of the shaft member 3414 downward is applied by a load of the rotary head 3415 attached to the front end of the shaft member 3414 extending in the front-rear direction. Since the rear surface of the disc-shaped rotary coupler 3413 attached to the rear end is in contact with the front surface of the rotating body base 3411, the shaft member 3414 may not easily fall down with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction. In addition, the shaft member 3414 can be prevented from rotating in a straight state with the rotary head 3415 and the like being eccentric.

[2-10C. Configuration of slide unit]
Next, the configuration of the slide unit 3500 in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156. The slide unit 3500 of this example includes a right slide unit 3510 attached to the right side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001, and a left slide unit 3550 attached to the left side of the opening 3001c. The right slide unit 3510 and the left slide unit 3550 are formed symmetrically with each other.

  First, the right slide unit 3510 in the slide unit 3500 of the left / right movable effect unit 3400 has a right unit base 3511 attached to the right side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and extending vertically as shown in FIGS. 152 to 154. I have. The right unit base 3511 includes three support portions (3511a, 3511b, and 3511c) of an upper support portion 3511a, a middle support portion 3511b, and a lower support portion 3511c for supporting the three rotating body units 3410 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. ).

  Each of the support portions 3511a, 3511b, and 3511c in the right unit base 3511 has slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540, which will be described later, disposed therein and a rectangular base opening portion 3511d penetrating in the front-rear direction and a base opening portion 3511d. A horizontally-long rectangular shaft opening 3511e that is formed on the upper side and has slide shafts 3521, 3531, and 3541, which will be described later, disposed therethrough and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, each base opening 3511d is formed with a rail portion 3511f extending in the left-right direction in which lower rollers 3524, 3534, 3544 described later can roll on the lower side of the inner peripheral edge.

  The upper support portion 3511a of the right unit base 3511 is formed in a state in which a rectangular base opening portion 3511d and a shaft opening portion 3511e extending in the left-right direction are inclined so that the left side is lowered in front view. . The middle support portion 3511b is formed such that a rectangular base opening portion 3511d and a shaft opening portion 3511e extend in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Further, the lower support portion 3511c is formed in a state in which a rectangular base opening portion 3511d and a shaft opening portion 3511e extending in the left-right direction are inclined so that the left side is higher in a front view.

  Further, on each support portion 3511a, 3511b, 3511c of the right unit base 3511, a motor attachment portion 3511g for attaching slide drive motors 3525, 3535, 3545, which will be described later, to the lower side of each base opening portion 3511d, and a motor attachment A meshing opening 3511h is formed between the portion 3511g and a base opening 3511d directly above, and a part of a first transmission gear 3516 described later faces the front side. Although not described in detail, the right unit base 3511 is provided with mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like for mounting various members at appropriate positions.

  The right slide unit 3510 in the slide unit 3500 of this example is a plate-like upper right slide base 3520 disposed on the front surface of the base opening 3511d in the upper support portion 3511a of the right unit base 3511 and to which the rotating body unit 3410 is attached on the front side. A cylindrical upper right slide shaft 3521 that supports the upper end of the upper right slide base 3520 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is disposed in the shaft opening 3511e of the upper support portion 3511a and extends in the left-right direction, and an upper right slide shaft 3521 An upper right shaft bracket 3522 that supports both left and right ends and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 is rotatably supported on both right and left ends of the upper right lower roller support member 3523 and the upper right lower roller support member 3523 which are attached to the lower portion of the upper right slide base 3520, and on the rail portion 3511f of the right unit base 3511. A pair of lower rollers 3524, which are allowed to roll, and an upper right slide base 3520 are moved in the left-right direction along the upper right slide shaft 3521 to be arranged below the upper support portion 3511a in the right unit base 3511, and are attached to the motor mounting portion 3511g. An upper right slide drive motor 3525 that is attached and an upper right position detection sensor 3526 that is attached to the right unit base 3511 and detects the slide position of the upper right slide base 3520 are provided.

  The right upper slide base 3520 of the right slide unit 3510 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The upper right slide base 3520 has a pair of slide receiving portions 3520a formed at the right end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction and having a through-hole through which the upper right slide shaft 3521 can be inserted, and formed at the lower side and extended in the left-right direction. A rack gear 3520b and an insertion hole 3520c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The upper right slide base 3520 includes a detection piece 3520d that extends downward from the lower side in a plate shape and can be detected by the upper right position detection sensor 3526.

  The upper right slide base 3520 is supported by the upper right slide shaft 3521 via a slide bush 3512 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3520a are inserted into the upper right slide shaft 3521, respectively. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3512 includes a flange extending outwardly at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flanges are mutually connected to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3520a. Inserted to face each other. Further, a cylindrical shaft collar 3513 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3520a (slide bush 3512) in the upper right slide shaft 3521, and the slide bush 3512 moves in a direction in which the slide bush 3512 approaches each other by the shaft collar 3513. Therefore, the slide bush 3512 cannot be removed from the slide receiving portion 3520a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3520a in the upper right slide base 3520 is disposed at a distance of about ½ of the length of the inserted upper right slide shaft 3521 and is loose with respect to the upper right slide shaft 3521. It has become difficult.

  The right upper slide shaft 3521 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The right upper shaft bracket 3522 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed by appropriately bending a metal plate, and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511. The upper right slide shaft 3521 and the upper right shaft bracket 3522 are attached along the obliquely inclined shaft opening 3511e of the upper support portion 3511a, and the upper right slide base 3520 is the same as the direction in which the base opening 3511d extends. It is possible to slide in the direction, that is, the direction in which the left side is lowered in the front view (the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  The pair of lower rollers 3524 pivotally supported by the upper right lower roller support member 3523 in the right slide unit 3510 has a rail portion 3511f provided on the lower side of the base opening 3511d in the upper support portion 3511a of the right unit base 3511. The upper right lower roller support member 3523 (lower part of the upper right slide base 3520) is slidably supported along the rail portion 3511f and moved in the front / rear direction. It can be regulated.

  Therefore, in the right slide unit 3510, the upper right slide base 3520 is suspended and supported by the upper right slide shaft 3521, and is moved in the front-rear direction by the rail portion 3511f in the upper support portion 3511a of the upper right slide shaft 3521 and the right unit base 3511. It can be slidably supported in the left-right direction while being regulated.

  Further, the upper right slide drive motor 3525 of the right slide unit 3510 has a rotating shaft extending rearwardly through the right unit base 3511 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3511g of the upper support portion 3511a on the front side of the right unit base 3511. As installed.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 is disposed on the rear side of the right unit base 3511, and a drive gear 3514 that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the upper right slide drive motor 3525 so as to be integrally rotatable. A large-diameter large-diameter gear 3515a, a reduction gear 3515 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3515a, has a smaller-diameter gear 3515b smaller than the large-diameter gear 3515a, and is supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511; The first transmission gear that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3515b and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511 and that part of the peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the right unit base 3511 through the meshing opening 3511e of the right unit base 3511. 3516 and the front surface from the meshing opening 3511e in the first transmission gear 3516 Includes a second transmission gear 3517 that is pivotally supported on the front of the rack gear 3520b meshing right unit base 3511 of the upper right slide base 3520, a well as part meshes exposed to.

  When the drive gear 3514 is driven to rotate in an appropriate direction by the right upper slide drive motor 3525, the right slide unit 3510 receives the rack gear of the upper right slide base 3520 via the reduction gear 3515, the first transmission gear 3516, and the second transmission gear 3517. The upper right slide base 3520 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to 3520b. Accordingly, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the upper right slide base 3520 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  The right slide unit 3510 in the slide unit 3500 of the present example is a plate-like right middle slide base 3530 that is disposed in front of the base opening 3511d in the middle support portion 3511b of the right unit base 3511 and to which the rotary unit 3410 is attached on the front side. A columnar right middle slide shaft 3531 that supports the upper end of the right middle slide base 3530 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is disposed in the shaft opening 3511e of the middle support portion 3511b and extends in the left-right direction; A right middle shaft bracket 3532 that supports the left and right ends of the slide shaft 3531 and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511.

  The right slide unit 3510 includes a right middle lower roller support member 3533 attached to the lower part of the right middle slide base 3530 and a rail portion of the right unit base 3511 that is rotatably supported at both right and left ends of the right middle lower roller support member 3533. A pair of lower rollers 3534 capable of rolling on 3511f and the right middle slide base 3530 are moved in the left-right direction along the right middle slide shaft 3531, and are disposed below the middle support portion 3511b in the right unit base 3511. A right middle slide drive motor 3535 attached to the motor attachment portion 3511g and a right middle position detection sensor 3536 which is attached to the right unit base 3511 and detects the slide position of the right middle slide base 3530 are provided.

  The right middle slide base 3530 of the right slide unit 3510 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The right middle slide base 3530 is formed at the right end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and has a pair of slide receiving portions 3530a each having a through hole through which the right middle slide shaft 3531 can be inserted. The extended rack gear 3530b and an insertion hole 3530c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The middle right slide base 3530 includes a detection piece 3530d that extends upward from the upper side in a plate shape and can be detected by the middle right position detection sensor 3536.

  The right middle slide base 3530 is supported by the right middle slide shaft 3531 via a slide bush 3512 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3530 a are inserted into the right middle slide shaft 3531. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3512 includes a flange portion extending outward at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flange portions are mutually connected to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3530a. Inserted to face each other. In addition, a cylindrical shaft collar 3513 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3530a (slide bush 3512) in the right middle slide shaft 3531, and the slide bush 3512 approaches each other by the shaft collar 3513. It is possible to prevent the slide bush 3512 from coming off from the slide receiving portion 3530a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3530a in the right middle slide base 3530 are arranged at a distance of about 1/3 from the length of the right middle slide shaft 3531 to be inserted, with respect to the right middle slide shaft 3531. It has become difficult to play.

  The right middle slide shaft 3531 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The right middle shaft bracket 3532 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed by appropriately bending a metal plate, and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511. The right middle slide shaft 3531 and the right middle shaft bracket 3532 are attached along the shaft opening 3511e extending horizontally of the middle support portion 3511b, and the right middle slide base 3530 extends from the base opening 3511d. It can be slid in the same direction as the direction, that is, in the horizontal direction in the front view (the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  Further, the pair of lower rollers 3534 pivotally supported by the right middle lower roller support member 3533 in the right slide unit 3510 are rail portions 3511f provided on the lower side of the base opening 3511d in the middle support portion 3511b of the right unit base 3511. Are supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the right middle lower roller support member 3533 (lower part of the right middle slide base 3530) is slidably supported along the rail portion 3511f and moved in the front-rear direction. Can be regulated.

  Accordingly, in the right slide unit 3510, the right middle slide base 3530 is suspended and supported by the right middle slide shaft 3531, and the rail portion 3511f in the middle support portion 3511b of the right middle slide shaft 3531 and the right unit base 3511 is moved in the front-rear direction. Can be supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  The right middle slide drive motor 3535 of the right slide unit 3510 extends rearward through the right unit base 3511 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3511g of the middle support portion 3511b on the front side of the right unit base 3511. Installed to do.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 is disposed on the rear side of the right unit base 3511, and a drive gear 3514 that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the middle right slide drive motor 3535 so as to be integrally rotatable. A large-diameter gear 3515a having a large diameter, a reduction gear 3515 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3515a, has a small-diameter gear 3515b that is smaller than the large-diameter gear 3515a, and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511; A first transmission that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3515b of 3515 and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511 and a part of the peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the right unit base 3511 through the meshing opening 3511e of the right unit base 3511. Gear 3516 and front opening from meshing opening 3511e in first transmission gear 3516 And a the second transmission gear 3517, which is rotatably supported on the front of the rack gear 3530b meshing right unit base 3511 of the right in the slide base 3530 with sites meshes exposed to.

  The right slide unit 3510 has a right middle slide base 3530 via a reduction gear 3515, a first transmission gear 3516, and a second transmission gear 3517 when the drive gear 3514 is driven to rotate in an appropriate direction by a right middle slide drive motor 3535. The right middle slide base 3530 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to the rack gear 3530b. Accordingly, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the right middle slide base 3530 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  The right slide unit 3510 in the slide unit 3500 of this example is a plate-like lower right slide base 3540 that is disposed on the front surface of the base opening 3511d in the lower support portion 3511c of the right unit base 3511 and to which the rotating body unit 3410 is attached on the front side. A cylindrical lower right slide shaft 3541 that supports the upper end of the lower right slide base 3540 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is disposed in the shaft opening 3511e of the lower support portion 3511c and extends in the left-right direction; A lower right shaft bracket 3542 that supports both left and right ends of the slide shaft 3541 and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511.

  The right slide unit 3510 includes a lower right lower roller support member 3543 attached to a lower portion of the lower right slide base 3540 and a rail portion in the right unit base 3511 that is rotatably supported at both right and left ends of the lower right lower roller support member 3543. A pair of lower rollers 3544 capable of rolling on 3511f and a lower right slide base 3540 are moved in the left-right direction along the lower right slide shaft 3541 and arranged below the lower support portion 3511c in the right unit base 3511. A lower right slide drive motor 3545 attached to the motor attachment portion 3511g and a lower right position detection sensor 3546 attached to the right unit base 3511 and detecting the slide position of the lower right slide base 3540 are provided.

  The lower right slide base 3540 of the right slide unit 3510 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The lower right slide base 3540 has a pair of slide receiving portions 3540a formed at the right end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction and having a through-hole through which the lower right slide shaft 3541 can be inserted, and formed on the lower side in the left-right direction. An extended rack gear 3540b and an insertion hole 3540c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The lower right slide base 3540 includes a detection piece 3540d that extends downward from the lower side in a plate shape and can be detected by the lower right position detection sensor 3546.

  The lower right slide base 3540 is supported by the lower right slide shaft 3541 through a slide bush 3512 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3540a are inserted into the lower right slide shaft 3541, respectively. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3512 includes a flange extending outwardly at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flanges are mutually connected to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3540a. Inserted to face each other. In addition, a cylindrical shaft collar 3513 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3540a (slide bush 3512) in the lower right slide shaft 3541, and the slide bush 3512 approaches each other by the shaft collar 3513. It is possible to prevent the slide bush 3512 from coming out of the slide receiving portion 3540a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3540a in the lower right slide base 3540 are arranged at a distance of about 1/2 with respect to the length of the lower right slide shaft 3541 to be inserted, with respect to the lower right slide shaft 3541. It has become difficult to play.

  The lower right slide shaft 3541 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The lower right shaft bracket 3542 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed by appropriately bending a metal plate, and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511. The lower right slide shaft 3541 and the lower right shaft bracket 3542 are attached along a shaft opening 3511e inclined obliquely of the lower support portion 3511c, and extend from the lower right slide base 3540 to the base opening 3511d. It can be slid in the same direction as that of the direction, that is, in a direction in which the left side is increased in front view (an axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  The pair of lower rollers 3544 pivotally supported by the lower right lower roller support member 3543 in the right slide unit 3510 is a rail portion 3511f provided on the lower side of the base opening 3511d in the lower support portion 3511c of the right unit base 3511. Are supported so as to be able to roll in the front-rear direction, and the lower right lower roller support member 3543 (lower part of the lower right slide base 3540) is slidably supported along the rail portion 3511f and moved in the front-rear direction. Can be regulated.

  Therefore, in the right slide unit 3510, the lower right slide base 3540 is suspended and supported by the lower right slide shaft 3541, and is moved back and forth by the rail portion 3511f in the lower right slide shaft 3541 and the lower support portion 3511c of the right unit base 3511. Can be supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  Further, the lower right slide drive motor 3545 of the right slide unit 3510 extends rearward through the right unit base 3511 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3511g of the lower support portion 3511c on the front side of the right unit base 3511. Installed to do.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 is arranged on the rear side of the right unit base 3511 and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower right slide drive motor 3545 so as to be integrally rotatable. The drive gear 3514 meshes with the drive gear 3514 and is driven by the drive gear 3514. A large-diameter gear 3515a having a large diameter, a reduction gear 3515 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3515a, has a small-diameter gear 3515b that is smaller than the large-diameter gear 3515a, and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511; A first transmission that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3515b of 3515 and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511 and a part of the peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the right unit base 3511 through the meshing opening 3511e of the right unit base 3511. Gear 3516 and front opening from meshing opening 3511e in first transmission gear 3516 Includes a second transmission gear 3517 that is pivotally supported on the front of the rack gear 3540b meshing right unit base 3511 of the lower right slide base 3540, a well as part meshes exposed to.

  The right slide unit 3510 has a lower right slide base 3540 via a reduction gear 3515, a first transmission gear 3516, and a second transmission gear 3517 when the drive gear 3514 is driven to rotate in an appropriate direction by a lower right slide drive motor 3545. The lower right slide base 3540 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to the rack gear 3540b. Accordingly, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the lower right slide base 3540 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  Reference numeral 3518 in the drawing is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 3511, and includes a rotation drive motor 3412, a rotary head decoration board 3416, a rotation detection sensor 3426, a base decoration board 3428, and a right relay. This is a wiring retainer for pressing a wiring member (not shown) for connecting to the substrate 3018.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 155 to 157, the left slide unit 3550 in the slide unit 3500 of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the left side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and extends in the vertical direction. It has. The left unit base 3551 has three support portions (3551a, 3551b, 3551c), an upper support portion 3551a, a middle support portion 3551b, and a lower support portion 3551c for supporting the three rotator units 3410 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. ).

  Each of the support portions 3551a, 3551b, 3551c in the left unit base 3551 is provided with a rectangular base opening 3551d penetrating in the front-rear direction with slide bases 3560, 3570, 3580, which will be described later, and a base opening 3551d. The slide shaft 3561, 3571, 3581, which will be described later, is disposed on the upper side, and is provided with a horizontally-long rectangular shaft opening 3551e penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, each base opening 3551d is formed with a rail portion 3551f extending in the left-right direction in which lower rollers 3564, 3574, and 3584 described later can roll on the lower side of the inner peripheral edge.

  The upper support portion 3551a of the left unit base 3551 is formed in a state in which a rectangular base opening 3551d and a shaft opening 3551e extending in the left-right direction are inclined so that the right side is lowered in front view. . Further, the middle support portion 3551b is formed such that a rectangular base opening portion 3551d and a shaft opening portion 3551e extend in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Further, the lower support portion 3551c is formed in a state in which a rectangular base opening portion 3551d and a shaft opening portion 3551e extending in the left-right direction are inclined so that the right side is higher in a front view.

  Further, on each support portion 3551a, 3551b, 3551c of the left unit base 3551, a motor attachment portion 3551g for attaching slide drive motors 3565, 3575, 3585, which will be described later, to the lower side of each base opening portion 3551d, and a motor attachment A meshing opening 3551h is formed between a portion 3551g and a base opening 3551d directly above, and a part of a first transmission gear 3556, which will be described later, faces the front side. Although not described in detail, the left unit base 3551 is formed with mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like for mounting various members at appropriate positions.

  The left slide unit 3550 in the slide unit 3500 of this example is a plate-like upper left slide base 3560 that is disposed on the front surface of the base opening 3551d in the upper support portion 3551a of the left unit base 3551 and the rotary body unit 3410 is attached to the front side. A cylindrical upper left slide shaft 3561 that supports the upper end of the upper left slide base 3560 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is disposed in the shaft opening 3551e of the upper support portion 3551a and extends in the left-right direction, and an upper left slide shaft 3561 An upper left shaft bracket 3562 that supports both left and right ends and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551.

  The left slide unit 3550 is rotatably supported on the left and right ends of the left upper and lower roller support members 3563 and the left upper and lower roller support members 3563 that are attached to the lower part of the upper left slide base 3560, and on the rail portion 3551f of the left unit base 3551. A pair of lower rollers 3564 that are allowed to roll and an upper left slide base 3560 are moved in the left-right direction along the upper left slide shaft 3561 and are arranged below the upper support portion 3551a in the left unit base 3551, and are attached to the motor mounting portion 3551g. An upper left slide drive motor 3565 that is attached, and an upper left position detection sensor 3566 that is attached to the left unit base 3551 and detects the slide position of the upper left slide base 3560 are provided.

  The upper left slide base 3560 of the left slide unit 3550 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The upper left slide base 3560 has a pair of slide receiving portions 3560a formed at the left end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction and having a through hole through which the upper left slide shaft 3561 can be inserted, and formed at the lower side and extended in the left-right direction. A rack gear 3560b and an insertion hole 3560c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The upper left slide base 3560 includes a detection piece 3560d that extends downward from the lower side in a plate shape and can be detected by the upper left position detection sensor 3566.

  The upper left slide base 3560 is supported by the upper left slide shaft 3561 through a slide bush 3552 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3560a are inserted into the upper left slide shaft 3561, respectively. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3552 is provided with a flange extending outward at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flanges are mutually connected with respect to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3560a. Inserted to face each other. Further, a cylindrical shaft collar 3553 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3560a (slide bush 3552) in the upper left slide shaft 3561, and the slide bush 3552 moves in a direction in which the slide bush 3552 approaches each other. This prevents the slide bush 3552 from coming off from the slide receiving portion 3560a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3560a in the upper left slide base 3560 are arranged at a distance of about 1/2 with respect to the length of the inserted upper left slide shaft 3561, and are loose with respect to the upper left slide shaft 3561. It has become difficult.

  The upper left slide shaft 3561 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The upper left shaft bracket 3562 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed by appropriately bending a metal plate, and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551. The upper left slide shaft 3561 and the upper left shaft bracket 3562 are attached along the obliquely inclined shaft opening 3551e of the upper support portion 3551a, and the upper left slide base 3560 is the same as the extending direction of the base opening 3551d. It can be slid in the direction, that is, the direction in which the right side is lowered in front view (the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  In addition, the pair of lower rollers 3564 pivotally supported by the left upper and lower roller support members 3563 in the left slide unit 3550 has a rail portion 3551f provided on the lower side of the base opening portion 3551d in the upper support portion 3551a of the left unit base 3551. The upper and lower roller support members 3563 (lower part of the upper left slide base 3560) are slidably supported along the rail portion 3551f and moved in the front and rear direction. It can be regulated.

  Accordingly, in the left slide unit 3550, the upper left slide base 3560 is suspended and supported by the upper left slide shaft 3561, and is moved in the front-rear direction by the rail portion 3551f in the upper support portion 3551a of the upper left slide shaft 3561 and the left unit base 3551. It can be slidably supported in the left-right direction while being regulated.

  Further, the upper left slide drive motor 3565 of the left slide unit 3550 has a rotating shaft extending rearward through the left unit base 3551 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3551g of the upper support portion 3551a on the front side of the left unit base 3551. As installed.

  The left slide unit 3550 is disposed on the rear side of the left unit base 3551 and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the upper left slide drive motor 3565 so as to be integrally rotatable. The drive gear 3554 is meshed with the drive gear 3554 and more than the drive gear 3554. A large-diameter gear 3555a, a reduction gear 3555 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3555a, has a small-diameter gear 3555b that is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter gear 3555a, and is supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3551, and a reduction gear 3555 The first transmission gear that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3555b and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the left unit base 3551 and that part of the peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the left unit base 3551 through the meshing opening 3551e of the left unit base 3551. 3556 and the front opening from the meshing opening 3551e in the first transmission gear 3556 Includes a second transmission gear 3557 that is pivotally supported on the front of the rack gear 3560b meshing with the left unit base 3551 of the upper left slide base 3560, a well as part meshes exposed to.

  When the left slide unit 3550 rotates the drive gear 3554 in an appropriate direction by the upper left slide drive motor 3565, the rack gear of the upper left slide base 3560 is passed through the reduction gear 3555, the first transmission gear 3556, and the second transmission gear 3557. The upper left slide base 3560 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to 3560b. Thus, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the upper left slide base 3560 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  The left slide unit 3550 in the slide unit 3500 of this example is a plate-like left middle slide base 3570 that is disposed in front of the base opening 3551d in the middle support portion 3551b of the left unit base 3551 and to which the rotating body unit 3410 is attached on the front side. A columnar left middle slide shaft 3571 that supports the upper end of the left middle slide base 3570 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is disposed in the shaft opening 3551e of the middle support portion 3551b and extends in the left-right direction; A left middle shaft bracket 3572 that supports the left and right ends of the slide shaft 3571 and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551.

  The left slide unit 3550 includes a left middle lower roller support member 3573 attached to a lower portion of the left middle slide base 3570 and a rail portion in the left unit base 3551 that is rotatably supported on both left and right ends of the left middle lower roller support member 3573. A pair of lower rollers 3574 capable of rolling on 3551f and a left middle slide base 3570 are moved in the left-right direction along the left middle slide shaft 3571, and are arranged below the middle support portion 3551b in the left unit base 3551. A left middle slide drive motor 3575 attached to the motor attachment portion 3551g and a left middle position detection sensor 3576 which is attached to the left unit base 3551 and detects the slide position of the left middle slide base 3570 are provided.

  The left middle slide base 3570 of the left slide unit 3550 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The left middle slide base 3570 is formed at the left end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and has a pair of slide receiving portions 3570a each having a through hole through which the left middle slide shaft 3571 can be inserted. An extended rack gear 3570b and an insertion hole 3570c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The left middle slide base 3570 includes a detection piece 3570d that extends upward from the upper side in a plate shape and can be detected by the left middle position detection sensor 3576.

  The left middle slide base 3570 is supported by the left middle slide shaft 3571 through a slide bush 3552 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3570 a are respectively inserted into the left middle slide shaft 3571. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3552 is provided with a flange extending outward at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flanges are mutually connected to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3570a. Inserted to face each other. A cylindrical shaft collar 3553 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3570 a (slide bush 3552) in the left middle slide shaft 3571, and the slide bush 3552 approaches the slide bush 3552 by the shaft collar 3553. It is possible to prevent the slide bush 3552 from coming off from the slide receiving portion 3570a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3570a in the left middle slide base 3570 are arranged at a distance of about 1/3 from the length of the left middle slide shaft 3571 to be inserted, with respect to the left middle slide shaft 3571. It has become difficult to play.

  The left middle slide shaft 3571 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The left middle shaft bracket 3572 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed by appropriately bending a metal plate, and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551. The left middle slide shaft 3571 and the left middle shaft bracket 3572 are attached along a shaft opening 3551e extending horizontally in the middle support portion 3551b, and the left middle slide base 3570 extends from the base opening 3551d. It can be slid in the same direction as the direction, that is, in the horizontal direction in the front view (the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  The pair of lower rollers 3574 supported by the left middle lower roller support member 3573 in the left slide unit 3550 are rail portions 3551f provided on the lower side of the base opening 3551d in the middle support portion 3551b of the left unit base 3551. Is supported so as to be able to roll in the front-rear direction, and the left middle lower roller support member 3573 (lower part of the left middle slide base 3570) is slidably supported along the rail portion 3551f and moved in the front-rear direction. Can be regulated.

  Accordingly, in the left slide unit 3550, the left middle slide base 3570 is suspended and supported by the left middle slide shaft 3571, and in the front-rear direction by the rail portion 3551f of the middle support portion 3551b of the left middle slide shaft 3571 and the left unit base 3551. Can be supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  Further, the left middle slide drive motor 3575 of the left slide unit 3550 has a rotating shaft extending rearward through the left unit base 3551 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3551g of the middle support portion 3551b on the front side of the left unit base 3551. Installed to do.

  The left slide unit 3550 is disposed on the rear side of the left unit base 3551 and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the left middle slide drive motor 3575 so as to be integrally rotatable. The drive gear 3554 meshes with the drive gear 3554. A large-diameter large-diameter gear 3555a, a reduction gear 3555 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3555a, has a small-diameter gear 3555b that is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter gear 3555a, and is supported on the rear surface of the left unit base 3551; 1st transmission which meshes | engages with the small diameter gear 3555b of 3555, and is pivotally supported by the rear surface of the left unit base 3551, and a part of peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the left unit base 3551 through the meshing opening 3551e of the left unit base 3551. Gear 3556 and front opening from meshing opening 3551e in first transmission gear 3556 Includes a second transmission gear 3557 that is pivotally supported on the front of the rack gear 3570b meshing with the left unit base 3551 of the left in the slide base 3570, a well as part meshes exposed to.

  When the drive gear 3554 is rotationally driven in an appropriate direction by the left middle slide drive motor 3575, the left slide unit 3550 has a left middle slide base 3570 via a reduction gear 3555, a first transmission gear 3556, and a second transmission gear 3557. The left middle slide base 3570 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to the rack gear 3570b. Accordingly, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the left middle slide base 3570 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  The left slide unit 3550 in the slide unit 3500 of this example is a plate-like lower left slide base 3580 that is disposed on the front surface of the base opening 3551d in the lower support portion 3551c of the left unit base 3551 and the rotary unit 3410 is attached to the front side. The lower left slide base 3580 supports the upper end of the lower left slide base 3580 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and is disposed in the shaft opening 3551e of the lower support portion 3551c and extends in the left-right direction. And a lower left shaft bracket 3582 that supports both left and right ends and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551.

  Further, the left slide unit 3550 is rotatably supported on both left and right sides of a lower left lower roller support member 3583 and a lower left lower roller support member 3583 attached to the lower portion of the lower left slide base 3580, and on the rail portion 3551f of the left unit base 3551. A pair of lower rollers 3584 that can roll and a lower left slide base 3580 are moved in the left-right direction along the lower left slide shaft 3581 and are arranged below the lower support portion 3551c in the left unit base 3551 and are attached to the motor mounting portion 3551g. A lower left slide drive motor 3585 to be attached and a lower left position detection sensor 3586 that is attached to the left unit base 3551 and detects the slide position of the lower left slide base 3580 are provided.

  The lower left slide base 3580 of the left slide unit 3550 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The lower left slide base 3580 has a pair of slide receiving portions 3580a formed at the left end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction and having a through-hole through which the lower left slide shaft 3581 can be inserted, and formed at the lower side and extended in the left-right direction. A rack gear 3580b and an insertion hole 3580c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The lower left slide base 3580 includes a detection piece 3580d that extends downward from the lower side in a plate shape and can be detected by the lower left position detection sensor 3586.

  The lower left slide base 3580 is supported by the lower left slide shaft 3581 via a slide bush 3552 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3580a are respectively inserted into the lower left slide shaft 3581. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3552 includes a flange extending outwardly at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flanges are mutually connected to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3580a. Inserted to face each other. Further, a cylindrical shaft collar 3553 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3580a (slide bush 3552) in the lower left slide shaft 3581, and the slide bush 3552 moves in a direction in which the slide bush 3552 approaches each other. Thus, the slide bush 3552 is prevented from being removed from the slide receiving portion 3580a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3580a in the lower left slide base 3580 are arranged at a distance of about 1/2 of the length of the lower left slide shaft 3581 to be inserted, and are loose with respect to the lower left slide shaft 3581. It has become difficult.

  The lower left slide shaft 3581 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The lower left shaft bracket 3582 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed by bending a metal plate as appropriate, and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551. The lower left slide shaft 3581 and the lower left shaft bracket 3582 are attached so as to follow the obliquely inclined shaft opening 3551e of the lower support portion 3551c, and the lower left slide base 3580 is the same as the extending direction of the base opening 3551d. It can be slid in the direction, that is, the direction in which the right side is higher when viewed from the front (the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  In addition, the pair of lower rollers 3584 pivotally supported by the lower left lower roller support member 3583 in the left slide unit 3550 has a rail portion 3551f provided on the lower side of the base opening 3551d in the lower support portion 3551c of the left unit base 3551. The lower left lower roller support member 3583 (lower part of the lower left slide base 3580) is slidably supported along the rail portion 3551f and moved in the front / rear direction. It can be regulated.

  Therefore, in the left slide unit 3550, the lower left slide base 3580 is suspended and supported by the lower left slide shaft 3581, and is moved in the front-rear direction by the rail portion 3551f of the lower left slide shaft 3581 and the lower support portion 3551c of the left unit base 3551. It can be slidably supported in the left-right direction while being regulated.

  Further, the lower left slide drive motor 3585 of the left slide unit 3550 has a rotating shaft extending rearward through the left unit base 3551 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3551g of the lower support portion 3551c on the front side of the left unit base 3551. As installed.

  The left slide unit 3550 is disposed on the rear side of the left unit base 3551 and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower left slide drive motor 3585 so as to be integrally rotatable. The drive gear 3554 meshes with the drive gear 3554 and is more than the drive gear 3554. A large-diameter large-diameter gear 3555a, a reduction gear 3555 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3555a, has a small-diameter gear 3555b that is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter gear 3555a, and is supported on the rear surface of the left unit base 3551, and a reduction gear 3555 The first transmission gear that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3555b and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the left unit base 3551 and that part of the peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the left unit base 3551 through the meshing opening 3551e of the left unit base 3551. 3556 and the front opening from the meshing opening 3551e in the first transmission gear 3556 It includes a second transmission gear 3557 that is pivotally supported on the front of the rack gear 3580b meshing with the left unit base 3551 in the lower left slide base 3580, a well as part meshes exposed to.

  When the left slide unit 3550 rotates the drive gear 3554 in an appropriate direction by the lower left slide drive motor 3585, the rack gear of the lower left slide base 3580 is connected via the reduction gear 3555, the first transmission gear 3556, and the second transmission gear 3557. The lower left slide base 3580 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to 3580b. Thus, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the lower left slide base 3580 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  Reference numeral 3558 in the drawing is attached to the front surface of the left unit base 3551, and includes a rotation drive motor 3412, a rotary head decoration board 3416, a rotation detection sensor 3426, a base decoration board 3428, and a left relay. This is a wiring retainer for retaining a wiring member (not shown) for connecting to the substrate 3020.

[2-10D. Operation of rotating body unit by slide unit]
Subsequently, the movement of the rotating body unit 3410 by the slide unit 3500 in the left-right movable effect unit 3400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. First, as shown in FIG. 158 and the like, the right slide unit 3510 of the slide unit 3500 is arranged in three support portions 3511a, 3511b, and 3511c arranged in the vertical direction of the right unit base 3511 in a normal state. The supported rotating body unit 3410 is in the most moved state (initial state) to the right end side. In this initial state, each rotating body unit 3410 is substantially contained within the front projection of the right unit base 3511.

  In addition, when each rotating body unit 3410 supported by the right slide unit 3510 is in an initial state (in an initial position state), detection pieces 3520d and 3530d of the respective slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 attached to the front surface. , 3540d are detected by the position detection sensors 3526, 3536, 3546, respectively (see FIG. 152).

  From this initial state, each drive gear 3514 is rotated in a predetermined direction (clockwise in front view) by slide drive motors 3525, 3535, and 3545 attached to the motor attachment portions 3511g of the respective support portions 3511a, 3511b, and 3511c of the right unit base 3511. ), The rotational speed of the slide drive motors 3525, 3535, and 3545 is reduced by the reduction gear 3515 meshed with the drive gear 3514 and transmitted to the first transmission gear 3516 and the second transmission gear 3517. The slide bases 3520, 3530 b, 3540 b of the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540 b meshed with the second transmission gear 3517 slide to the left in the front view.

  The left ends of the left slide receiving portions 3520a, 3530a, and 3540 of the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 are attached to the left ends of the slide shafts 3521, 3531, and 3541 (detailed description and illustration are omitted). The slide drive motors 3525, 3535, and 3545 are stopped at substantially the same time as they come into contact with each other, and the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540, that is, the state of the appearance position where each rotary body unit 3410 has moved leftward (appearance state) )

  In the right slide unit 3510 of this example, the support portions 3511a, 3511b, and 3511c of the right unit base 3511 are each slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 (rotating) in a direction extending radially from the approximate center of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. Since the body unit 3410) is slid, each slide base 3520, 3530, 3540 is moved from the initial position where the slide base 3520, 3530, 3540 is moved to the rightmost position to the appearance position where it is moved to the leftmost position. The tips of the rotating body units 3410 attached to the bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 are in a state where they are close to each other.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 can slide each slide base 3520, 3530, 3540 (rotary body unit 3410) independently by appropriately controlling the drive of each slide drive motor 3525, 3535, 3545. Various variations of movement (movable effects) can be realized.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 can rotate the rotating decoration body 3410A of the rotating body unit 3410 when the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 are in the initial state or the appearance state. Various movable effects can be performed by appropriately combining the slide effect of the rotating body unit 3410 and the rotation effect of the rotating decorative body 3410A.

  Further, as described above, the right slide unit 3510 suspends and supports the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 by the slide shafts 3521, 3531, and 3541 formed of metal bars, and the slide shafts 3521, 3531, and 3541, respectively. Since 3541 is supported by shaft brackets 3522, 3532, and 3542 formed of a metal plate, each slide base 3520, 3530, and 3540 can be smoothly slid and supported without rattling. . Therefore, the right slide unit 3510 can be mounted on the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540, even if the rotary unit 3410 that is heavier by attaching the rotation drive motor 3412 or the like is attached to the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540. The rotating decorative body 3410A in which the center of gravity of the rotating body unit 3410 is eccentric can be rotated to cause a changing uneven load that causes vibration from the rotating body unit 3410. Even if it acts, the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 can be firmly supported to prevent the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 from vibrating, and the rotating decorative body 3410A can be smoothly rotated. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the left slide unit 3550 of the slide unit 3500 is arranged and provided on three support portions 3551a, 3551b, 3551c arranged in the vertical direction of the left unit base 3551 in a normal state, as shown in FIG. The supported rotating body unit 3410 is in the most moved state (initial state) to the left end side. In this initial state, each rotating body unit 3410 is substantially contained within the front projection of the left unit base 3551.

  In addition, when each rotating body unit 3410 supported by the left slide unit 3550 is in an initial state (initial position state), detection pieces 3560d and 3570d of the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 to which the respective rotating body units 3410 are attached to the front surface. , 3580d are detected by the position detection sensors 3566, 3576, 3586, respectively (see FIG. 155).

  From this initial state, each drive gear 3554 is moved in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise in front view) by slide drive motors 3565, 3575, and 3585 attached to the motor attachment portions 3551g of the support portions 3551a, 3551b, and 3551c of the left unit base 3551. When rotating in the rotation direction), the rotational speed of the slide drive motors 3565, 3575, and 3585 is reduced by the reduction gear 3555 that meshes with the drive gear 3554 and transmitted to the first transmission gear 3556 and the second transmission gear 3557. The slide bases 3560, 3570b, and 3580b of the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 engaged with the second transmission gear 3557 are slid rightward in a front view.

  The right ends of the right slide receiving portions 3560a, 3570a, and 3580 in the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 are attached to the right ends of the slide shafts 3561, 3571, and 3581 (detailed description and illustration are omitted). The slide drive motors 3565, 3575, and 3585 are stopped substantially at the same time, and the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580, that is, the appearance positions where the rotary body units 3410 have moved to the left most (appearance state). )

  In the left slide unit 3550 of this example, the support portions 3551a, 3551b, and 3551c of the left unit base 3551 are each slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 (rotating) in a direction extending radially from the approximate center of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. Since the body unit 3410) is slid, each slide base 3560, 3570, 3580 is moved from the initial position where the slide base 3560, 3570, 3580 is moved to the leftmost position to the appearance position where it is moved to the rightmost position. The tips of the rotating body units 3410 attached to the bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 are in a state of being close to each other.

  The left slide unit 3550 can slide the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 (the rotator unit 3410) independently by appropriately controlling the drive of the slide drive motors 3565, 3575, and 3585. Various variations of movement (movable effects) can be realized.

  Further, the left slide unit 3550 can rotate the rotating decorative body 3410A of the rotating body unit 3410 in any position where the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 are in the initial state or the appearance state. Various movable effects can be performed by appropriately combining the slide effect of the rotating body unit 3410 and the rotation effect of the rotating decorative body 3410A.

  Further, as described above, the left slide unit 3550 suspends and supports the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 by the slide shafts 3561, 3571, and 3581 formed of a metal rod, and also supports the slide shafts 3561, 3571, Since the 3581 is supported by the shaft brackets 3562, 3572, and 3582 formed of a metal plate, the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 can be smoothly slid and supported without rattling. . Therefore, even if the left slide unit 3550 is provided with the rotary unit 3410 that is heavy by providing the rotary drive motor 3412 or the like to the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580, the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 are attached. The rotating decorative body 3410A in which the center of gravity of the rotating body unit 3410 is eccentric can be rotated to cause a changing uneven load that causes vibration from the rotating body unit 3410. Even if it acts, the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 can be firmly supported to prevent the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 from vibrating, and the rotating decorative body 3410A can be smoothly rotated. It is like that.

[2-11. Lower movable production unit]
Next, the lower movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 160 to 165. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the lower movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the lower movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the lower movable effect unit as seen from the front after disassembling the main movable member. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the lower movable effect unit as seen from the rear after disassembled as the main member. FIG. Further, FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the elevating unit in the lower movable effect unit. FIG. 165 is a front view showing the movement of the elevating decorative body in the lower movable effect unit.

  The lower movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and is positioned behind the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000. . The lower movable effect unit 3600 extends in the up-down direction to support the elevating decoration body 3611 so that the elevating decoration body 3611 can be moved up and down, and is formed in a cannonball shape in which a substantially cylindrical upper end bulges upward in a hemispherical shape. A lifting unit 3610 having at least a lifting / lowering solenoid 3613 that drives the lifting / lowering decoration 3611 supported by the lifting / lowering shaft 3612 up and down in a vertical direction, and two lifting units 3610 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. And a left support base 3651 disposed on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in front view and a left support unit 3610 disposed on the left side in front view of the right support base 3651 and supporting the two lifting units 3610 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. And a support base 3652.

  The lower movable effect unit 3600 in this example includes four elevating units 3610 having elevating decorative bodies 3611.

  The lower movable effect unit 3600 is supported by an upper cover 3653 that connects the upper ends of the right support base 3651 and the left support base 3652 and supports the lower end of the lift shaft 3612 of each lift unit 3610, and the upper cover 3653. A front cover 3654 that covers the front surfaces of the support base right 3651 and the support base left 3652, and a through hole 3655 a that is disposed above the front cover 3654 and the upper cover 3653 and through which the lifting decoration 3611 in the lifting unit 3610 can pass. And an upper decorative cover 3655 attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001.

  The lower movable effect unit 3600 is in a state in which the corresponding lifting solenoid 3613 is arranged on either the front side or the rear side with respect to the lifting shaft 3612 extending in the vertical direction of each of the four lifting units 3610. Specifically, in the right elevation base unit 3610 supported by the right support base 3651, the elevation solenoid 3613 is disposed on the rear side of the elevation shaft 3612, and the front left side supported by the right support base 3651. In the lifting / lowering unit 3610, a lifting / lowering solenoid 3613 is disposed in front of the lifting / lowering shaft 3612. Further, in the elevation unit 3610 on the right side of the front view supported by the left support base 3652, the elevation solenoid 3613 is disposed in front of the elevation shaft 3612 and the elevation unit on the left side of the front view supported by the left support base 3652 is provided. In 3610, a lifting solenoid 3613 is disposed behind the lifting shaft 3612. Accordingly, in the entire lower movable effect unit 3600, of the four lifting decoration bodies 3611 arranged in the left-right direction, the two lifting decoration bodies 3611 on the center side are slightly rearward from the two lifting decoration bodies 3611 on the left and right sides. It is in an offset state.

  Further, in the lower movable effect unit 3600, the elevating solenoid 3613 in each elevating unit 3610 is supported so that the plunger that moves forward and backward moves forward and backward with respect to the right support base 3651 and the left support base 3652.

  In this example, the elevating unit 3610 of the lower movable effect unit 3600 has a plunger holder 3614 attached to the tip (lower end) of the plunger of the elevating solenoid 3613, a lower end connected to the plunger holder 3614, and an upper end than the upper surface of the upper cover 3653. A rod-like lifting arm 3615 that has an elongated link hole 3615a that extends upward and extends in the lateral direction (front-rear direction) at the upper end, and is disposed on either the left or right side of the lifting solenoid 3613; A link pin 3616a extending in the left-right direction is slidably inserted into the link hole 3615a of 3615a, extends from the base end side of the link pin 3616a to both sides in the front-rear direction, and the other side is one side with respect to one side across the link pin 3616a Heel part 3616b extending about twice as long as the side, end part on one side of heel part 3616b A first arm 3616 having a shaft support portion 3616c that is formed and directly supported on the upper surface of the upper cover 3653 directly above the lifting solenoid 3613, and the lower end rotates with respect to the other end portion of the first arm 3616. A second arm 3617 that is supported and extends upward shorter than the first arm 3616, a connecting portion 3618a to which the upper end of the second arm 3617 is rotatably attached, and a connecting portion 3618a are formed at the lower part of the outer periphery, and the lifting shaft 3612 A cylindrical sliding part 3618b to be inserted into the outer periphery of the sliding part 3618, and an elevating decorative body base 3618 provided with an annular mounting part 3618c formed at the upper end of the sliding part 3618b to which the lower end of the elevating decorative body 3611 is attached. ing.

  The lifting unit 3610 further includes a coil-shaped biasing member 3619 that is inserted into the outer periphery of the lifting shaft 3612 inside the lifting decoration body 3611 and biases the lifting decoration body base 3618 downward. Further, the elevating unit 3610 is inserted into a cylindrical elevating shaft 3612 and has a transparent rod-shaped light guide member 3620 whose upper end protrudes above the elevating shaft 3612 and whose lower end protrudes below the elevating shaft 3612; An elevating decorative body decoration substrate 3621 on which at least LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted directly below the light guide member 3620. The light guide member 3620 of the elevating unit 3610 has a diffusion lens formed at the upper end, and diffuses the light from the LED of the elevating decorative body decoration board 3621 arranged immediately below the upper end of the elevating shaft 3612. Thus, the elevating decoration body 3611 can be decorated with light emission from the inside.

  Further, the lower movable effect unit 3600 supports the lifting arms 3615 of the two lifting units 3610 arranged on the center side in front view so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and two raising and lowering arranged on the left and right sides in front view. Further provided is a guide member 3656 that supports the elevating decorative body decoration substrate 3621 of the unit 3610 and is attached to the right support base 3651 and the left support base 3652. Further, the lower movable effect unit 3600 supports the elevating arms 3615 of the two elevating units 3610 arranged on the left and right sides in the front view so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and two elevating units arranged on the center side in the front view. A center support member 3657 is further provided to support the elevating decorative body decoration substrate 3621 of the unit 3610 and to connect the right support base 3651 and the left support base 3652.

  Further, the lower movable effect unit 3600 includes a magnetic detection sensor 3660 that is attached to the front cover 3654 and detects magnetism. This magnetic detection sensor 3660 can detect magnetism acting in the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect an illegal act using a magnet or the like.

  The upper decorative cover 3655 of the lower movable effect unit 3600 in this example includes an extending part 3655b extending forward from the lower part of the front end. The extended portion 3655b is positioned immediately below the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in a state where the game board 4 is assembled. The lower movable effect unit 3600 includes a stage lower right decorative substrate 3661 and a stage lower left decorative substrate 3661 which are attached to the lower side of the extending portion 3655b of the upper decorative cover 3655 and have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface. ing. With the stage lower right decorative substrate 3661 and the stage lower left decorative substrate 3662, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 can be decorated with light emission from the lower side.

  Next, the movement of the elevating decorative body 3610 in the lower movable effect unit 3600 will be described. In the normal state, the lower movable effect unit 3600 is in a state in which the elevating decoration body 3611 is lowered downward by the urging force and gravity of the urging member 3619 of the elevating unit 3610 (see FIG. 165 (a) and the like). reference). In the lift unit 3610, the plunger of the lift solenoid 3613 protrudes downward when the lift decorative body 3611 is lowered. Note that the elevating decorative body 3611 is restricted from moving downward when the lower end of the sliding portion 3618b of the elevating decorative body base 3618 contacts the upper surface of the upper cover 3653 that supports the elevating shaft 3612. .

  When the elevating unit 3610 raises (immerses) the plunger by energizing the elevating solenoid 3613 from the normal state where the elevating decorative body 3611 is lowered, the elevating arm 3615 is interposed via the plunger holder 3614 attached to the lower end of the plunger. As the elevating arm 3615 rises, the link pin 3616a of the first arm 3616 inserted into the link hole 3615a of the elevating arm 3615 also rises. In the first arm 3616 having the link pin 3616a, the shaft support portion 3616c on one side of the flange portion 3616b close to the link pin 3616a is pivotally supported by the upper cover 3653, and the shaft support portion is raised as the link pin 3616a rises. The other side of the flange portion 3616b is pivoted about 3616c so that the end portion on the other side rises larger than the rise of the link pin 3616a.

  The lifting decorative body base 3618 is guided by the lifting shaft 3612 via the second arm 3617 supported by the other end of the first arm 3616 against the biasing force of the biasing member 3619. Will rise. As a result, the elevating decorative body 3611 attached to the elevating decorative body base 3618 of the elevating unit 3610 is raised (projected) more than the upper surface of the upper decorative cover 3655 (see FIG. 165 (b)), and the player Fully visible from the side (see FIG. 168).

  In order to lower the raised elevating decorative body 3611, when the energization to the elevating solenoid 3613 is stopped, the elevating decorative body base 3618 is pushed downward by the urging force of the urging member 3619, and the reverse movement is performed. By doing so, the elevating decorative body 3611 returns to the normal state in which it is lowered.

  Further, the lower movable effect unit 3600 of this example is configured such that the four elevating decorative bodies 3611 can be moved up and down independently by the elevating solenoids 3613 provided in the respective elevating units 3610, respectively. By appropriately combining the movements of the two lifting / lowering decorative bodies 3611, various movable effects can be performed.

  Further, the lower movable effect unit 3600 fixes the position of the light guide member 3620 that guides (guides) the light from the LED of the lift decoration body decoration board 3621 to the lift decoration body 3611, and then fixes the light guide member 3620 to the light guide member 3620. Therefore, the range of light emitted from the light guide member 3620 can be changed according to the movement position of the lift decoration body 3611, and the lift decoration body 3611 can be moved up and down relatively. The light emitting decoration of the decoration body 3611 can be changed.

[2-12. Liquid crystal display device]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, and displays a predetermined effect image according to the game state. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 115 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 that protrudes outward from both the upper and lower sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing piece 1902.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 113 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 169), and the like, and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3, and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

  In the liquid crystal display device 1900, an inverter board box 1920 containing an inverter board 4163 (see FIG. 169) for lighting a backlight (in this example, a cold cathode tube) has a peripheral control board box 1910 in a rear view. Is provided on the left side.

[2-13. Movable production on game board]
Next, the movable effects using the movable effect units 3300, 3400, 3600 in the game board 4 of this embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 166 to 168. FIG. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper movable effect unit of the back unit in the game board. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the left / right movable effect unit of the back unit in the game board. Further, FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lower movable effect unit of the back unit in the game board.

  As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, the game board 4 of this example is located at a retreated position where the upper movable unit 3310 of the movable upper movable effect unit 3300 provided in the rear unit 3000 is raised in a normal state. In this state, except for the character base cover 3319 of the upper movable unit 3310, the center logo decoration member 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 is positioned behind the character body 3311, the back decoration member 3330, and the like. It is invisible to the player.

  Further, in the normal state, the game board 4 is such that each rotary body unit 3410 of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 in the rear unit 3000 is located at an initial position away from the center of the game area 1100 and each rotation. The rotational decoration body 3410A of the body unit 3410 has a rotational position where the part having the heart-shaped translucency in the rotational head 3415 approaches the center of the game area 1100 (the rotational center of the rotational decoration body 3410A and the game). On the axis connecting the center of the area 1100, the game area 1100 is stopped at a position near the center of the game area 1100.

  When each rotary body unit 3410 of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 is in the initial position, a rotary head 3415 having a substantially circular shape in front view in the rotary ornament 3410A is formed on the inner periphery of the right frame of the center accessory 2500. Three substantially semicircular recesses, and three substantially semicircular recesses formed at the right end of the left back decoration member 3111 of the back decoration unit 3100. It appears to be integrated with decorations such as the center accessory 2500 and the back decoration unit 3100.

  Further, in the normal state, the game board 4 is in a state in which each lifting decoration body 3611 of the four lifting / lowering units 3610 of the lower movable effect unit 3600 in the rear unit 3000 is lowered, and the transparent stage of the center accessory 2500 Through 2510, the upper part of the lifting / lowering decorative body 3611 is slightly visible.

  In the game board 4 of this example, when the cam link gear 3364 is driven to rotate in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the up-and-down drive motor 3361 of the upper movable effect unit 3300, the link pin 3364b is rotated around the rotation center of the cam link gear 3364. , And slides in the direction of moving away from the base end portion 3365a in the elongated hole-shaped connecting portion 3365e of the lifting arm 3365. And the raising / lowering arm 3365 will rotate centering | focusing on the base end part 3365a with the revolution of the link pin 3364b sliding in the connection part 3365e.

  When the elevating arm 3365 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, the connecting sliding member 3365 slides in the connecting portion 3365b of the elevating arm 3365 and simultaneously slides in the guide groove 3351a, thereby connecting and sliding. The elevating slider 3354, that is, the upper movable unit 3310 is slid downward (elevated) through the connecting shaft 3366 supported by the member 3365.

  As a result, the pair of character bodies 3311 of the upper movable unit 3310, the back decoration member 3330, and the like are positioned below the center logo decoration member 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and as shown in FIG. The character body 3311 and the like are visible from the side. That is, a pair of character bodies 3311 appears.

  Since the pair of character bodies 3311 in the upper movable effect unit 3300 can rotate in different directions with respect to the axis extending in the vertical direction, the upper movable unit 3310 is lowered to the appearance position. In addition to the movable effect of causing the pair of character bodies 3311 to appear, a movable effect of rotating the pair of character bodies 3311 relative to each other can also be performed.

  Although the illustration of the movable effect pattern by the upper movable effect unit 3300 is omitted, for example, when the upper movable unit 3310 is in the retracted position, the pair of character bodies 3311 are rotated and stopped so as to face rearward in this state. The upper movable unit 3310 is lowered to cause a pair of character bodies 3311 to appear. Thereafter, the pair of character bodies 3311 are rotated so as to face forward. Thereby, since the pair of character bodies 3311 appear in a state of facing backward, when the pair of character bodies 3311 are then turned forward and the pair of character bodies 3311 are directed forward, it is possible to strongly hold the player with an opportunity. Therefore, the player can be excited and excited by whether or not the appearing pair of character bodies 3311 face forward, and the expectation can be increased and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Alternatively, predetermined music may be output in accordance with the rotation of the appearing pair of character bodies 3311, thereby causing the illusion that the pair of character bodies 3311 is dancing to the music. It is possible to entertain the movement of the pair of character bodies 3311 with respect to the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the game board 4 of this example rotates and drives each of the rotary drive motors 3412 of the six rotary body units 3410 in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 arranged on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in front view, A substantially hemispherical rotating head 3415 arranged at the foremost end of the unit 3410 rotates, and a pair of arm members 3423 arranged on the rear side of the rotating head 3415 move away from or approach each other while rotating together with the rotating head 3415. Or move back and forth with respect to the rotation axis. As a result, the pair of arm members 3423 simulating the hand while rotating seem to open and close, attracting the player's interest strongly, and reducing the player's interest in the game It becomes possible to suppress.

  In the left / right movable effect unit 3400, the six rotating decorative bodies 3410A may be rotated at the same timing, or may be rotated at different timings. In addition, in the case where the timing of rotating the six rotating decorative bodies 3410A is different, the direction of the rotating head 3415 and the timing of advance and retreat of the pair of arm members 3423 are different. It is possible to make the illusion that the rotating decorative body 3410 </ b> A is swaying, and to make it more noticeable.

  In the left and right movable effect unit 3400, slide drive motors 3525, 3535, 3545, 3565, 3575, and 3585 respectively corresponding to the six rotator units 3410 are driven to rotate, and each slide base to which each rotator unit 3410 is attached. 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 slide in the direction toward the center of the game area 1100, and as shown in FIG. 167, the six rotary body units 3410 appear at the positions where they approach the center of the game area 1100. It comes to be in a state. In this state, each rotating body unit 3410 is positioned on the center side of the game area 1100, so that it becomes more conspicuous from the player side, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  As shown in FIG. 167, in the gaming board 4, in a state where the six rotary body units 3410 in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 are positioned at the appearance position, the rotary head 3415 in the rotary decorative body 3410A of each rotary body unit 3410 is The rotator unit 3410 stands out from the decoration of the center accessory 2500 and the back decoration unit 3100, as if the center object 2500 and the back decoration unit 3100 are formed in a substantially semicircularly curved recess. It is in a state.

  In addition, the left and right movable effect unit 3400 narrows the visible range of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by positioning each rotating body unit 3410 at an appearance position close to the center of the game area 1100 as shown in FIG. 167. The viewing range of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be physically changed to strongly attract the player's interest.

  Further, in the left and right movable effect unit 3400, as shown in FIG. 167, the rotary decoration body 3410A may be rotated by the rotation drive motor 3412 in a state where each rotary body unit 3410 is located at the appearance position. Thus, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the rotation effect of the rotating decorative body 3410A, to entertain the player, and to make a movable effect (rotation effect) widely in the entire game area 1100. It is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the left and right movable effect unit 3400, each rotator unit 3410 may be slid in a direction closer to the center of the game area 1100, thereby enabling the rotator unit to slide with respect to the player. Depending on the position of 3410, the number of rotating rotating unit 3410 that slides, etc., it is possible to think that an opportunity has come, and a sense of expectation is given to a movable effect by a plurality of rotating unit 3410. The pachinko machine 1 can be made hard to get tired of looking forward to the movable performance.

  Further, in the left and right movable effect unit 3400, an effect image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side in accordance with the slide effect of each rotating body unit 3410 and the rotation effect of the rotating decorative body 3410A. In addition, the player can be more entertained by the collaboration effect of the movable effect and the effect image.

  Further, in the left and right movable effect unit 3400, for one rotating body unit 3410, the moving effect of the rotating body unit 3410 corresponds to the area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 closer to the center of the game area 1100 in the rotating body unit 3410. The region where the specific effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 1900 may be changed in accordance with the position of the rotator unit 3410 that performs the movable effect. An effect (specific effect) by the rotator unit 3410 and the specific effect image can be performed at any position where the six rotator units 3410 having substantially the same shape are arranged, so that it can be seen in a conventional pachinko machine. It would be possible to show the player what had not been done and to surprise the player. Can entertain, interest will be able to be suppressed.

  Further, the game board 4 of the present example is shown in FIG. 168 by driving the lifting solenoids 3613 in the four lifting units 3610 of the lower movable effect unit 3600 disposed on the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500. As described above, each lifting decoration body 3611 can be raised, and by raising the four lifting decoration bodies 3611, the upper end of each lifting decoration body 3611 is in a state of protruding above the stage 2510. Yes.

  Accordingly, the elevating decorative body 3611 protrudes from the rear side and the lower side of the stage 2510 and protrudes to the lower front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the player is aware of the rising of the elevating decorative body 3611. It is possible to make it easy to enjoy the decoration and movement of the lifting / lowering decorative body 3611 by paying attention to the raised / lowering decorative body 3611.

  In addition, since the lower movable effect unit 3600 can individually elevate and lower the four elevating decoration bodies 3611, various elevating effects can be performed by appropriately selecting a pattern for elevating the four elevating decoration bodies 3611. It is possible to perform a moving production that is difficult to get tired of.

  Further, in the lower movable effect unit 3600, the light guide member 3620 for guiding the light from the lift decoration body decoration board 3621 for emitting and decorating the lift decoration body 3611 of the lift unit 3610 is fixed to the lift decoration body 3611. Therefore, when the elevating decorative body 3611 is moved up and down, the distance to the light guide member 3620 (the upper end thereof) changes, and the light emitting condition and the light emission range of the elevating decorative body 3611 can be changed. In addition, the lighting effect of the elevating decorative body 3611 can be enjoyed.

  Further, in the lower movable effect unit 3600, the four elevating decorative bodies 3611 can be moved up and down independently, and for example, the number of the lottery results held by the start winning prize is increased by the number of elevating decorative bodies 3611 to be raised. It may be expressed, and the number of holdings can be made more conspicuous compared to the case of displaying by the number of lighting of lamps, images, etc., as in conventional pachinko machines, and the sense of expectation for the reserved lottery results It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating. In this case, the type of the lottery result held by the light emitting color of the elevating decoration 3611 may be suggested, and a variety of hold display can be performed.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 group includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3231 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 2127 and detection signals from some of the general prize opening sensors 3232 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or attached to the gate sensor 2402, the general prize opening sensor 3232, the count sensor 2128, and the back unit 3000, respectively. The detected signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3660 is input via the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start port solenoid 2121 and the attacker solenoid are connected via the panel relay board 3012. The first special symbol display 1185, the second control signal 2185 via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3012, the holding display board 2603 of the center accessory 2500, and the function display board 1191. Driving signal to the special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190 Is output.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3231, the second start port sensor 2127, the gate sensor 2402, and the count sensor 2128 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general winning opening sensor 3232 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2401, so the first start port sensor 3231, the second start port sensor 2127, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2402 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3231, the second start port sensor 2127, and the gate sensor 2402. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning ball 2103 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2128 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2128. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3232 does not occur frequently at the general winning opening 2104 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3232 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) BC0 (see FIG. 170) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the reduction of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout, a launch solenoid 654, and a ball feed by a ball feed solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731 and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 169, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as "external WDT 4111c" for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as a payout control input circuit. 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the machine 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When When the number “3” is displayed (specifically, it is a “counting switch error”) (specifically, the game ball is meshed with the vicinity of its entrance and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 has a problem), and when the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) control That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first transmitted via the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Are input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 through the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received at the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. The CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted in accordance with the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the remaining number display 365c. It outputs to the board 874, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 169, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, and this A firing solenoid driving circuit 4120d that outputs a driving signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. . Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front of the rotational handle body 506 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d through the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. By stopping the output, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 170) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 4170, or the gaming board Game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in 4, color LEDs of each decoration board provided in the game board 4, etc. Game board side drive light emission data composed of game board light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, flashing signal or gradation lighting signal to the game board decoration drive board Transmission from the serial I / O port to each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001, or driving to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door-side drive data for outputting a signal, and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 The configured door side driving light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration driving board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, or the liquid crystal display device. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the 1900 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a sound ROM Control signal for extracting the sound information from 140d (sound command) and outputs to the sound source IC4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are passed through relay boards 3014, 3016, 3018, and 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. is doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body drive, output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. It is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the command and the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  Each of the relay boards 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting flashing command via the peripheral relay terminal board 882. A lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the game board-side lighting flashing command that is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in the frame 5 Is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 2523, 2532, 3112, 3122, 3132, 3318, 3318, 3335, 3416, 3428, 3621, 3661, and 3661 provided in the game board 4. Each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 sends a drive signal to the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received drive command of the movable body. The dial drive motor 414 provided, the drive motors 3315, 3361, 3412, 3525, 3535, 3545, 3565, 3575, 3585 and the solenoid 3610 provided in the game board 4 are output.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of 3001.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 and the peripheral side relay terminal board attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. From the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the 882, or from the speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the relay boards 3014, 3016, 3018 and 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Then, control is performed so that music, sound effects and the like that match the various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 were provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391 described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the low-frequency speaker 821. In addition, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) with a sense of reality more than before.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data, as shown in FIG. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Control is being performed. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in time series. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an execution signal indicating that to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. “Sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”) set.

  Note that the sprite is configured by pasting a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixels, and from the left to the right when viewed from the front, and in a direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is performed sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 for one line. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[3-5. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. 170 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. Note that the grounds of the various substrates and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851 although not shown.

[3-5A. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the island facility. When the power switch 852 is operated, the power supplied from the island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 170, the power supply board 851 includes a full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, a power factor correction circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and a + 24V creation. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectification circuit 851a performs full-wave rectification of AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility and supplies the power to the power factor correction circuit 851b. This power factor improvement circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c smoothes + 37V by removing the input + 37V ripple, and + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, + 12V creation circuit 851f, + 24V creation circuit 851g, payout control board 4110 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. The + 5.2V creation circuit 851d creates a direct current + 5.2V (DC + 5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c.

  The + 5.25V creation circuit 851e creates a direct current + 5.25V (DC + 5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 12V creating circuit 851f creates DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 24V creating circuit 851g creates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The voltages created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. Note that AC24V supplied from the island facility is also supplied to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

  The power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source of a RAM (main control built-in RAM 4100e) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 in the payout control board 4110. This is a backup power source for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  As described later, + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a and also to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e via the diode MD0.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC1”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110 and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, as for the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC1, An electric current flows toward.

  In this way, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns to the payout control board 4110 and then from the payout control board 4110 back to the power supply board 851. 2V can be applied and charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied as the payout VBB to the payout control board 4110. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control MPU4111a does not operate, but the stored contents are retained by applying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has come to be.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC0”) is grounded, while the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. In other words, the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the + terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 from the supply control board 4110, and the supply control board 4110 again from + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d. Depending on the connection method, +5.2 V is applied and charging can be performed. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e. It has come to be.

[3-5B. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be described.

  Three types of voltages of + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 170, and the main control board is passed through this payout control board 4110. 4100 is also supplied. In addition, four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, and the peripheral control board is provided via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. On the other hand, among the four types of voltages, three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V are supplied to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. As shown in FIG. 171 (a), four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4010 are + 5.25V, + 12V, and Three kinds of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the lamp driving circuit 4161 of each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001, and the lighting signal is sent from the lamp driving circuit 4161 to various decorative boards of the game board 4 Various signals such as a flashing signal and a gradation lighting signal are output, and the four types of voltages are supplied to the driving source driving circuit 4162 of each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. The drive signal is output from the drive source drive circuit 4162 to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the game board 4. Of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages of +24 V and +37 V are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a that is controlled for drawing, and a backlight power source that is a backlight power source for the liquid crystal module 1900a. + 24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a, and + 37V is a backlight. Power is being supplied. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the door frame base substrate 194. Of these three types of voltages, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creating circuit 194a to create DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”). In addition to the three types of voltages, the door frame base substrate 194 supplies four types of voltages including + 9V generated by the + 9V generation circuit 194a to various decorative substrates and the like of the door frame 5.

[3-5C. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 170, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4111a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 through the diode PD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b detects signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. This power failure notice signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 via the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. 171 (a) and 171 (b), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4010. The backlight power supply 1900b is transmitted to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194, and various decorative substrates of the door frame 5 are passed through the door frame base substrate 194. Etc. are to be transmitted.

  In addition to + 12V and + 24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4111e of the payout control unit 4111, and + 24V is, for example, payout of the payout control unit 4111 It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4111d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is not used at all in the payout control board 4110 and is supplied to the launch power supply board 831 as it is via the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply substrate 831 creates a predetermined voltage, which will be described later, from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the firing control unit 4120.

[3-5D. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 170, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100h in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100f and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g and the like, for example.

[3-5E. Voltage supplied to launch power board]
As shown in FIG. 170, the firing power supply substrate 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create direct current + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”) to drive the firing solenoid of the launch control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. This is supplied to the circuit 4120d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as “−terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”) is grounded, while the plus terminal (hereinafter referred to as “positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”). Is electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the dispensing control board 4110. It has become. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[3-6. Driving solenoid drive method]
Next, a method for driving the firing solenoid 654 will be described. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, output voltage, signal logic and waveform, etc. at predetermined points of the drive circuit will be described. FIG. 172 is a block diagram showing a driving circuit for a firing solenoid, FIG. 173 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 174 is a diagram showing characteristics of the DC / DC converter. FIG. 175 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG.

[3-6A. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 172, the driving system of the firing solenoid 654 is mainly composed of a firing control input circuit 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b, a firing timing circuit 4120c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball in the dispensing control board 4110. The feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e, the DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831, the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and the smoothing circuit 851c are configured.

  When the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the launch control input circuit 4120a receives power (AC24V) from the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110. Is output to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a CR connection signal, and a detection signal from the touch sensor 516 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle is input. When the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, which is output as a touch detection signal to the firing timing circuit 4120c and detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will, is input. The stop detection signal is output to the firing timing circuit 4120c.

  The launch timing circuit 4120c permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4120a. Specifically, the firing timing circuit 4120c has a first state that the CR connection signal is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Case, touch detection signal is the second case that the palm or finger is not touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the firing stop detection signal tells that the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped Among the third cases, when one of the cases is applicable, the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited, while when not all of the cases, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted.

  The firing timing circuit 4120c receives the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and when allowing the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654, 100 game balls per minute are played based on this clock signal. A firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward 1100 and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball feeding reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number of times (5 times in this embodiment) to generate a ball It outputs to the feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 by a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 by + 24V from the power supply board 851.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4121a, an amplifier circuit 4121b, a voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and a switching circuit 4121d. The shunt regulator circuit 4121a is supplied with + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851. The direct current + 2.5V stabilized from + 5.2V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter “ + 2.5V ”) and is supplied to the amplifier circuit 4121b.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the shunt regulator circuit 4121a mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is held at a constant voltage with respect to the load. The REF terminal that is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal that is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 are electrically connected to + 5.2V via the resistor PR2, and the resistor PR2 connects to the REF terminal. The input current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5 V to the amplifier circuit 4121b. This +2.5 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC0 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC0 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that the A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Returning to FIG. 172, the amplifier circuit 4121b amplifies +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a twice to create DC + 5.0V (DC + 5.0V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.0V”). Then, it is supplied to the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192.

  The amplifier circuit 4121b mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC1 as shown in FIG. 173 (a). The operational amplifier PIC1 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and + 2.5V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 of the shunt regulator circuit 4121a is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, and the operational amplifier PIC1. Is connected to the other end of the resistor PR3, one end of which is grounded, and the other end of the resistor PR4, one end of which is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1. And is electrically connected. The resistance values of the resistors PR3 and PR4 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC1 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is, as described above, + 5.0V obtained by amplifying + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the handle as described above. The rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 is supplied via the device relay board 192. This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC2 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC2 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 grounded to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 172, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor. One fixed terminal at both ends is supplied with +5.0 V from the above-described amplifier circuit 4121b, and the other fixed terminal at both ends is a handle. It is electrically connected to the resistor PR0 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d in the payout control board 4110 via the device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR0 is grounded. From the variable terminal which is a terminal different from the fixed terminals at both ends of the rotational position detection sensor 512, it is possible to take out the divided voltage of the voltage applied to both ends according to the variable resistance value. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is supplied to resistors PR5 and PR6 (described later) in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110 via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay board 880. 173 (b)), and the divided voltage of the resistor PR6 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage.

  The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500 is, as described above, as shown in FIG. The ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the grounded and grounded capacitor PC3 (the capacitor PC3 also serves as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid of the payout control board 4110 The voltage is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower of the drive circuit 4120d. As shown in FIG. 173 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC2 at the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of volts, and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage outputs the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 by a factor of 1, that is, as it is as a voltage on the order of volts. The first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts, but outputs the voltage to the first-stage input-side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC3. Therefore, circuit separation from the first stage output side circuit is realized. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first stage input side circuit to the first stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the first stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC4 grounded to the ground.

  The output terminal of the first operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR5 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (− terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR5 is the non-inverting input terminal ( + Terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR6 whose one end is grounded in addition to the other end of the resistor PR5. As a result, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage is a voltage in the order of volts because it simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts as described above, and is divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The voltage of the divided resistor PR6 is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage as a voltage on the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage doubles the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2, that is, the voltage in the millivolt order is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage. To do. The operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage of the resistor PR6 in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6, but the resistor in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. Circuit separation is realized between a rear-stage input side circuit for applying a voltage that the PR6 takes on and a rear-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear stage input side circuit to the rear stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the rear stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 172, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 flows through a resistor PR1 whose one end is grounded, so that a voltage in the millivolt order which this resistor PR1 takes is used as a firing control voltage. 4121c. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is also applied with the firing intensity target voltage, which is the voltage in the millivolt order described above. As described above, the firing control voltage and the firing strength target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c are resistances from the voltage in the order of volts to the voltage in the order of millivolts in the payout control board 4110 (the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d) as described above. The voltage is stepped down by the voltages that PR1 and PR6 handle. That is, since it is applied via a wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, this wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4121c has a firing control voltage and a firing strength target voltage at a voltage on the order of millivolts. Can be compared with each other, between the board device of the payout control board 4110 and the hitting ball launching apparatus 650 and between the board equipment of the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500, it is electrically connected via wiring. Since the wiring is easily affected by noise, the influence of noise between the substrate devices is suppressed by using a voltage in the order of volts.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is an inverting circuit that compares the firing control voltage with the firing strength target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4121d. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the launch control voltage is greater than the launch intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as “L”), while the launch control voltage. Is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as “H”). Thus, since the output logic is H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4121d as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4121d receives the current from the DC / DC converter 831a provided in the firing power supply board 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c every time the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input. A combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC <b> 0 is passed to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, the switching circuit 4121d generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, when the OFF signal is input from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is cut off while flowing through the firing solenoid 654. That is, the switching circuit 4121d receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and outputs a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. If the voltage divided by the resistor PR1 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes L and OFF A signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit 4121d cuts off the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. By this interruption, the current does not flow to the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing strength target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes H again, and the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d. As described above, 4121d passes the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. As described above, in accordance with the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the switching circuit 4121d generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 with the firing solenoid 654. Therefore, the switching circuit 4121d performs control to cause the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c to self-oscillate and flow the current to the firing solenoid. That is, the switching circuit 4121d functions as a “self-oscillation constant current circuit”, and brings the firing control voltage close to the firing intensity target voltage. Thereby, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, and the launch solenoid 654 can be driven with a launch intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  When the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and is at the original rotational position where the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is applied to the resistor PR0. The applied voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is output to the switching circuit 4121d, the switching circuit 4121d combines the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The merged current is passed through the firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. At this time, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is at least over the firing rail 660. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is the firing intensity target voltage, a current commensurate with the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined). When the merged current flows into the launch solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the launch solenoid 654 reaches the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 even if the game ball can jump over the launch rail 660. Therefore, it is collected by the foul cover unit 540 as a foul ball. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all of the launched game balls are collected as foul balls. Thereby, since it can prevent overlapping with the game ball sent to the firing rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, the firing solenoid 654 is prevented from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. In addition, it is possible to prevent the firing solenoid 654 from being overloaded and to prevent failure.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a + 2.5V. Is amplified by the amplifier circuit 4121b and is divided by the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500, so that the rotational position of the front part 506 of the rotary handle body is the same as that of the divided voltage. When held at the position, no fluctuation occurs and the voltage is held constant. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by causing the combined current to flow to the launch solenoid 654 of the ball hitting device 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not vary, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654 can be prevented.

  In addition, the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a game ball circulation system in which game balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are ground and supplied to the pachinko gaming machine again. For this reason, the temperature in the island facility is extremely high due to the heat generated by the polishing of the game balls, the heat generated by the collision and friction between the game balls, and the heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko gaming machine and various electric decorations. In this embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, + 2.5V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko facility. It can be output. Thereby, since the fluctuation of + 2.5V due to temperature is suppressed, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4121d without including the minute voltage. In other words, when the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle is the same rotational position, “unevenness” can be suppressed in the firing strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100, so that “unevenness” of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[3-6B. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 174 with respect to the input current at the point TA and the output current and output voltage at the point TB shown in FIG. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

  First, as shown in FIG. 174 (a), the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In section C in which the current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout increases from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases by approximately 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from 1 to +5 V, the output current Iout increases from 660 mA to 1010 mA by about 350 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the vicinity of + 5V to zero V, the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is that the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. It has become a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, when a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin starts to become smaller than the output current Iout. The game ball launched toward the area 1100 has a launch intensity that reaches the game area 1100. In the section B where the output voltage Vout is + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout increases by about 40 mA from 360 mA to 400 mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 60 mA from 320 mA to 260 mA, compared with the output current Iout. Thus, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C where the output voltage Vout is from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout is increased by approximately 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, while the input current Iin is decreased by approximately 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA. The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In section D where the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout is increased by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by about 35 mA from 210 mA to 175 mA. Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by combining the 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotary handle body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated is touched 506, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. In some cases, the combined current of 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the front of the rotary handle body 506 and rotates the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise. Thus, the current flows through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotational speed limit position is reached. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is that the game ball that has already jumped into the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the stop 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering the various winning ports. For this reason, the range of values of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a that can be taken when the player turns the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise to play a game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <value of output current Iout <1000 mA), which is a milliampere order current.

[3-6C. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit]
Next, at a constant rotational position in front of the rotary handle body 506, the output current Iout and output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 172, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c, Will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TC point is a firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c. This is a point for referring to T0.

  As described above, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c permits the launching solenoid 654 to launch a game ball, 100 game balls per minute, that is, 60000 ms, are directed toward the game area 1100. Since it is set so as to be launched, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), its pulse width is 30 ms and its period T is 600 ms.

  Here, when the player touches the rotary handle body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle body front 506 to reach the limit rotational position, the DC / DC when the player is at the original rotational position not rotated. A waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

  When the firing handle front pulse 506 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is at the limit rotational position, it is shown in FIGS. As described above, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts to flow to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to +5 V in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA which is the maximum output current described above. Then, when the input is stopped after 30 ms has elapsed after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). When the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as shown in FIG. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is close to zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is equal to the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. When charging starts with a certain current of 1010 mA and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to near +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  On the other hand, when the firing handle front pulse 506 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is in the original rotational position, FIG. As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described minimum current, and is supplied to the firing solenoid 654. The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA which is the minimum output current described above. Then, after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, when 30 ms elapses and the input is stopped, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). When the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as described above. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 slightly falls, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is output from the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a current of 360 mA that is the current Iout, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  As described above, even when the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input. Can be completed within the remaining 570 ms charging time until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, consider a case in which the DC / DC converter 831a adopts a control method in which a current flows through the firing solenoid 654 alone in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within a period of 30 ms after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. In this control method, since the current that the DC / DC converter 831a independently flows to the firing solenoid 654 is about 2 A to 3.5 A, this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When driving the firing solenoid 654, a large current larger than 2A to 3.5A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the firing reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated with a period T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases with this period T. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to the electronic components and the decorations used for decoration in addition to the instantaneous large current that flows when the firing solenoid 654 is driven. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 without the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the period of 30 ms that is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The amperage-order current supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37 V on the power supply board 851 is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is inputted until the next firing reference pulse T0 is inputted. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the “first current” in the order of milliamperes supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851. And electrolytic When the power supply SC0 is charged with the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is distributed to the “second current” of the milliampere order supplied from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a. it can. As a result, the amperage order of the amperage order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. In the period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to when the next firing reference pulse T0 is input, the current is supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851. It can be averaged by the “first current” and “second current” in the order of milliamperes supplied. Therefore, a load for supplying an instantaneous large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. Further, it is possible to eliminate the time spent on designing the operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[3-6D. Relationship between firing reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 and the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 172 refers to the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c. It is a point to do.

  The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5) which is five times 30 ms which is the firing reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, as shown in FIGS. Input to the circuit 4120e (when timing t0, 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thereby, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. Thus, the next set of game balls to be launched can be completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. Each time the firing reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. Can be launched continuously toward

  As described above, in this example, after the game ball is driven by the firing solenoid 654, the driving power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831. Therefore, the current (maximum current) supplied to the firing solenoid 654 can be changed by exchanging the firing power supply board 831 having the electrolytic capacitors SC0 having different capacities, and the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launching device 650 can be changed. The characteristics can be changed to match the board 4.

  In addition, since the power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the launch solenoid 654, the power from the power supply board 851 is stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and fired between the time when the game ball is fired and the time of the next launch. By supplying to the solenoid 654, it is possible to avoid a large current being consumed instantaneously directly from the power supply board 851, and the light emission and movement of the LED of the light emitting decoration board, the motor for driving the effect, the solenoid, etc. It is possible to prevent instability and occurrence of unevenness of the game ball.

  Furthermore, the power supply board 851 creates and supplies DC power (+ 5.2V, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V) from the AC power (AC24V) of the island facility. The rotation handle body front 506 of the device 500 is rotated, and the firing solenoid 654 is driven with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation position of the rotation handle body front 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  The firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is + 2.5V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, is amplified by the amplification circuit 4121b, and + 5.0V is the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the rotational position of the rotary handle body front 506 is held at the same rotational position, the divided voltage is maintained at a constant voltage without fluctuation. Become. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by causing the combined current to flow to the launch solenoid 654 of the ball hitting device 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not vary, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654 can be prevented.

[3-7. Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 188. FIG. 176 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 177 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. FIG. 178 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 179 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the change start process. FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 183 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 186 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 187 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

  As shown in FIG. 176, in the main process, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is used. Executes processing to restore the power outage (power recovery processing), and if the backup data is abnormal, clears RAM 4100e and performs CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings, interrupt timing settings, etc.) Do.

  If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM 4100e. If the RAM clear switch 4100c that instructs to clear the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e in the power-on process is on, the RAM 4100e is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 during the power-on process, the RAM 4100e is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. The backup data is also stored in the RAM 4100e even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 851. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from an external power supply is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board 851, Supply to each device. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board 851 becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, the power failure notice indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 851 to the main control board 4100 is stopped. A signal is transmitted. Then, when a power failure warning signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a power failure occurrence process is executed (step S4).

  The process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption is performed when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board 851 after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). In order to start from the state, the state when the power failure occurs is stored as backup data in the RAM 4100e. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on the detection of the power failure warning signal It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177, the process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 4100e is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM 4100e before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM 4100e (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”), the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that the process described above cannot return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Next, in the timer interrupt process, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. After executing the register saving process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signals of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Further, in the normal control process in step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the movable piece 2105 that opens and closes the second start port 2102 by the start port solenoid 2121) is controlled. Then, a process of changing the open / close state of the second start port 2102 is executed. In the special control process in step S15, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 based on the progress of the game, or a special prize is obtained by the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker solenoid 2124). The opening / closing member 2106) for opening and closing the mouth 2103 is controlled, and processing for changing the open / closed state of the special winning opening 2103 is executed.

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S16, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for the determination of whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state (also called the big hit determination or big hit lottery), the big hit gaming state in the big hit determination A big hit game with a big hit symbol used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined that it will be generated (including whether it is a probable big hit or not (including a probable change judgment, also called a probable lottery)) Reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination) whether or not to lose with a reach mode when it is determined not to generate a state, a special symbol variable display pattern displayed on special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 A variable display pattern random number (variable time random number) used to determine (variable time), a movable piece that opens and closes the second start port 2102 Whether to control the open state 105 of determining whether plain per determining random number used in the (usually lottery per determination), and the like.

In this example, a lottery (also referred to as a small hit lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to generate a small hit gaming state using a big hit determination random number. Further, it is also determined whether or not to make a probability variation big hit (a probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than usual. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a probable big hit) using a big hit symbol random number. Further, when it is determined that the winning is made using the big hit determining random number, it is also determined whether or not the special winning is made using the big winning design random number. Note that the variable display pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol (special symbol) that is displayed and controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be determined.
Further, based on the big hit determination random number, determining whether or not the “big hit lottery” or “small hit lottery” is won is also referred to as “hit lottery”. Moreover, the whole determination performed by the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random corresponds to a special lottery.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit determination random number related to occurrence of the big hit gaming state, a big hit symbol random number, and a normal symbol per random determination random number related to whether or not the movable piece 2105 is controlled to be in an open state. Update. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not to control the movable piece 2105 to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing in this way, the probability (probability to determine that the big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece 2105 is controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant, and the game It is possible to prevent the person from becoming disadvantaged. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the generation of the big hit gaming state and the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery, the variable display pattern random number and the like are updated.

  Next, in the special control process, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S20 to step S90 as shown in FIG. In the start opening winning process of step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102, and a process of updating the lottery hold state is executed when winning. In the variation start processing of step S30, the number of stored (holding number) in each jackpot lottery is confirmed, and if the number of held (total number of stored) is not 0, the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started. Set up. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a big hit gaming state (profit granting state) is to be generated (winning determination means), and if a big hit gaming state is to be generated, it is determined whether or not it is a promising big hit. . In the variation pattern setting process in step S40, settings related to variation display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol are performed. Specifically, the variation display pattern of each special symbol is determined, and the variation time set corresponding to the variation display pattern (after the variation display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol display units 1185 and 1186) Set the timer to the time until stop.

  In the changing process of step S50, the timer set with the changing time is monitored in the changing display pattern setting process (step S40), and the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display is displayed based on the time-out of the timer. The special symbol display on the display 1186 (corresponding to the special symbol displays 1185 and 1186) is stopped. At this time, if it is determined in the variation start process (step S30) that one of the big hit lotteries is in the big hit game state, the processing selection flag is updated to “3”, and the small win game state is changed in the same lottery. If the determination is made, the process selection flag is updated to “4”, and if it is not determined to be the big hit or small hit gaming state, the process selection flag is updated to “0”.

  In the big hit game start process (profit granting state control means) in step S60, a setting for starting the big hit game state is performed. Although specifically described later, the number of times of opening / closing the opening / closing member 2106, the opening time, and the like are set according to the type of jackpot. In addition, in the small hit game start process in step S70, setting for starting the small hit game state is performed. Although specifically described later, the number of times of opening / closing the opening / closing member 2106 at the small hit, the opening time, and the like are set. In the big hit game process of step S80, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the opening / closing member 2106 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big winning opening 2103 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Process. In addition, if the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has not reached the predetermined number, processing for opening the opening / closing member 2106 is performed again, and when the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has reached the predetermined number, a processing selection flag Is updated to “5”. In addition, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, processing for generating a probability variation state and a short-time gaming state is executed (special gaming state control means).

  In the small hit game process of step S90, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the opening / closing member 2106 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big winning opening 2103 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Perform the process. Although details will be described later, the opening of the big prize opening 2103 in the small hit game process is set so that the profit to the player is extremely low as compared with the big hit game process (step S80). Next, specific processing in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

  Next, in the start opening winning process, as shown in FIG. 180, first, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 2127, and the detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 2127. In this case, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 2102 (YES in step S201), and if the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2127 is not output, the game ball is input to the second start port 2102. Is determined not to win (NO in step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won at the second start port 2102, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit judgment, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 4100e. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (step S202). If the second hold number counter is less than 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are executed. These processes will be described later. When the value of the second hold number counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second start port sensor 2127 in step S201 (NO in step S201), or when the value of the second hold number counter is 4 (NO in step S202). Determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 2101 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3231. When it is determined in step S205 that a game ball has won the first starting port 2101 (YES), various random numbers for the first big hit lottery are obtained, and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM 4100e is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 4 (step S206). If the first hold number counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are executed. When the value of the first hold number counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  The main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command for notifying the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102 to the peripheral control board 4010 in steps S203 and S207 of FIG. The winning notification command indicates the number of reserved various random numbers stored. Even when a game ball is received at the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, the main control MPU 4100 a does not need to send a winning notification command if the random number is not stored as a hold. Good. The peripheral control board 4010 may display the number of holds on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the received winning notification command.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may further transmit a command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control board 4010 as a winning notification command. The preceding determination process is performed prior to lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, determination of a big hit lottery, a promiscuous lottery, a small hit lottery, and a variation display pattern, which will be described later), and the lottery result is obtained in advance. It is a process to determine. The preceding determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the preceding determination table. The preceding determination table is the same as the table used for the lottery using the random number (for example, hit determination tables 4501, 4521, hit symbol tables 4502, 4522, variation time setting tables 4503, 4504, 4523, 4524). It is a table. In other words, the preceding determination table is a table including all the contents of these tables. In the preceding determination process, by comparing the random number with the preceding determination table, the lottery result when the lottery using the random number is performed (whether the big hit or the small hit is successful, the type of the big hit, the variation display pattern, etc. (The determination made in this way prior to the lottery is also referred to as “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control board 4010 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (predetermined determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (the effect is “prefetching” Also called “Direction”). For example, when the pre-determining effect indicates that an effect with a specific singer as a motif is realized, a character representing a specific singer is displayed in the effect before the effect is realized. It may be an effect.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery. Further, the preceding determination process may be performed by directly referring to the acquired random numbers in tables such as the hit determination tables 4501 and 4502 without using the preceding determination table, or the copy random numbers obtained by copying the acquired random numbers The preceding determination process may be performed with reference to the hit determination tables 4501, 4502, and the like.

  The main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command indicating the result of the advance determination process only when the gaming state satisfies a specific condition. When the game condition does not satisfy the specific condition, the main control MPU 4100a A winning notification command that does not represent a result may be transmitted. For example, when the variable display resulting from winning at the first start port 2101 is not started immediately after winning, but is suspended, the main control MPU 4100a displays a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination processing related to the winning. You may send it. Here, in the big hit gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process, but transmits a winning notification command that does not indicate the result of the preceding determination process. May be. The specific conditions regarding the second start port 2102 may be similar.

  Subsequently, in the variation start process, as shown in FIG. 181, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “0”. If it is “0” (YES in step S301), the process after step S302 is performed. If the process is executed and is not “0” (NO in step S301), the change start process is terminated. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values of the two reserved number counters (the first start memory number and the second start memory number) corresponding to the special symbol indicators 2390a and 2390b are “0”. Since the sum of the values in the two pending number counters indicates the number of random number values stored in the start memory storage area (special symbol random number storage means 4515, 2940 (see FIG. 188)), in step S302 If the value of any of the holding number counters is both “0” (YES), it is determined that the start condition regarding the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S317.

  On the other hand, if the value of any of the number-of-holds counters is not “0” in step S302 (NO), the start memory transfer process is executed (steps S303 to S311). As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d). Each is associated with the value of the stored number (“1” to “4”). As shown in FIG. 188 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). The two start memory numbers (“1” to “4”) are respectively associated with the values. Each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d includes a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, and a big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 in which a big hit symbol random number is stored. .

  In the start memory transfer process, first, whether or not the value of the hold number counter (second start memory number) corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is “0”, that is, the second special symbol random number memory. It is determined whether or not random numbers are stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the means 4532 (step S303). If random numbers are stored (NO), each of the nth storage areas (n is a natural number of 2 or more) Processing for shifting various random numbers stored in (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area [4] 4532d) to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively. (Step S304) and processing for obtaining a random number related to the second special symbol stored in the storage area [1] 4532a (Step S305) are executed. In addition, “1” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S306), and a process of subtracting “1” from the holding number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is executed (step S307).

  On the other hand, when no random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532, that is, when the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is "0". (YES in step S303), stored in each of the nth storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area [4] 4515d) of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 (n is a natural number of 2 or more). Stored in the storage area [1] 4515a and the process of shifting the various random numbers to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c), respectively. A process of acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol (step S309) is executed. In addition, a process of subtracting “1” from the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S311) is executed.

  That is, regarding the first special symbol, when holding, as in the case of the second special symbol, the value of the hold number counter (first start memory number) is increased by “1”, and the extracted random number is It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first start memory number, but when the first special symbol starts to change, only when the second start memory number is “0”, that is, the first special symbol Each random number is read out from the first storage area “1” 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 only when one process is waiting and the second processing by the second special symbol is not waiting. ing. This control makes it possible to perform the second process preferentially over the first process.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. Jackpot determination table, i.e., a table with a low probability of being a jackpot, on the other hand, in the case of a probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability fluctuation operation, i.e., the probability of a big hit is Select a highly set table. In this example, the probability of jackpot is set to 6/499 when the probability variation is not activated (that is, normal), and the probability of jackpot is set to 60 when the probability variation is activated (that is, when the probability is high). / 499. Here, it is assumed that it is determined whether or not a big hit is made using a random number representing one value randomly selected from 499 values. It may be any other number different from the number (for example, a number greater than 499 or a number less than 499). The probability of winning a big hit is not limited to these, and may be set to other values. For example, the probability of being a big hit at a normal time may be 1/299, and the probability of being a big hit at a high probability may be 10/299.

  After any table is selected in step S313 or step S314, a random number (a jackpot determination random number) related to any special symbol acquired in step S305 or step S309 based on that table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not the corresponding random number (big hit value) (step S315 (big hit lottery)). If it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit flag is set to "ON" (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. On the other hand, when the acquired random number is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S318). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S318), the small hit flag is set to "ON" (step S319), and the process proceeds to step S317. If it is not the small hit value (NO in step S318), the process proceeds to step S317 without going through step S319. In step S317, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. Note that the ON / OFF state (set state, reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is stored in the RAM 4100e. The OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is a value of “1”. Is set.

  Next, in the variation pattern setting process, as shown in FIG. 182, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “1”. If the flag is “1” in step S317 (YES in step S401), The process after step S402 is executed, and if it is not “1” (NO in step S401), the variation pattern setting process is terminated. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is “ON”. If it is “ON” in step S316 (YES in step S402), the acquired random number (random number for big hit symbol) is used as a basis. Then, it is determined whether the big hit of the probability fluctuation big hit or the normal big hit (step S403 (probability variation lottery)). If the probability variation is a big hit (YES in step S403), it is determined whether or not it is a special hit based on the big hit symbol random number (step S404). Note that the determination of whether or not a special hit is based on the jackpot symbol random number is also referred to as a special hit lottery. As will be described in detail later, all probability fluctuation jackpots are common in “in the subsequent lottery, a probability fluctuation state is set in which the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than usual”. However, in the other probability fluctuation big hits excluding the special hit, “the fluctuation time of the special symbol that fluctuates in any one of the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 is shortened (relatively shorter than the normal time), and the second The short-time gaming state in which the easiness of winning a prize at the starting port 2102 is increased more than usual ”is generated, whereas the probability variation big hit which is a special hit does not cause such a short-time gaming state to occur. Is set to In addition, in the probability variation state due to the probability variation big hit that is a special hit, when the probability variation big hit that is a special hit is further won, a short-time gaming state is set to occur.

  Here, the case where the gaming state is the probability variation state and the short-time gaming state is also referred to as a probability variation external advantageous state. A case where the gaming state is a probability variation state and is not a short-time gaming state is also referred to as a probability variation external disadvantageous state. A case where the gaming state is not the probability variation state (that is, the big hit probability is a low probability state) and is a short-time gaming state is usually called an external advantageous state. Further, the case where the gaming state is not a probability variation state (that is, a big hit probability is a low probability state) and is not a short-time gaming state is also referred to as a normal external disadvantage state or simply a normal gaming state.

  As described above, the special hit in the normal gaming state shifts to the probability variation external disadvantageous state. Further, as described above, the special hit in the probability variation external disadvantage state shifts to the probability variation external advantage state. In the present embodiment, the special hit in the normal external advantageous state and the positive variable external advantageous state also shifts to the positive variable external advantageous state.

  In general probability fluctuation big hits (other probability fluctuation big hits excluding special hits), a plurality of (e.g., ten) game balls are freed per opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 for opening and closing the big prize opening 2103. The opening and closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled to be performed many times (for example, 15 times) giving a lot of profits. On the other hand, in the probability variation big hit that is a special hit, the opening time per opening / closing member 2106 is set to a time that can barely win several (for example, one or two) game balls. Be controlled.

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is not a special hit, that is, if it is determined that it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO), a probability variation big hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S405), while a special hit is determined. If it is determined that it is a hit (YES in step S404), the probability variation special hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S406). If it is determined in step S403 that the probability variation is not big hit, that is, if it is decided that the normal big hit is made (YES), the normal big hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S407).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the big hit flag is not "ON" (NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is "ON" (step S408 (small hit lottery)), and step S319. If “ON” is selected (YES in step S408), a small hit hour variation display pattern table is selected (step S409). When the small hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S408), it is determined whether or not the acquired reach determination random number is a random number (reach value) corresponding to reach (step S410). ) If the reach value is (out of reach reach) (YES in step S410), the loss reach variation display pattern table is selected (step 411). If the reach value is not (out of place), In step S410, NO, the loss variation display pattern table is selected (step S412).

  The above-described probability variation special hit fluctuation display pattern table, normal big hit fluctuation display pattern table, outlier fluctuation display pattern table, and outlier reach fluctuation display pattern table are the cases where the gaming state is not the short-time gaming state, that is, This table is selected in the case of the probability variation external disadvantage state and the normal gaming state (normal external disadvantage state). The whole of these tables is also called an external disadvantageous fluctuation display pattern table.

  When the gaming state is the normal external advantageous state, the external disadvantageous fluctuation display pattern table is not selected. In this normal external advantageous state, it is a table different from the external disadvantageous fluctuation display pattern table. The normal and short time fluctuation display pattern table is selected including the case where there is a loss reach and a case where the loss is neither big hit nor reach. Details of the normal time change display pattern table will be described later.

  In addition, even when the gaming state is a probability variation external advantageous state, the external disadvantageous time variation display pattern table is not selected. In this probability-variable external advantageous state, the table is different from the external disadvantageous fluctuation display pattern table and the normal short-time fluctuation display pattern table. The probability variation short time variation display pattern table is selected including the case where there is no reach and no reach. Details of the probability change time change display pattern table will be described later.

  In this way, when a variable display pattern table is selected in any step, the variable display pattern is selected based on the variable display pattern table and the variable display pattern random number acquired in either step S305 or step S309. Is determined (step S413). Next, a selection value is set as an effect command for designating the variable display pattern determined in step S413 (step S414), and a timer (this implementation) provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 has a variable time corresponding to the variable display pattern. In this form, it is set to an effective period timer (step S415). In step S415, the variation time set in the variation display pattern determined in step S413 is set in the effective period timer.

  Note that the variable display pattern command set in step S414 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in command transmission output processing. When a variable display pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by command transmission output processing, a drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, and the special symbol variable display is started. Let Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S416), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the changing process, as shown in FIG. 183, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “2” (step S501). If YES in step S502, the process after step S502 is executed. If it is not “2” (NO in step S501), the changing process ends. In step S502, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the symbol or the second special symbol is up (step S503). When the fluctuation time is up, that is, when the fluctuation time is ended (YES in step S503), the fluctuation is stopped (step S504).

  In the case where the gaming state is the normal external advantageous state, when the processing of step S504 is completed, the big hit flag is not ON (when the change is not big hit), and the number of short and short times is a specified number (for example, 70 When the time is reached, the short-time gaming state is terminated, and the normal gaming state (normal external disadvantageous state) that is neither the short-time gaming state nor the probability variation state is entered.

  If none of the special symbols has changed (NO in step S502), or if the change time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbols are changing without being stopped. The process ends.

  After stopping the variation of the special symbol in step S504, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is “ON” (step S505). If the big hit flag is “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “3”. (Step S506). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S505), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S507). If it is “ON”, the processing flag is set to “4”. Is updated to “0” (step S508). If it is not “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S509). As described above, after the processing flag is updated in any of step S506, step S508, or step S509, the changing process is terminated.

  Next, in the big hit game start process, as shown in FIG. 184, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “3”. If it is “3” in step S506 (YES in step S601). ), The process after step S602 is executed, and if it is not “3” (NO in step S601), the big hit game start process is terminated. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state. If the probability variation state is present (YES), the operation of the probability variation function is temporarily stopped, and the process proceeds to step S604. To do. If the state is not the probability variation state, that is, if it is a normal low probability state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is operating, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state is set. If the time saving gaming state is set (YES), the operation of the time saving function is stopped (step S605). The process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, if it is not the short-time gaming state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S606 without executing the process in step S605.

  In step S606, it is determined whether the type of jackpot is a general jackpot or a special jackpot. If the jackpot is a general jackpot (NO in step S606), the opening / closing member 2106 opens the jackpot 2103. The conditions, that is, the number of big hits to be released, the opening time per time, and the limited number of winnings to the big winning opening 2103 are set (step S607). On the other hand, if the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S606), the special winning opening number, the limited number of winnings, and the opening time per time are set in the big winning opening 2103 (step S608). Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “5” (step S609), and the big hit game start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the small hit game start processing, as shown in FIG. 185, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “4”. If it is “4” in step S508 (YES in step S701). ), The process of step S702 and step S703 is executed, and if the process flag is not “4” (NO in step S701), the small hit game start process is terminated without executing the process of step S702 and step S703. To do. In step S702, the condition for opening the big prize opening 2103 in the case of a small hit, that is, the number of small hits for the big prize opening 2103 opened by the opening / closing member 2106, and the opening time per one are set. It should be noted that the number of times of opening in the small hit, the limited number of winnings, and the opening time are set to be the same as the conditions (step S608) set in the case of special hit. That is, the special hit and the small hit are set so that they cannot be visually discriminated. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” (step S703), and the small hit game start process is terminated.

  Next, in the big hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 186, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “5”, and if it is “5” in step S609 (YES in step S801). If the process after step S802 is not “5” (NO in step S801), the big hit game process is terminated. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is open. If it is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2103 is a predetermined time set in advance. Is reached (step S803), and if it has elapsed (YES in step S803), the open / close member 2106 is operated to close the special winning opening 2103 (step S805).

  Even if the set release time has not elapsed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls that won the big prize opening 2103 after the big prize opening 2103 was opened was set in step S607. If the limit number (for example, 10) is exceeded (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S805, and the special winning opening 2103 is closed. If the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 has not reached the set time (NO in step S803) and the number of winning game balls has not reached the limit (NO in step S804), The jackpot game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big prize opening 2103 is not open in step S802 (NO), the number of times the big prize opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2106 is set in the number of big hits opened in step S607 or in step S608. It is determined whether or not the specified number of special hits has been reached (step S806). If it has not reached (NO in step S806), the open / close member 2106 is controlled to open the big winning opening 2103 (step S807), and the big hit game process is terminated. As a result, a large amount of game balls can be awarded to the big prize opening 2103.

  In step S806, when the number of times of opening the big winning opening 2103 has reached the set number (YES), that is, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the processing of step S808 to step S813 is executed, and the subsequent lottery is performed. Set the game state for the game. Specifically, first, the jackpot flag is set to “OFF” (step S808), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a win that activates the probability variation function (step S809). That is, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit including the special hit or the normal big hit. When winning with the probability variation jackpot (YES in step S809), the operation of the probability variation function is started, and a probability variation state with a high probability is set (step S810). That is, the probability that the big hit is won in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time.

  If the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S811), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function or the short time function is in operation (step S814). If it is not a special hit, that is, if it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO in step S810), or if a special hit is won when the probability fluctuation function or the time reduction function is already activated, The operation of the time reduction function is started (that is, the gaming state is changed to the probabilistic external advantageous state) (step S812), and then the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S813). That is, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the moving time of the movable piece 2105 is reduced to the second start port 2102. Makes it easier to win a prize than usual. On the other hand, if the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not in operation, that is, if the probability variation state and the time reduction gaming state have not occurred, and the special hit is won (NO in step S814), the time reduction function The process proceeds to step S813 without operating (i.e., the gaming state is set to the probable external disadvantageous state).

  On the other hand, if it is not a win that activates the probability varying function in Step S809, that is, if it is a normal big hit (NO), the operation of the time-shortening function is started and the specified number of times of operation in the time-shortening function is set (Step S815). Then, the process proceeds to step S813 (that is, the gaming state is shifted to the normal external advantageous state). That is, the time shortening function is operated until the number of changes of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, 70 times).

  Next, in the small hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 187, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “6”. If it is “6” in step S703 (YES in step S901). ), The process after step S902 is executed, and if it is not “6” (NO in step S901), the small hit game process is terminated. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won for the big prize opening 2103 has reached a preset maximum number of winnings (step S902). If the maximum number of winnings has not been reached yet (NO) ), It is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2103 is open (step S903). If it is determined in step S903 that the big prize opening 2103 is open (YES), the opening time of the big prize opening 2103 (elapsed time after opening) reaches a predetermined time set in advance. In step S904, if it has elapsed (YES in step S904), the open / close member 2106 is operated to close the special prize opening 2103 (step S905). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special winning opening 2103 has been opened has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) (step S906). It is updated to “0” (step S907), and the small hit game process is terminated.

  If the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 has not reached the predetermined time in step S904 (NO), or if the number of opening has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is executed. The small hit game process is terminated without doing so. In step S903, if the big prize opening 2103 is not open (NO), the big prize opening 2103 is opened to allow a game ball to be won (step S908). In step S902, if the number of game balls won for the big prize opening 2103 has reached a preset maximum number of prizes (YES), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is open (step). S909) If it is open (YES), the special prize opening 2103 is closed (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, when the special winning opening 2103 is not open (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process of step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to “0”.

  The types of jackpots are not limited to the types described above, and various other types of jackpots may be implemented. For example, when the gaming state is a normally unfavorable state, the probability variation big hit is the same as the above-mentioned “special hit”, and the opening time per opening of the big winning opening 2103 (opening / closing member 2106) in the big hit game is short. Although it is set to one predetermined time, a big hit may be implemented so that a short-time gaming state (probability variation external advantageous state) occurs. In this case, in a predetermined round (for example, two rounds) in the big hit game, the opening time per time of the big prize opening 2103 (opening / closing member 2106) is set to a time relatively longer than the first predetermined time, and other than the predetermined round This round may be set to the first predetermined time in which the opening time per one time of the big prize opening 2103 (opening / closing member 2106) is short. Further, such special hits may be omitted, and the types of big hits may be only normal big hits and only probable big hits excluding special hits. Furthermore, it is usually a big hit and does not shift to the probability variation state after the big hit game ends. However, as in the above-mentioned “special hit”, the opening time per one big winning opening 2103 (opening / closing member 2106) in the big hit game is A big hit (so-called crash) may be implemented that is set to a short first predetermined time and causes a short-time gaming state (usually an external advantageous state). Further, in the big hit game, the big winning opening 2103 is changed to the second predetermined time with a long opening time while the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 is once set to a short first predetermined time. A so-called jump-up jackpot) may be implemented.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the small hit is provided, it is not restricted to this, You may make it abbreviate | omit a small hit.

[3-8. Control processing at peripheral control unit]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 193. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing. FIG. 191 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). FIG. 192 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 193 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210).

  In the sub main process, as shown in FIG. 189, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  In this example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process for counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms elapses, the 16 ms elapse flag is displayed. At the same time as T is set, the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

  In the 16 ms steady process, the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 provided in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the door frame 5, and the game board 4 based on the effect command received from the main control board 4100. , 430, 432, 3014, etc., and processing for controlling the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, etc. of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S1002 again, and the above-described steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  Next, in the 16 ms steady process, the sub-peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S1100 to S1600 as shown in FIG. In the command analysis process in step S1100, the effect command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1200, a control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, a notice effect is set, a decorative symbol stop symbol is determined, and the like.

  In the sound control process in step S1300, a control process related to the speakers 130, 222, 262, and 821 for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect is executed. In the light emission decoration control process of step S1400, the control process regarding the light emission decoration by each decoration board | substrate 214,216,254,256,286,320,322,430,432,3014 with which the door frame 5 or the game board 4 was equipped is performed. Execute. In the information output process in step S1500, an effect command is transmitted to each of the relay boards 3014, 3016, 3018, and 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. In the random number update process of step S1600, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S1100 to step S1600 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady processing to the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is started from the beginning immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady processing (in step S1100 described later). Do not execute (from command parsing process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. Start.

  In this example, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. is not. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  Next, in the command analysis processing, as shown in FIG. 191, first, it is determined whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S1101). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 4100, other processes such as a 16 ms steady process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt process, and the received command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 The received command storage area in the RAM 4140e is saved. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands, and in the command reception interrupt process, the reception command storage areas are stored in the respective areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands. In step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if an effect command is stored, the effect command in the reception order of the reception command storage area is read (step S1102).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103). If the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), a variable display pattern reception flag is set. Then, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1104).

  On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a variable display pattern command (NO in step S1103), it is determined whether the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command (step S1105), and if the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command. If (YES in step S1105), a probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1106). Further, if the read effect command is not a probability change big hit command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 192, the effect control process refers to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game and performs any one of steps S1210 to S1230.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting for starting the decorative symbol variation display is performed if a variation display pattern command is received. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probability variation jackpot command, and the notice effect is set.

  In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, control is performed to stop the variation symbol display of the decorative symbol by transmitting a display command to the liquid crystal controller 4150 when the variation stop command is received. Do.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a display indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started or a jackpot is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control is performed to display the game state (for example, round display).

  Next, in the decorative symbol variation start process, as shown in FIG. 193, first, it is determined whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variation display pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in step S1104 of the command analysis process (step S1100) described above and indicates that a variation display pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. If the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221, (NO), it is determined that the variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variable display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), the variable display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and the variable display pattern based on the received variable display pattern command generates a big hit. It is determined whether it is a variable display pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223a).

  If the variation display pattern is not a winning pattern (NO in step S1223a), a stop symbol for the lost symbol is determined (step S1224). If the variation display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S1223a), it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S1223b). If the probability variation big hit flag is set (YES), the probability variation big hit symbol is determined. Is determined (step S1225). If the probability variation big hit flag is not set (NO in step S1223b), the stop symbol of the non-probable big hit symbol is determined (step S1226). The probability variation big hit flag is reset when the big hit gaming state is started in the big hit display process (step S1230). The time when the probability variation big hit flag is reset is not limited to this. For example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1220), specifically, when the variation stop command is received, the reset is performed. Alternatively, it may be reset when the big hit gaming state is ended in the big hit display process (step S1230).

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the second special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol. A common decorative symbol sequence (hereinafter referred to as “common decorative symbol sequence”) corresponding to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are composed of combinations of figures such as circles, crosses, sankaku, and the like. , And combinations that are lost are set in advance. In other words, if the variable display pattern is a winning pattern, stop any combination symbol from among a plurality of combinations set as a probable big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol or a plurality of combinations set as a non-probable big hit symbol Determined as a symbol.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a notice selection process for determining whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1227), and is then stored in the variable display pattern and the notice type storage area. A display command is set according to the notice pattern and the stop symbol of the common decorative symbol sequence determined in steps S1225, S1226, and S1227 (step S1228). Then, the process selection flag is updated to “1” and the process is terminated (step S1229). The display command set in step S1228 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in the information output process (step S1500), and the liquid crystal display is based on the reception of the display command by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150. The apparatus 1900 starts executing the decorative symbol variation display.

  When the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1228, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after reading the notice pattern. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when the change display of the previous decoration symbol is erroneously started in the next decoration pattern change display from being executed.

[4-1. Functional configuration for games on the main control board]
Subsequently, a functional configuration relating to a game such as a special symbol controlled by the main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 197. FIG. 194 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the first big hit lottery on the main control board. FIG. 195 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the second big hit lottery on the main control board. FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration relating to an advantageous gaming state generated according to the lottery results in the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery. FIG. 197 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the normal lottery on the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the main control board 4100 includes a first hit determination table 4501, a first hit symbol table 4502, a first hit hour variation time setting table 4503, and a configuration related to the first big hit lottery. A first lose time variation time setting table 4504 is stored in advance. Based on these tables 4501 to 4504, whether or not the lottery is determined in the first big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, and the variation time. Is determined. The first hit determination table 4501 shows the relationship between the big hit determination random number value and the success or failure of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning ratio is different between the normal time and the high probability. The first winning symbol table 4502 shows the relationship between the big winning symbol random value and the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 1185. The range and the lighting state of the two LEDs (first special symbol) are associated with each other.

  The first hit time variation time setting table 4503 is used when the result of the first big hit lottery is a big hit or small hit, and the first random time random number and the first special symbol display 1185 extracted. The first lost time changing time setting table 4504 is used when the result of the first big lottery lottery is lost and is extracted. The relationship between the random time for fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185 is shown. Note that the first lottery probability selection means 4505 performs processing for selecting one of the normal table and the high probability table based on the gaming state. Although not shown, the first hit symbol table 4502 includes a probability variation big hit table, a special hit table, a normal big hit table, and a small hit table, respectively. A table corresponding to the type of winning determined by the first winning / failing determining means 4506 described later is selected.

  Further, when a winning to the first start port 2101 is detected by the first start port sensor 3231 on the main control board 4100, a first hit determination for extracting a big hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generating means). Random number extracting means 4507 and first hit symbol random number extracting means 4508 for extracting big hit symbol random numbers are provided. Also, first variation time random number extraction means 4509 is provided for extracting variation time random numbers based on determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers. Further, when the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extraction means 4507, the first hit determination unit 4506 for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the first hit determination table 4501, and the first hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number is extracted by the random number extracting unit 4508, a first stop symbol determining unit 4510 for determining a stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 1185 using the first hit symbol table 4502 is provided. Yes.

  Further, when the random time random number extraction means 4509 extracts the random time for variation time and the first hit / fail determination means 4506 determines that it is a big hit, the first variation time random time setting table 4503 is used. When the variation time of the first special symbol is determined and the random number for variation time is extracted and the first hit determination means 4506 determines that the variation is lost, the first variation time variation time setting table 4504 is determined. First variation time determining means 4511 is provided for determining the variation time of the first special symbol by using.

  Further, on the main control board 4100, the first special symbol display 1185 starts the variation of the first special symbol, and after the variation time determined by the first variation time determination means 4511 elapses, the first stop symbol determination is performed. Special symbol fluctuation control means 4512 for causing the variable symbol to stop at the stop symbol determined by the means 4510, a success / failure command related to the presence / absence of the big hit determined by the first success / failure determination means 4506, and the first Command transmission means 4513 for transmitting a control command including a variation display command corresponding to the variation mode (time) of the special symbol is provided.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when the first starting port sensor 3231 detects winning in the first starting port 2101 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ) Is counted as an upper limit and the first start memory number is counted and stored, and the first reserved digesting means 4514 is provided for repeatedly displaying the first special symbol as many times as the start memory number. In other words, the first holding digesting means 4514 for waiting for the execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 3231 is provided. The first hold digesting means 4514 will be described in more detail. The first hold digesting means 4514 is provided with a first hold control means 4514a and a first digestion control means 4514b. If a winning at the first start port 2101 is detected by the first start port sensor 3231 during the change of the one special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start memory number must reach the upper limit value “4”. For example, the value of the first start memory number is increased by “1”, the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are extracted, and the extracted random numbers are used as the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 ( (See FIG. 198).

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing and the first first special symbol can be changed, the first digestion control unit 4514b sets the start memory number related to the first special symbol to “ If not "0", the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the first starting stored number is reduced by "1", and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 195, the main control board 4100 has a second hit determination table 4521, a second hit symbol table 4522, and a second hit variable time setting table 4523 as the configuration related to the second big hit lottery. , And a second lose time variation time setting table 4524, and based on these tables 4521 to 4524, whether or not the lottery in the second big hit lottery is successful, the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, and The variation time is determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first big hit lottery, detailed description is omitted here.

  The main control board 4100 has second hit determination random number extraction means 4525 for extracting a big hit determination random number related to the second big hit lottery when the second start port sensor 2127 detects a winning at the second start port 2102. And second random number extraction means 4526 for extracting the big hit symbol for the second big hit lottery, and the second random number extraction for the variable time for extracting the random number for the variable time based on the random number for determination and the random number for the big hit symbol Means 4527 are provided. When the big hit determination random number extraction means 4525 extracts the big hit determination random number, the second hit determination means 4528 for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the second hit determination table 4521, and the second hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number extraction means 4526 extracts the big hit symbol random number, second stop symbol determination means 4529 for determining the stop symbol in the second special symbol indicator 1186 using the second hit symbol design table 4522 is provided. Yes.

  Furthermore, when the random time for variation time is extracted by the random number extraction unit for second variation time 4527 and it is determined that the big hit is determined by the second determination unit 4528, the second variation time setting table 4523 is used. When the variation time of the second special symbol is determined, and when the variation time random number is extracted and the second hit determination unit 4528 determines that the variation is lost, the second variation time variation time setting table 4524 is determined. The second variation time determination means 4530 is provided for determining the variation time of the second special symbol using the. Note that the second win / fail decision means 4528 includes a win restriction means 4528a, and restricts the “special hit” that is a big hit that does not give a specific profit to the player so as not to occur.

  Further, the special symbol variation control means 4512 starts the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol indicator 1186, and after the variation time determined by the second variation time determination unit 4530 has elapsed, the second stop symbol variation. The variation is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the determining means 4529. Further, the main control board 4100 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when the second starting port sensor 2127 detects a winning to the second starting port 2102 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the second start memory number is counted and stored, and the second reserved digesting means 4531 is provided for repeatedly displaying the variation of the second special symbol by the start memory number. In other words, the second reserved digesting means 4531 is provided to wait for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 2127.

  The second hold digesting means 4531 will be described in more detail. The second hold digesting means 4531 is provided with a second hold control means 4531a and a second digestion control means 4531b. If a winning to the second start port 2102 is detected by the second start port sensor 2127 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the second start memory number has reached the upper limit value “4”. If not, the value of the second start memory number is increased by “1”, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are extracted, and the extracted random numbers are used as the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. (See FIG. 198). On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the change of the new second special symbol becomes possible, the second digestion control means 4531b has the start memory number related to the second special symbol “ If not “0”, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the start memory number [1], and the value of the second start memory number is reduced by “1”, and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 196, five advantageous games that give a game state advantageous to the player on the main control board 4100 based on the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means 4506 or the second success / failure determination means 4528. State control means is provided. Here, the advantageous gaming state includes opening the opening / closing member 2106 and enabling the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 2103, and the specific profit giving means 4540 or the predetermined profit giving means 4541. The opening / closing member 2106 is controlled to be opened by an attacker solenoid 2124 of the attacker unit 2100.

  More specifically, the predetermined profit granting unit 4541 sets the opening time per opening / closing member 2106 as a first predetermined time that allows several (for example, 1 to 2) game balls to be able to barely win, By performing the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 at least once, a predetermined profit is given to the player. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls can be won in the big winning opening 2103, but since the number that can be won is very small, the profit received by the player is relatively small. On the other hand, the specific profit granting means 4540 sets the opening time per opening / closing member 2106 as a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of (for example, 10) game balls to win with a certain amount of time. A specific benefit to a person. As a result, a large number of game balls can be awarded to the big prize opening 2103, and the player can obtain a large profit.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 and a second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 as means for giving a specific profit by the specific profit giving means 4540, and a predetermined profit giving means 4541. As a means for giving a predetermined profit, a third advantageous gaming state control means 4544, a fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545, and a fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546 are provided.

  The first advantageous gaming state generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 is a so-called “probability change big hit”, and the lottery result of the first winning / failing determining means 4506 or the second winning / non-winning determining means 4528 is the first result. appear. At this time, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 4540, and the probability that the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time by the high probability state setting means 4547. That is, a probability variation state with a high probability is assumed. In this example, in the jackpot determination table at the high probability, 60 jackpot determination values that are determined to generate a jackpot gaming state among 499 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 498 are set. The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, is 60/499. On the other hand, in the normal big hit determination table, six big hit determination values are set out of 499 big hit determination random numbers from 0 to 498, and the big hit probability is 6/499.

  In the first advantageous game state, the first special symbol display unit 1548 or the second special symbol display unit 1186 causes the first special symbol display unit 1548 or the second special symbol display unit 1186 to change the change time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. By shortening and increasing the frequency at which the movable piece 2105 of the second starting port 2102 is opened and closed until the next big hit (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery), the winning of the second starting port 2102 is achieved. Increases ease over normal times. In other words, the short-time gaming state is set.

  The second advantageous gaming state generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 is a so-called “ordinary big hit” and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / failing determining means 4506 or the second winning / failing determining means 4528 is the second result. To do. In this win, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 4540 in the same way as in the first advantageous gaming state, but in this case, the probability that the specific profit will be given in the subsequent lottery. Remains a low probability. That is, the probability variation state is not established, and the normal probability is maintained. Even in the second advantageous gaming state, after a specific profit is granted, the first temporary symbol or the second special symbol is changed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) until the first temporary symbol is changed. By the state setting means 4548, a short-time gaming state is entered, the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is shortened, and the frequency at which the movable piece 2105 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery) is increased. This suppresses the decrease in game balls.

  The third advantageous gaming state generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 4544 is a so-called “special hit”, and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506 is the third result. In this win, first, a predetermined profit lower than a specific profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 4541. For the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is increased. That is, the probability variation state is set as in the first advantageous gaming state. However, the short-time gaming state is generated only when the gaming state before the advantageous gaming state is generated satisfies a predetermined condition. That is, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the state is not the probability variation state and is not the short-time gaming state, the short-time gaming state is not generated and the probability variation state is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short-time gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state occurs, the second short-time state setting means 4549 is operated to generate the short-time gaming state. Yes.

  The fourth advantageous gaming state generated by the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545 occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506 is the fourth result. At this time, as in the third advantageous gaming state, a predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 4541. However, for the subsequent lottery, a new probability fluctuation state is not generated. Whether or not the short-time gaming state is added is determined based on the gaming state.

  The fifth advantageous gaming state generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control unit 4546 occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining unit 4506 is the fifth result. At this time, giving a predetermined profit to the player by the predetermined profit granting means 4541 and giving a predetermined profit by the high probability state setting means 4547 are the same as in the third advantageous gaming state. For the lottery, the second short time state setting means 4549 is operated to generate a short time game state.

  In this example, the winning ratios in the respective big wins are distributed differently in the case of the first winning / failing determining means 4506 and the second winning / failing determining means 4528. Specifically, in the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542, that is, the probability fluctuation state in which both the probability fluctuation state and the fixed number of short-time gaming states are given. The big hit is set to 22% of the total big hit, and the second big hit generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543, that is, the normal big hit that is given a short time gaming state for a certain number of times without being given a probability variation state. It is set to 45%.

  In addition, the third big hit generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 4544, that is, the probability variation state and the special hit to which the short-time gaming state is given under conditions is set to 11%, and the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545 is set. The fifth big hit generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546 is set to 11%, which is a special hit where the conditional short-time gaming state is given without being given a probability variation state. That is, the special hit to which the probability variation state and the short time gaming state are given is set to 11%.

  On the other hand, in the lottery result of the second win / fail determination means 4528, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 is set to 44% of the entire big hit, and the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 generates the first big hit. The two big hits are set to 56%. In the second winning / decision determining means 4528, the third big hit, the fourth big hit, and the fifth big hit are set so as not to occur. For this reason, it is possible to reliably prevent the probability fluctuation state from being terminated without giving a specific profit, and to suppress a significant decrease in gaming motivation due to sudden demotion.

  In addition, the ratio of the first big hit or the fifth big hit that gives a specific profit to the first big hit or the second big hit is higher in the second winning / decision determining means 4528, and is therefore mainly performed during normal times. In the jackpot lottery by the first hit / fail determining means 4506, it is possible to limit the occurrence of jackpots to which a specific profit is given to some extent while opening the opening / closing member 2106 in the attacker unit 2100 relatively frequently. On the other hand, in the jackpot lottery by the second winning / decision determining means 4528 that is substantially effective in the short-time gaming state, there is a high possibility that a specific profit will be given. However, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 197, the main control board 4100 has, as a configuration related to the normal lottery (lottery for increasing the ease of winning the second start port 2102), a normal hit determination random number extraction means 4551, A normal hit determination table 4552 and a normal hit determination unit 4553 are provided. The normal hit determination random number extraction unit 4551 extracts a normal hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generation unit) when the gate sensor 2402 detects the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2401. The normal hit determination table 4552 is divided into a high probability table and a normal probability table. In the high probability normal hit determination table, 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250 are stored. Of these, 250 determination values for normal hit are set, and the probability of normal hit is 250/251.

  On the other hand, in the normal normal hit determination table, one of the determination values for normal hit is set out of 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250, and the probability of normal hit is 1/251. ing. In the normal lottery at the high probability, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.56 seconds, the opening time of the movable piece 2105 by the start port solenoid 2121 is 1180 ms, the number of times of opening is 3, and the interval between opening is It is set to 512 ms. On the other hand, in the normal lottery at the normal time, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.6 seconds on average, the opening time of the movable piece 2105 is set to 180 ms, and the number of times of opening is set once.

  When the normal hit determination random number extraction unit 4551 extracts the normal hit determination random number, the normal hit determination unit 4553 extracts the extracted random number and the normal hit determination value stored in the normal hit determination table 4552. Are determined to be normal hits if they match. At this time, the gaming state determination means 4554 determines whether or not the gaming state is a specific gaming state, that is, a short-time gaming state, and if it is a short-time gaming state, a table with a high probability is selected and the short-time gaming is selected. If not, the normal table is selected. For this reason, even in the case of the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542, when the short-time gaming state ends for a certain number of times, the table at the high probability is switched from the table at the normal time. ing.

  When the normal lottery determination unit 4553 determines whether or not the normal lottery is determined on the main control board 4100, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 in a variable manner, and the change time (about 14 seconds or about 1 second). After the elapse of time, a normal symbol fluctuation control means 4555 for displaying the result of the success / failure is provided. Further, when the normal hit determination unit 4553 determines that the normal hit is determined, after the normal symbol fluctuation stops, the movable piece 2105 is opened, and the opening control unit 4556 that makes it easy to win the game ball in the second starting port 2102. Is provided.

[4-1A. Game contents by main board]
Next, game contents by the main board 4000 including the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is moved to the game panel 1150 when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game area 1100 is placed in front of the game area 1100, and a game with a game ball is started. A game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength.

  The game ball driving strength is determined by detecting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 with the rotation position detection sensor 512 and then using the shot control unit 4120 with the shot control unit 4120 based on the detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512. The driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled so that it can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 flows down the left side from the approximate center in the left-right direction and reaches the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2503 You are directed to the area on the left side of the object 2500. When a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the gate portion 2401 disposed on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402, it is used for a normal hit determination as a normal lottery result. A random number is extracted. Based on the normal hit determination random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol indicator 1189 consisting of one LED emits light in red, green and orange alternately. ), And a normal symbol based on a random number for normal hit determination (normal lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol indicator 1189 is displayed in red or green) Light emission). The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the normal hit determination table 4552 (ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table).

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol indicating loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second start port 2102 expands for a predetermined opening time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds). The game ball can be awarded to the second start port 2102 by repeating a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times).

  Note that the variation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start port 2102 are changed according to the first hit determination random number or the second hit determination random number (special lottery result). As a result of special lottery, when “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted, it is normal to change the fluctuation time and expansion time to a short time. The hit determination table 4552 can be replaced from a normal table to a high probability table.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, an area where a game ball can flow is provided on the upper side of the center accessory 2500 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 2500 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate portion 2401 or the warp inlet 2504. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Therefore, the player plays the game by adjusting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 as appropriate so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2500 to the left side. It is possible to suppress the game operation that is strongly driven and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by enjoying the game by the operation of the original handle device 500 of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 while the normal symbol is variably displayed, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is determined, the normal hit determination random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2402 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of random numbers for determining normal hits (also referred to as the number of holds) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories by the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are stored and the number of pending is displayed. It is like that. In addition, when the number of holdings exceeds four, the random numbers for normal hit determination extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2402 are discarded.

  In addition, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 and have flowed down the left side of the center role 2500 are moved toward the center of the game area 1100 below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2302 of the side guide member 2300. It has become. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3232, the main control board 4100 A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command, so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are received. The payout is made to the upper plate 301.

  If a game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the big winning opening 2103, the game area 1100 It is provided at the center lower end in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 2104, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, or the big winning port 2103, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 1100. The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side.

  On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2504 that opens on the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied to the upper first stage 2511 of the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500. It has become so. Then, the game ball supplied onto the first stage 2511 rolls in the left-right direction on the first stage 2511 and rolls forward from one of the valleys formed low on both sides of the center in the left-right direction. To the second stage 2512. Even in the second stage 2512, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction, rolls forward from one of the valleys formed low on both sides of the center in the left-right direction, and is supplied to the third stage 2513. The game ball supplied to the third stage 2513 rolls also in the left-right direction on the third stage 2513, and from above the attacking unit 2100 (substantially the first start port 2101) from the lowered portion at the substantially horizontal center. It is released into the gaming area 1100 immediately above.

  By the way, when the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 of the stage 2510 enters the chance entrance 2514 opened to the rear side of the raised portion at the center in the left-right direction, it becomes lower than the lowered portion of the third stage 2513. Further, on the lower side, the chance outlet 2515 disposed immediately above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 is discharged into the game area 1100, and the game ball is received into the first start port 2101 with a high probability. Yes. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3231, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102, and the big prize opening 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2510 are The first start port 2101 and the like are received with high probability, and when the second start port 2102 and the big prize opening 2103 are acceptable, the game ball is received when it is released from the stage 2510 or the chance exit 2515. Since there is a high possibility, not only the first start port 2101 but also the second start port 2102 and the prize winning port 2103 can be expected to have an interest in accepting game balls and can be enhanced. Yes.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate part 2401 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402 and “normal hit” is selected as the normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of movable pieces that close the second starting port 2102 is closed. When the game ball is received by the second starting port 2102 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2127 when the 2105 is expanded for a predetermined time and can be won, the main control board 4100 and the like are Thus, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3231 and the second start port sensor 2127, the first start A predetermined first hit determination random number is extracted at the port 2101, and a predetermined second hit determination random number is extracted at the second start port 2102. Then, based on the extracted hit determination random number, after the special symbol variation display displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started, The special symbol corresponding to the extracted winning determination random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2103 during that time, so that more game balls can be obtained. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol change display due to the game ball entering the gate portion 2401. In 1186, when the special symbol is variably displayed, or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is won to the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the first start port sensor 3231 is displayed. When detected by the second starting port sensor 2127, the first symbol extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3231 and the second starting port sensor 2127 until the special symbol change display is possible. The random number for hit judgment and the random number for judgment of second hit are stored and the display is suspended, and the stored number of random numbers for hit judgment is stored in the first special symbol. So as to display in 憶 display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of holdings exceeds four, the extracted random numbers for hit determination are discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, a first hit determination random number or a second hit determination random number, which is a big hit determination random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3231 and the second start port sensor 2127, respectively. By comparing with predetermined predetermined hit determination tables 4501 and 4521 (also referred to as special symbol variation pattern tables), it is determined which of “lost”, “small hit”, and “big hit”. It is like that. Also, by comparing the hit determination tables 4502 and 4522 and the random numbers for the big hit symbol, the type of big hit (for example, “special hit”, “non-special hit probability variation big hit”, “normal big hit”, etc.) is also determined. It has become so.

  Then, the first winning determination random number and the second winning determination random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the starting winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 (the special lottery result) In the case of “small hit”, the main control board 4100 has an opening / closing pattern that closes the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). Repeated several times.

  On the other hand, when the extracted first hit determination random number or second hit determination random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 opens the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 for a predetermined time (for example, , Approximately 30 seconds), or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2103 when any of the winning conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern that closes the opening / closing member 2106 (one opening / closing) The pattern is referred to as one round), and is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The player repeats 10 rounds for “10R big hit” and 15 rounds for “15R big hit”. An advantageous advantageous gaming state is generated. For the “big hit” after the predetermined number of rounds, the hit determination table is changed to a high probability table according to the extracted hit determination random number. Further, the variable time setting tables 4503, 4504, 4523, and 4524 are appropriately changed in order to change to the time-saving gaming state or cancel the time-saving gaming state in accordance with the hit determination random number.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of big hits (the number of times the opening and closing member 2106 is opened and closed) is set to either 10 or 15. In this case, for example, the following aspects can be applied. That is, when the big hit is a special hit, a part of the normal big hit, or a part of the probability variation big hit excluding the special hit, the number of rounds is 10 times, and the big hit is 10 rounds. The number of rounds may be set to 15 when the number of rounds is a normal big hit other than the number of rounds, or when the number of rounds is a probable big hit other than the probability variable big hit with 10 rounds. Further, when the big hit is a special hit or the normal big hit, the number of rounds may be 10 times, and when the big hit is a probable big hit excluding the special hit, the number of rounds may be 15 times.

[4-2. Functional configuration for games on peripheral control board]
Next, a functional configuration relating to a game including a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a common decorative symbol sequence on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to effects on the peripheral control board (mainly the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150).

  When the control information command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received by the command receiving means 4560, the peripheral control board 4010 of this example controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on this control information command, as shown in FIG. Various functions are provided. That is, as the effect table corresponding to the first big hit lottery, the first hit effect mode table 4561 and the first lose time effect mode table 4562 are stored in advance, and based on these tables 4561, 4562, The production mode in the step production and the development production is determined.

  First, the production mode tables 4561 and 4562 will be described in detail. The first hit time effect mode table 4561 is used in the case of a big hit (or small hit), and shows the relationship between the random number for determining the effect (described later) and the effect mode (in this case, the effect pattern in the step effect and the development effect). It is shown. In addition, the first losing presentation mode table 4562 is a table used in the case of losing, and indicates the relationship between the presentation determining random number and the presentation pattern.

  This peripheral control board 4010 is provided with first effect random number extraction means 4563 for extracting effect determination random numbers from a random counter (not shown), and first effect mode determination means 4564 for determining effect patterns. . When receiving the control command via the command receiving means 4560, the first effect mode determining means 4564 extracts the effect random number by the first effect random number extracting means 4563 and the success / failure command included in the control command is a big hit (or In the case of indicating a small hit), an effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 4563 and the effect effect mode table 4561 at the time of first hit, while the success / failure command is determined. In the case of indicating a loss, the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 4563 and the effect mode table 4562 at the time of the first loss.

  The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determining means 4564 is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 4565. The first effect display control means 4565 reads out the images of those effects from the image storage means (character ROM 4150d) and derives them to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  On the other hand, a first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 is provided as a functional configuration relating to the production of the first decorative symbol. Based on the control command received by the command receiving unit 4560, the first decorative symbol variation control unit 4566 reads and varies the stop symbol from the first decorative symbol storage unit (not shown), and the variation included in the control command. The decorative design is stopped based on the time, the success / failure command, etc. (that is, the lottery result).

  In the above description, the effects related to the first big hit lottery have been described, but the peripheral control board 4010 is also provided with a functional configuration for performing effects related to the second big hit lottery. Specifically, a second winning effect mode table 4567 and a second losing effect mode table 4568 are stored in advance as performance tables corresponding to the second big hit lottery. Based on this, the production mode in the step production and the development production is determined. Since the production mode tables 4567 and 4568 have the same configuration as the production mode tables 4561 and 4562 corresponding to the first big hit lottery, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 4010, corresponding to the second big hit lottery, the second effect random number extraction means 4569, the second effect mode determination means 4570, the second effect display control means 4571, and the second decorative symbol variation control. Although means 4572 is provided, these configurations also have the same function as the functional configuration corresponding to the first big hit lottery, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 4010 is provided with decorative symbol sequence fluctuation display means 4573 and big hit display means 4574. The decorative symbol sequence fluctuation display means 4573 is based on the outputs of the first decorative symbol fluctuation control means 4566 and the second decorative symbol fluctuation control means 4572, or based on the control command received by the command receiving means 4560. While changing the symbol sequence, the common decorative symbol sequence is sequentially stopped based on the variation time and the success / failure command included in the control command (that is, the lottery result). In particular, a combination of decorative symbols (stopped symbols) that are already stopped on the active line at the stage before the last stopped symbol sequence that is stopped last among a plurality of common decorative symbol sequences is a specific decorative symbol. When the above combination is satisfied, the reach state is established by using the already stopped decorative symbol as the reach formation symbol.

  The jackpot display means 4574 is related to the lottery when the lottery result of the first jackpot lottery or the second jackpot lottery is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, that is, when the “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”. After stopping the variation of the common decorative design row, it is displayed that “big hit”. In addition, when the lottery result of the first big hit lottery or the second big hit lottery is the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the fifth big hit, it is not displayed as “winning”, and the common decorative design column After the change is stopped, the effect related to the lottery is finished.

[4-2A. Game production using operation unit with peripheral control board]
Next, game effects using the operation unit 400 by the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 216. FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 200 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the two rotation detection sensors as the dial operation unit rotates counterclockwise in the rotation operation unit. 201A is a list showing ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit, and FIG. 201B is a counterclockwise direction of the dial operation unit. It is a table | surface figure which shows ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors accompanying rotation of.

  202 (A) to 202 (F) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a display screen of a liquid crystal display device (production means, symbol display means) when the operation unit functions as an operation means. FIG. ) To (E) are explanatory views showing an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device when the operation unit functions as an operation means, and FIGS. 204 (A) to 204 (F) show a selection operation by the dial operation unit. FIG. 205 is an explanatory diagram showing a display screen of a liquid crystal display device when determining whether to perform substitution, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing a selection operation detection process by the effect control process, and FIG. 206 is a selection in the effect control process. FIG. 207 is a flowchart illustrating a modification example 2 of the selection operation detection process in the effect control process, and FIGS. 208A to 208D are diagrams illustrating a modification example of the operation detection process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation unit which functions as a means, and the display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to this, FIG. 209 (A)-(C) is the operation unit which functions as a movable effect means, and this FIG. 210 (A)-(C) is an explanatory view showing an example of a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the above, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example.

  Further, FIGS. 211 (A) to 211 (D) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an operation unit functioning as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to this, and FIG. 212 is a rotation in effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a notice control process. 213 (A) to 213 (D) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an operation unit that functions as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit. FIGS. 214 (A) to 214 (D) are diagrams. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation unit which functions as a movable production | presentation means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. FIGS. 215A to 215C are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an operation unit that functions as an operation explanation unit and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit. 216 (A) to 216 (C) are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an operation unit that functions as an operation explanation unit and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit.

  First, detection of the rotation direction and rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 will be described. The rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. In FIGS. 199 to 201, the rotation detection sensor 432a is described as “A” and the rotation detection sensor 432b is described as “B”. Steps 1 to 4 shown below are four types of rotational positions of the dial operation unit 401 with reference to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, respectively. The rotational position sequentially shifts to step 2, step 3, and step 4, and after shifting to step 4, the process returns to step 1 again.

  First, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction, as shown in FIG. 199, as shown in FIG. 199, both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 and then the dial. As the operation unit 401 moves to step 2 in the clockwise direction, the rotation detection sensor 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432b to detect the rotation. The process proceeds to a step in which 432b does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. Thereafter, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b rotate. The process proceeds to a step where 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432a and the rotation detection sensor 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The process proceeds to a step where the rotation detection sensor 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 200, as shown in FIG. 200, both the rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b detect the rotation detection piece 410 c of the driven gear 410, and then Due to the shift to step 2 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432a and the rotation detection sensor 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The detection sensor 432b proceeds to a step of detecting the rotation detection piece 410c. Thereafter, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 is moved to each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect rotation. The process proceeds to a step where the piece 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the rotation detection sensor 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432b. Then, the process proceeds to a step where the rotation detection sensor 432b does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c.

  That is, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned on (with detection of the rotation detection piece 410c) / OFF (without detection of the rotation detection piece 410c). As shown in FIG. 4, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are both “ON” in Step 1, and the rotation detection sensor 432a continues to be “ON” in Step 2, while the rotation detection sensor 432b is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are “OFF” in Step 3, the rotation detection sensor 432a continues to be “OFF” in Step 4, while the rotation detection sensor 432b is “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to step 1 again, and both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned on / off in step 1 as shown in FIG. In step 2, the rotation detection sensor 432b continues to be “ON”, while the rotation detection sensor 432a is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are “OFF” in Step 3, the rotation detection sensor 432b continues to be “OFF” in Step 4, while the rotation detection sensor 432a is “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to step 1 again, and both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  As described above, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 based on ON / OFF in each of the steps 1 to 4 described above. When the dial operation unit 401 constituting the unit 400 functions as an operation means, in other words, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by a player's operation, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned on / off. It is detected that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise from the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b before the rotation operation and the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b during the rotation operation. It is detected whether it has been rotated or operated counterclockwise. In this example, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401. However, by counting the pulses of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, the dial operation unit 401 The rotational position can also be detected.

  For example, if step 1, that is, the state where both the rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b are “ON” is the state before the rotation operation, the rotation detection sensor 432 a is regarded as the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b during the rotation operation. On the other hand, if the rotation detection sensor 432b is “OFF”, it coincides with step 2 in the clockwise direction, so that the dial operation unit 401 is detected to be rotated in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, if the rotation detection sensor 432a is “OFF” while the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are in the ON / OFF state during the rotation operation, the rotation detection sensor 432b is “ON”, which is consistent with Step 2 in the counterclockwise direction. Therefore, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise. The clockwise or counterclockwise operation signal of the dial operation unit 401 detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b is output to the peripheral control unit 4140. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 (effect control means, operation effect control means, selection effect control means, display control means) receives the player's intention to operate based on the input operation signal, and this is received by the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is to be reflected in the production of.

  In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 functions as a movable effect unit that rotates based on the drive of the dial drive motor 414, the drive of the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted as the rotation operation of the driven gear 410 via the drive gear 412. The dial operation unit 401 provided integrally by the rotation operation of the driven gear 410 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. At this time, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 based on whether or not the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 rotating together with the dial operation unit 401 is detected (ON / OFF). The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are output to the peripheral control unit 4140, and the peripheral control unit 4140 having received the detection signal detects the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401. Rotational motion is controlled.

  Next, the function as the operation means by the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the function as the movable effecting means will be described with reference to a plurality of examples. First, as an example, as shown in FIG. 202, the liquid crystal display device 1900 (production means, symbol display) is based on the jackpot determination associated with winning at the start opening (first start opening 2101, second start opening 2102). 202), the left and right decorative designs 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same design and the reach mode is displayed (as shown in FIG. As an example, when the decorative symbols are aligned at “7”), as the middle decorative symbol 4602 continues to change, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen as shown in FIG. Each of the images moves to a reduced scale and develops from normal reach fluctuation to super reach fluctuation.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 202 (C), as a variation pattern of the super reach, a middle decorative pattern 4602a (in the same figure, “6” is determined) with a different pattern from the left and right decorative patterns 4601 and 4603. The middle decorative symbol is shown side by side, and the middle decorative symbol 4602b (the middle decorative symbol "7" is shown as an example in the figure) that determines the big hit with the same symbols as the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are displayed side by side. Below that, an image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise and a character 4611 “Please turn the dial operation unit” are displayed, so that the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401). Is displayed to urge the player to perform a counterclockwise rotation operation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 202 (D), an effect display is performed in which the medium decorative symbol 4602a for determining the loss pushes the medium decorative symbol 4602b for determining the big hit. When the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 in the counterclockwise direction, this is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 (the detection signal of the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction). 202 is output to the peripheral control unit 4140), as shown in FIG. 202 (E), an effect display (operation effect) is performed in which the middle decorative symbol 4602b that determines the big hit pushes back the middle decorative symbol 4602a that determines the loss. Finally, as shown in FIG. 202 (F), among the medium decorative symbols 4602b for determining the big hit and the medium decorative symbols 4602a for determining the loss, the medium decorative symbols constituting the display result based on the big hit determination. Completely extrudes the other medium decorative design, and the display result of the decorative design is derived to the liquid crystal display device 1900. In FIG. 202 (F), based on the determination result of big hit, “7” medium decorative design 4602b completely extrudes “6” medium decorative design 4602a, and “7 / 7.7” big hit design ( The case where the specific display result is derived is illustrated.

  As a second example, in the decorative design that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning at the start opening (first start opening 2101, second start opening 2102), FIG. As shown in FIG. 203, the left and right decorative designs 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same design and the reach mode is displayed. , 4603 move to the upper left and right sides of the display screen and are reduced and displayed to develop from the normal reach variation to the super reach variation, an image for selecting the super reach variation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As shown in FIG. 203C, the selection image of the variation mode includes an option image 4621 of the variation mode A (the letter “A” is illustrated in the figure) and an option image 4622 of the variation mode B (the same figure). In the lower part, the dial operation unit 401 rotates alternately in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, and the selection determining operation unit 400 is displayed below. By displaying an image 4606 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed and a character 4612 of “Please select with the dial operation unit”, the change mode can be selected by rotating the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401). Is displayed to prompt the player.

  Then, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 clockwise to select the variation mode A (at this time, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed by the player for selection determination). This is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 (outputting a detection signal in the clockwise direction of the dial operation unit 401 to the peripheral control unit 4140), as shown in FIG. While the option image 4621 of the variation mode A is displayed in a blinking manner, the option image 4622 of the variation mode B is displayed in the off state, and below that, an image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction and “Decide !!” When the character 4613 is displayed, a display informing the player that the variation mode A has been selected by the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is displayed. Divide. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 203 (E), the effect image 4625 of the super reach variation is displayed in the variation mode A selected by the player (denoted as “A” in FIG. 203 for convenience). (Operation production).

  That is, the function of the operation unit 400 as the operation means by the operation unit 400 is that the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and reflects the rotation operation in the effect contents. It is to suppress the decline of interest.

  By the way, when the operation unit 400 functions as a selection operation means that can be selected from the alternative as in the second example described above, the player performs the selection operation by the operation unit 400 on the pachinko machine 1 side (specifically, The control of the peripheral control unit 4140) can determine in advance whether or not to substitute automatically. The determination as to whether or not to perform the selection operation is performed using a display image for operation substitution determination of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. It should be noted that the display image for determining the operation substitution is the operation unit 400 in a state where the winning detection at the start port (the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102) has not been detected for a predetermined time or more, such as during the demonstration display of the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In the operation substitution determination display image shown in FIG. 204A, there are an option image 4623 with characters “do not perform selection operation” and an option image 4624 with characters “execute selection operation”. Below the image 4606, the dial operation unit 401 is alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise and the pressing operation unit 405 for determining the selection is pressed. "Please do" is displayed, and a display prompting the player to decide whether or not to perform the selection operation by rotating the dial operation unit 401 is performed.

  Then, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 in the counterclockwise direction in order to perform the selection operation (in this case, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed by the player for selection determination). 204 (B) by detecting the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 (outputting a counterclockwise detection signal of the dial operation unit 401 to the peripheral control unit 4140). As shown in FIG. 5, the option image 4624 of “substituting the selection operation” is displayed blinking, while the option image 4623 of “do not perform the selection operation” is turned off, and the dial operation unit 401 is shown below. By displaying an image 4607 rotating in the clockwise direction and a character 4613 of “OK!”, The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated. Display for notifying the player is made to the effect that decision to delegate the selection operation I have been made.

  After that, it is determined that the selection operation is performed on the display image for operation substitution determination, and when the selection effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. Selection is automatically delegated based on the control. Specifically, in the selection effect image shown in FIG. 204 (C), an option image 4625 of character A and an option image 4626 of character B are displayed side by side, and below that, the dial operation unit 401 is clockwise. By displaying an image 4606 that rotates alternately in the counterclockwise direction and the selection operation pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, and a character 4612 of “Please select with the dial operation unit”, a dial operation unit is displayed. A display prompting the player to select a character is performed by the rotation operation 401. At this time, the character B, which is the option image 4626, is displayed as a stronger character than the character A, which is the option image 4625. (For example, it is easy to win big hits, etc.).

  When the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated in the default direction as shown in FIG. 204D by the control of the peripheral control unit 4140 (the counterclockwise direction is the default in the figure). Direction) and the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise), the option image 4626 of the character B is displayed in a blinking manner, while the option image 4625 of the character A is turned off, and below that By displaying the image 4607 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise and the character 4613 of “OK!”, The player is notified that the character B has been selected by the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. Is displayed.

  Note that in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 204D, the default direction is set to the counterclockwise direction, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the default direction may be set to the clockwise direction. In this case, when the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401) is rotated clockwise by the control of the peripheral control unit 4140, the option image 4625 of the character A blinks as shown in FIG. 204 (E). On the other hand, the option image 4626 of the character B is turned off, and an image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the clockwise direction and a character 4613 of “OK!” Are displayed below the dial B. A display for notifying the player that the character A has been selected by the rotation of the operation unit 401 is performed.

  Further, the default direction is not limited to either the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction, and a direction corresponding to the type of option displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be set as the default direction. Specifically, a direction that can provide a game content advantageous to the player may be set as the default direction. For example, when the selection image 4625 of the character A is displayed on the left side and the selection image 4626 of the character B is displayed on the right side as in FIG. 204C, the selection effect image is the same as in FIG. 204D. Then, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise to select the option image 4626. On the other hand, when the option image 4626 of the character B is displayed on the left side and the option image 4625 of the character A is displayed on the right side as the selection effect image, the option image 4626 is selected as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise. On the other hand, a direction that can be a game content that is disadvantageous to the player may be set as the default direction.

  Here, the selection operation detection processing of the operation unit 400 by the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. This selection operation detection processing is control performed at the time of selection effect of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. In FIG. 205, first, it is determined whether or not an operation proxy flag is set (step S2001). The operation proxy flag is a flag that is set when the option image 4624 “substitute selection operation” is selected and determined in the display image for operation proxy determination in FIG. 204A. If the operation substitution flag is not set in step S2001, next, whether or not the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 has been rotated, in other words, whether the operation detection signal by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b has changed. It is determined whether or not (step S2002). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, a selection flag for the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2003), and the selection operation detection process is terminated.

  That is, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated and the operation detection signal is changed, the selection flag in the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotated is set. The selection flag is a display indicating that the player has selected and decided one of the alternative choices in the selection effect of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, the display shown in FIG. 203D) or the choice selected and decided. This is a flag for display control of the effect display based on the effect display (for example, the effect display in FIG. 203E).

  On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 and there is no change in the operation detection signal in step S2002, it is determined whether or not a predetermined effective detection time of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed (step S200). S2004). If the operation detection signal is not ON even though the detection valid time has elapsed, a default rotation direction selection flag that is a predetermined selection method is set (step S2005), and dialing is performed in the default direction. The operation unit 401 is rotated (step S2006: selection proxy operation control means), and the selection operation detection process ends. Here, the default rotation direction (default direction) is a rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 set in advance by the peripheral control unit 4140 described above, which is advantageous to the clockwise direction, the counterclockwise direction, and the player. It is a direction that can be a game content, or a direction that can be a game content that is disadvantageous to the player.

  When the operation proxy flag is set in step S2001, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction (step S2007: selection proxy operation control means). Thereafter, a change in the operation detection signal is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, a selection flag for the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2008), and the selection operation detection process ends. At this time, as a process in step S2008, the player does not rotate the default direction selection flag rotated in step S2007 as it is, but immediately rotates the dial operation unit 401 in the anti-default direction immediately after the rotation in the default direction. Then, the selection flag in the anti-default direction is set. That is, when the proxy operation for the selection effect is determined, and when the dial operation unit 401 is not operated in spite of the fact that the proxy operation for the selection effect is not determined, Then, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction. When the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, if there is no player operation, the default direction selection flag is set as it is. On the other hand, when the player operates the anti-default direction when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, the driving of the dial drive motor 414 that rotates the dial operation unit 401 is stopped and the player The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prioritized, and the selection flag for the anti-default direction is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in the counter-default direction. Specifically, the player operates the dial operation unit 401 in the operation direction (default If the player does not like the direction of rotation), the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or stop the rotation when the dial operation unit 401 moves unexpectedly (unexpectedly for the player). The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated while leaving such a room. That is, in the process when the process proceeds from step S2007 to step S2008 described above, when the player's finger touch operation (manual operation) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by the operation detection unit during the operation of the dial operation unit 401, Operation priority control means for stopping the driving of the electric drive source is configured to give priority to the finger touch operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player.

  By the way, the selection operation detection process of the operation unit 400 is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 205, and may be the configurations of the first and second modifications described below. As shown in FIG. 206, in the selection operation detection process of the first modification, first, it is determined whether or not an operation proxy flag is set (step S2011). When the operation proxy flag is not set in step S2011, whether or not the operation detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are changed due to the dial operation unit 401 being rotated as in the selection operation detection process of FIG. Is determined (step S2012). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, a selection flag for the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2013), and “1” is added to the operation detection counter that counts that the operation detection signal has changed. In step S2014, the selection operation detection process is terminated. That is, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated and the operation detection signal is changed, the selection flag in the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotated is set. Further, it is stored that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated.

  On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and there is no change in the operation detection signal in step S2012, it is determined whether or not a predetermined detection effective time of the dial operation unit 401 has passed (step S2015). If the operation detection signal does not change even though the detection effective time has elapsed, the value of the operation detection counter counted in step S2014 in the past 10 selection effects is “5” or more. Whether or not (step S2016: motion ratio determination means). When the value of the operation detection counter is “5” or more in step S2016, in other words, when the player has operated the dial operation unit 401 five times or more in the past ten selection effects, the dial operation unit is relatively frequently used. It is determined that the player is a player who rotates 401, and the process proceeds to step S2017 to extend the effective detection time of the dial operation unit 401.

  Note that the processing in step S2016 is performed based on the storage in the operation storage area provided in the peripheral control RAM 4140e of the peripheral control unit 4140, and the operation unit 400 in the last 10 selection effects in the operation storage area. The determination processing is performed by storing the presence / absence of the operation of the dial operation unit 401 in FIG. That is, every time a selection effect is performed, the oldest data among the past 10 stored data is deleted, and whether or not the player operates the dial operation unit 401 in the selection effect is stored as the newest data. It has become. For this reason, even when a player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 1 is switched, the player gradually adjusts to the player each time the selection effect is executed (whether the player frequently rotates the dial operation unit 401). The process of step S2016 can be performed based on a judgment criterion (according to whether or not).

  In step S2017, it is determined again whether or not the dial operation unit 401 is rotated and the operation detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are changed. When there is a change in the operation detection signal in step S2017, a rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2013), as in the transition from step S2012, and the operation detection signal is changed. “1” is added to the operation detection counter to be counted (step S2014), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation detection signal does not change in step S2017, it is determined whether or not the detection valid time (extended effective time) of the extended dial operation unit 401 has elapsed (step S2017). Step S2018: Validity period extension means). If there is no change in the operation detection signal even though the extended effective time has elapsed, a selection flag for a default rotation direction which is a predetermined selection method is set (step S2019), and a dial operation is performed in the default direction. The unit 401 is rotated (step S2020: selection proxy operation control means), and the selection operation detection process is terminated.

  Also, when the operation proxy flag is set in step S2011 and when the value of the operation detection counter is less than “5” in step S2016, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction (step S2021: selection proxy) Operation control means). Thereafter, a change in the operation detection signal is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, a selection flag for the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2022), and the selection operation detection process ends. At this time, as a process in step S2022, the selection flag for the default direction rotated in step S2021 is not set as it is, but the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 in the anti-default direction immediately after the rotation in the default direction. Then, the selection flag in the anti-default direction is set.

  That is, the dial operation unit 401 is not rotated in the past 10 times when the selection operation proxy at the time of the selection effect has been determined, and the selection operation proxy at the time of the selection effect has not been determined. When the number of times that the player has rotated the dial operation unit 401 in the selection effect is less than 5, the dial operation unit 401 is temporarily rotated in the default direction. When the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, if there is no player operation, the default direction selection flag is set as it is. On the other hand, when the player operates the anti-default direction when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, the driving of the dial drive motor 414 that rotates the dial operation unit 401 is stopped and the player The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prioritized, and the selection flag for the anti-default direction is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in the counter-default direction. Specifically, the player operates the dial operation unit 401 in the operation direction (default If the player does not like the direction of rotation), the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or stop the rotation when the dial operation unit 401 moves unexpectedly (unexpectedly for the player). The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated while leaving such a room. In other words, the processing at the time of shifting from step S2021 to step S2022 described above is performed when the player's finger touch operation on the dial operation unit 401 is detected by the operation detecting means during the operation of the operation unit. In order to give priority to the finger touch operation 401, an operation priority control means for stopping the driving of the electric drive source is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 207, in the selection operation detection process of the modification 2, first, it is determined whether or not an operation proxy flag is set (step S2031). When the operation surrogate flag is not set in step S2031, the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is rotated and changed to operation detection signals by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, as in the selection operation detection process of FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2032). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, a rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2033), and “1” is added to the rotation direction counter based on the operation detection signal ( Step S2034), the selection operation detection process is terminated.

  That is, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated and the operation detection signal is changed, the selection flag in the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotated is set. Furthermore, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 that has been rotated is stored. There are two types of counters for counting the rotation direction, clockwise and counterclockwise. By differentiating the counter type for each rotation direction based on the operation detection signal, the counter counterclockwise and counterclockwise. The number of rotations in the clockwise direction is individually stored.

  On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and there is no change in the operation detection signal in step S2032, it is determined whether or not a predetermined detection valid time of the dial operation unit 401 has passed (step S2035). When the operation detection signal does not change even though the detection effective time has passed, the rotation direction selection flag having a large count value is set in the past 10 selection operations, which is a predetermined selection method ( In step S2036), the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the direction in which the count value is larger (step S2037: selection proxy operation control means), and the selection operation detection process is terminated.

  Here, the rotation direction having a large count value in the past ten selection operations is counted in the previous ten selection operations from the present time in each of the clockwise and counterclockwise counters counted in step S2034. It is the direction of rotation of the counter that takes a large value after comparing each count value. Then, by making such a comparison, it is determined in which direction the player is more likely to rotate the dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in that direction. That is, every time a selection effect is performed, the oldest data of the past 10 count data is deleted, and the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by the player in the selection effect is stored as the newest count data. It has become. For this reason, even when the player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the player gradually adjusts to the player every time the selection effect is executed (the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 in any direction). The process of step S2036 can be performed based on a judgment criterion (according to whether the tendency is high).

  When the operation proxy flag is set in step S2031, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the direction in which the count value is large as in step S2037 (step S2038: selection proxy operation control means). Thereafter, a change in the operation detection signal is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, thereby setting a rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal (step S2039), and then rotation based on the operation detection signal. “1” is added to the direction counter (step S2040), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. At this time, the processing of step S2039 does not set the selection flag in the direction of large count value rotated in step S2038 as it is, but the player dials in the opposite direction immediately after the rotation in the direction of large count value. When the unit 401 is rotated, a selection flag in the opposite direction is set.

  In other words, according to the configuration of the modification example 2, the dial operation unit 401 is used when the selection operation proxy at the time of the selection effect is determined and when the selection operation proxy at the selection effect is not determined. If no rotation operation has been performed, the dial operation unit 401 is compared and determined in which direction in the previous ten selection operations from the current time, and the dial is dialed in the rotation direction (default direction) with a large number of rotation operations. The operation unit 401 is rotated. When the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, if there is no player operation, the default direction selection flag is set as it is. On the other hand, when the player operates the anti-default direction when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, the driving of the dial drive motor 414 that rotates the dial operation unit 401 is stopped and the player The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prioritized, and the selection flag for the anti-default direction is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in the counter-default direction. Specifically, the player operates the dial operation unit 401 in the operation direction (default If the player does not like the direction of rotation), the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or stop the rotation when the dial operation unit 401 moves unexpectedly (unexpectedly for the player). The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated while leaving such a room. In other words, the processing at the time of shifting from step S2038 to step S2039 described above is performed when the player's finger touch operation on the dial operation unit 401 is detected by the operation detecting means during operation of the operation unit. In order to give priority to the finger touch operation 401, an operation priority control means for stopping the driving of the electric drive source is configured.

  Next, three examples in which the operation unit 400 functions as a movable effect unit will be described. As an example, FIG. 208 (A) shows a decorative pattern variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the jackpot determination associated with winning at the start opening (first start opening 2101, second start opening 2102). As shown in the figure, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach mode is displayed (in the figure, the case where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with “7” is illustrated), and the middle decorative symbol 4602 is displayed. Is displayed in the normal reach variation mode. At this time, each operation unit 400 is in a stopped state. That is, the full-color LED 432d for decorating the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the full-color LED 430b for decorating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 are respectively in the off state, and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is turned off. The dial drive motor 414 that rotates is in a drive stopped state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the middle decorative symbol 4602 for determining the loss is temporarily stopped (in the figure, the case where the middle decorative symbol 4602 “6” is temporarily stopped) is displayed. The Also at this time, the operation units 400 are in a stopped state. Then, as shown in FIG. 208 (C), the operation unit 400 is driven while the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops the lost symbol. Specifically, when the full color LEDs 432d and 430b are turned on / flashed, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light, and at the same time, the operation is performed by rotating the dial drive motor 414. The dial operation unit 401 of the unit 400 rotates.

  Thereafter, with the effect drive of the operation unit 400 being continued, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 as shown in FIG. 208 (D). Are moved and reduced, and the variation of the medium decoration symbol 4602 is resumed, which develops into a super reach variation. That is, the operation unit 400 performs an effect that is an opportunity to develop from the normal reach variation of the decorative design to the super reach variation in the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the effect drive.

  As a second example, in the decorative design variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning at the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102), FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach mode is displayed. For example, the loss symbol “7, 6. 7” is temporarily stopped. At this time, each operation unit 400 is in a stopped state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 209 (B), the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is driven to produce the operation unit 400 in a state in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the full color LEDs 432d and 430b are turned on / flashed, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light, and at the same time, the operation is performed by rotating the dial drive motor 414. The dial operation unit 401 of the unit 400 rotates.

  Then, in the state where the operation drive of the operation unit 400 as described above is continued, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the process of determining the big hit from the medium decorative design 4602 for determining the loss as shown in FIG. 209 (C). The display is switched to the decorative symbol 4602, and the jackpot symbol is derived to the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a final display result (the case where the jackpot symbol of “7, 7, 7” is derived is illustrated). That is, the operation unit 400 performs an effect that triggers switching from a lost symbol of the decorative symbol to a jackpot symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the effect driving.

  As a third example, FIG. 210A shows a decorative pattern variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the basis of the jackpot determination associated with winning a prize at the start opening (first start opening 2101, second start opening 2102). As shown in the figure, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach pattern is displayed. Is an example in which the non-probable big hit symbol of “6, 6, 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed). At this time, each operation unit 400 is in a stopped state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 210 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven while the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops the non-probable large hit symbol. Specifically, when the full color LEDs 432d and 430b are turned on / flashed, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light, and at the same time, the operation is performed by rotating the dial drive motor 414. The dial operation unit 401 of the unit 400 rotates.

  Then, in the state where the operation driving of the operation unit 400 as described above is continued, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched from the non-probable large hit symbol to the probable large hit symbol as shown in FIG. As a display result, a probability variation jackpot symbol (special display result) is derived to the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the case where a probability variation jackpot symbol of “7, 7, 7” is derived is illustrated in the same shell). In other words, the operation unit 400 performs an effect that triggers switching from a non-probable large hit symbol to a probable large hit symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the effect driving.

  In addition, as described in the actual example, when the selection operation is performed on behalf of the player, it is sufficient to rotate the operation unit to the minimum necessary to be detected by the operation detection means. It is desirable for the part to continue to rotate so that the player can recognize that it is clearly rotating.

  Further, the electric drive source for operating the dial operation unit 401 is not limited to the dial drive motor 414 formed of the stepping motor described in the embodiment, but an electric drive source for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 In this case, it is desirable to use a stepping motor as an electrical drive source for the following reason.

  For example, it is expected that the dial operation unit 401 is frequently stopped by the touch of the player in the rotational drive state. However, if the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, it is rotated with weak excitation. If you do this, you can easily step out, and you can ensure safety. In addition, if the excitation for rotation is continued even after the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, the touch is transmitted to the player's finger, and a fresh surprise is obtained for the player. Further, conversely, if the stepping motor is applied with weak excitation enough to maintain the dial operation unit 401 in a stopped state, a click feeling can be generated when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated, and the operability is improved. .

  Further, if a motor having a large detent torque (non-excitation holding torque) is selected, even excitation is not required. Also, for example, when a DC motor is used as an electrical drive source, a large current flows because the armature voltage (counterelectromotive force) disappears when the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped in the rotational drive state. It is not preferable in terms of heat generation and durability. In contrast, stepping motors do not have such concerns. For the above reasons, it is desirable that the electric drive source is a stepping motor.

  By the way, in the function as the movable effect means of the operation unit 400 described above, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is the development of reach fluctuation, switching from the loss symbol to the big hit symbol, and from the non-probability variable big hit symbol to the probabilistic big hit symbol. As a result, it is designed to function as a notice effect. Therefore, as a notice effect of such an operation unit 400, the player may be made aware of the jackpot reliability of the reach fluctuation that develops according to the rotation operation mode of the dial operation unit 401 when the reach fluctuation develops. The configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 and 212.

  First, as shown in FIG. 211 (A), after the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed (in the same diagram, the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with "7") ), And the medium decorative symbol 4602 is displayed in the normal reach variation mode to determine the loss. Is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 211 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven while the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops the lost symbol. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light when the full color LEDs 432d and 430b are turned on and blinking, and at the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is driven by the rotation of the dial drive motor 414. Rotate. At the same time as the effect driving of the operation unit 400 is started, a character 4614 “Please stop the rotation of the dial operation unit” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player can perform the dial operation. The rotation of the unit 401 is prompted to stop.

  When the developed reach fluctuation has a low jackpot reliability, in other words, when developing from the normal reach fluctuation to the long reach fluctuation (first production mode), as shown in FIG. When the player grasps the operation unit 401 with the hand H and the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this, and the effect of the operation unit 400 is produced. Driving is stopped (first mode operation control means). Specifically, by stopping the lighting / flashing drive of each full-color LED 432d, 430b, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, and at the same time, the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped. The rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped. As a result, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not affected by the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 moving to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, and the variation of the middle decorative symbol 4602 is resumed. It develops into long reach fluctuation.

  On the other hand, when the reach variation that develops is high in reliability, in other words, when developing from the normal reach variation to the super reach variation (second production mode), as shown in FIG. When the player holds the operation unit 401 with the hand H, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if this is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400, the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is continued (second mode operation control means). Thereby, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is continuously performed. In addition, the player is forced to press and hold the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation with the hand H, so that the player receives vibration from the dial drive motor 414 that drives the dial operation unit 401. Note that such vibration of the dial drive motor 414 can be realized only by a player who touches the dial operation unit 401.

  Accordingly, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed on the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, respectively. Developed into highly reliable super reach fluctuations. That is, the operation unit 400 notifies the development from the normal reach fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the effect driving (rotation operation) and performs the rotation operation while the player holds the dial operation unit 401. Whether or not the reliability of the jackpot of the reach fluctuation that develops depending on whether or not to continue is high is predicted. Further, the advance notice from the normal reach variation of the decorative symbol is not known unless the player touches the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive a notice depending on whether or not the dial operation unit 401 is touched, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

  Here, the rotation advance notice control processing of the operation unit 400 by the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 212, the peripheral control unit 4140 first determines whether or not a rotation advance notice command has been received from the main control board 4100 side (step S2051). The rotation advance command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 side to the peripheral control unit 4140 side when executing the advance notice effect of rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in accordance with the reach variation of the decoration symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A command signal to be sent. When the rotation advance notice command is not received in step S2051, the rotation advance notice control process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the rotation advance command is received in step S2051, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls the dial drive motor 414 to rotate the dial operation unit 401 (step S2052). At this time, as a notice of rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the full color LED 430b is lit and blinked to illuminate the dial operation unit 401.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the dial operation unit 401 continues the rotation operation, in other words, whether or not the operation detection signal by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b is changed (step S2053). In step S2053, when the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 continues without the player grasping the dial operation unit 401, that is, when the operation detection signal is changed, the dial operation performed as a notice effect according to the reach change It is determined whether or not a rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the unit 401 has elapsed (step S2054). If the player does not stop the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 even after the rotation control time of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2057 as it is and the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the lighting decoration are performed. Stop the rotation advance notice control process.

  On the other hand, when the player grasps the dial operation unit 401 in step S2053 and the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, that is, when the operation detection signal is not changed, the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is performed next. It is determined whether or not the reach variation accompanied by the advance notice is a super reach variation with high hit reliability (step S2055). In step S2055, it is determined whether the variation pattern command sent from the main control board 4100 side to the peripheral control unit 4140 side is a super-reach variation command with high jackpot reliability accompanied by a notice of rotation of the dial operation unit 401. (It is a command of long reach fluctuation with low jackpot reliability accompanied by a notice of rotation of the dial operation unit 401). When the change pattern command is not a super reach change command but a long reach change command with a low big hit reliability in step S2055, the process directly proceeds to step S2057 to stop the rotation operation and the light emitting decoration of the dial operation unit 401. The rotation notice control process is terminated.

  That is, when a rotation advance notice of the operation unit 400 is performed as a notice effect accompanying a long reach fluctuation with low jackpot reliability, when the player grasps the dial operation unit 401 and stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401, When the player stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 without waiting for the rotation control time of the operation unit 401 (for example, 10 seconds), the driving of the dial drive motor 414 and the full color LED 430b is stopped and the dial operation is performed. The rotation notice by the unit 401 is finished.

  If the change pattern command is a super-reach change command with high hit reliability in step S2055, it is determined whether or not the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed (step S2056). . Then, when the rotation control time of the dial operation unit 401 elapses, the process proceeds to step S157 to stop the rotation operation and the light emitting decoration of the dial operation unit 401, and the rotation notice control process is ended. That is, when the dial operation unit 401 is notified of rotation as a notice effect accompanying the super reach variation with high hit reliability, even if the player holds the dial operation unit 401 and stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 At that time, the dial operation unit 401 continues to be rotated and when the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the dial operation unit 401 elapses, the driving of the dial drive motor 414 and the full color LED 430b is stopped and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped. The rotation notice by 401 is ended.

  In the above-described rotation advance notice of the dial operation unit 401, the player is made to recognize the jackpot reliability of the developed reach fluctuation in a mode after the player stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. However, such a configuration may be made to allow the player to recognize whether there is a change from a loss symbol to a big hit symbol, or from a non-probable big hit symbol to a probable big hit symbol, This will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214.

  First, as shown in FIG. 213 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach mode is displayed as a configuration for allowing the player to recognize whether or not to switch from the lost symbol to the jackpot symbol. After that (in the same figure, the case where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned at “7” is illustrated), the middle decorative symbol 4602 is displayed in the normal reach variation mode and the middle decorative symbol 4602 (in FIG. In the example, “6” medium decoration pattern 4602 is temporarily stopped and displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 213 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven while the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops the lost symbol. Specifically, when the full color LEDs 432d and 430b are turned on / flashed, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light, and at the same time, the operation is performed by rotating the dial drive motor 414. The dial operation unit 401 of the unit 400 rotates. At the same time as the effect driving of the operation unit 400 is started, a character 4614 “Please stop the rotation of the dial operation unit” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player can perform the dial operation. The rotation of the unit 401 is prompted to stop.

  When there is no switching from the lose symbol to the big hit symbol (first effect mode), as shown in FIG. 213 (C), the player grasps the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation with the hand H, When the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped, this is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400, and the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is stopped (first mode operation control means). . Specifically, by stopping the lighting / flashing drive of each full-color LED 432d, 430b, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, and at the same time, the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped. The rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped. Also, in this case, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not change the stop results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 4601, 4602, and 4603, and the lost symbols are derived as the final display results (see FIG. (In the example, the lost symbol “7, 6, 7” is derived as the final display result).

  On the other hand, when the game is switched from the lost symbol to the big hit symbol (second effect mode), as shown in FIG. The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if this is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400, the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is continued (second mode operation control means). Thereby, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is continuously performed. In addition, the player is forced to press and hold the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation with the hand H, so that the player receives vibration from the dial drive motor 414 that drives the dial operation unit 401. Note that such vibration of the dial drive motor 414 can be realized only by a player who touches the dial operation unit 401. Accordingly, in the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the stop result of the medium decoration symbol 4602 is switched, and the jackpot symbol is derived as the final display result (in the figure, “7, 7, 7 ”Is a case where the jackpot symbol of“ is derived as the final display result). Further, the notice of switching to the jackpot symbol is not known unless the player touches the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive a notice depending on whether or not the dial operation unit 401 is touched, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 214 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned in the same design and reach, as shown in FIG. 214 (A). After the mode is displayed and the medium decorative symbol 4602 performs reach fluctuation, the non-probable variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (In the same figure, the non-probable variable big hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Exemplified case) At this time, each operation unit 400 is in a stopped state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 214 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven while the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the non-probable large hit symbol in a stopped state. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light when the full color LEDs 432d and 430b are turned on and blinking, and at the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is driven by the rotation of the dial drive motor 414. Rotate. At the same time as the effect driving of the operation unit 400 is started, a character 4614 “Please stop the rotation of the dial operation unit” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player can perform the dial operation. The rotation of the unit 401 is prompted to stop.

  Then, when there is no switching from the non-probable big hit symbol to the probable big hit symbol (first effect mode), as shown in FIG. When the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this and stop the effect drive of the operation unit 400 (first mode operation). Control means). Specifically, by stopping the lighting / flashing drive of each full-color LED 432d, 430b, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, and at the same time, the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped. The rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped. Further, in this case, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not change the stop results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 4601, 4602, and 4603, and the non-probable big hit symbol is derived as the final display result ( In the figure, an example is shown in which a non-probable big hit symbol of “6, 6, 6” is derived as a final display result).

  On the other hand, when there is a switch from the non-probable big hit symbol to the probable big hit symbol (second effect mode), as shown in FIG. , The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if this is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400, the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is continued (second mode operation control means). Thereby, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is continuously performed. In addition, the player is forced to press and hold the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation with the hand H, so that the player receives vibration from the dial drive motor 414 that drives the dial operation unit 401.

  Note that such vibration of the dial drive motor 414 can be realized only by a player who touches the dial operation unit 401. Accordingly, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched between the stop results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 4601, 4602, and 4603, and the probability variation big hit symbol is derived as the final display result (same diagram). (In the example, the probability variation jackpot symbol of “7, 7, 7” is derived as the final display result). Further, the advance notice of switching to the probable big hit symbol is not known unless the player touches the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive a notice depending on whether or not the dial operation unit 401 is touched, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

  In addition, when the operation unit 400 functions as an alternative operation means at the time of the selection effect, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated according to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so that the dial operation unit 401 at the time of the selection effect is operated. The operation method may be explained in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, and the configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 215 (A), an image for selecting a super reach variation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the selection effect. Specifically, the option image 4621 of the variation mode A (the letter “A” is illustrated in the figure) and the option image 4622 of the variation mode B (the letter “B” is illustrated in the figure) Are displayed side by side, and below that, an image 4606 in which the dial operation unit 401 alternately rotates clockwise and counterclockwise and the pressing operation unit 405 for selection determination is pressed, and a “dial operation unit” “Please select with” 4611 is displayed, so that the player is prompted to select a variation mode by rotating the dial operation unit 401.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (B), below each of the selection images 4621 and 4622 of the variation modes A and B, the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction and the pressing operation of the selection determining operation unit 400 is performed. An image 4608 pressed by the portion 405 and a character 4615 “when“ A ”is selected” are displayed. When the variation mode A is selected, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise. The player is informed that the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 is actually rotated clockwise by the drive of the dial drive motor 414, similarly to the image 4608 of the dial operation unit 401 rotating in the clockwise direction. The dial operation unit 401 is light-decorated by the lighting / flashing driving of the full color LED 430b (operation demonstration control means).

  Thereafter, below each of the selection images 4621 and 4622 of the variation modes A and B, as shown in FIG. 215 (C), the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise and the selection determining operation unit 400 is displayed. The image 4609 of the pressing operation unit 405 being pressed and the character 4616 “when“ B ”is selected” are displayed. When the variation mode B is selected, the dial operation unit 401 is turned counterclockwise. The player is informed that the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed by rotating. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 is actually rotated counterclockwise by the drive of the dial drive motor 414 in the same manner as the image 4608 of the dial operation unit 401 rotating counterclockwise. In order to make the player recognize the rotation operation of the motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 is light-decorated by the lighting / flashing driving of the full color LED 430b (operation performance control means).

  That is, according to the above-described configuration, when a selection effect is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the selection method of the options is explained to the player by the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the dial operation unit serving as the selection method The rotation operation of 401 is actually explained to the player by visually rotating the dial operation unit 401 so that it can be easily understood visually.

  In addition, the configuration of the operation unit 400 that functions as the operation explanation unit as described above is not limited only to the selection effect. For example, the operation unit 400 may function as the operation explanation at the time of the reach effect shown in FIG. The structure will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 216 (A) as in FIG. 202 (B), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and a reach mode is displayed (in the same diagram, the left and right decorative symbols are “ 7 ”), then, as the middle decorative pattern 4602 continues to fluctuate, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 move to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, respectively, and are reduced and displayed. Develop into fluctuations. At this time, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped by stopping the driving of the dial drive motor 414, and the dial operation unit 401 is turned off by stopping the driving of the full color LED 430b.

  As shown in FIG. 216 (B), as a variation pattern of the super reach, a middle decorative pattern 4602a (in FIG. 216, “6”) is used to determine a shift with a different pattern from the left and right decorative patterns 4601 and 4603. A middle decoration symbol is illustrated side by side, and a middle decoration symbol 4602b (in which the "7" medium decoration symbol is illustrated) that determines a big hit with the same symbols as the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are displayed side by side. Below that, an image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise and a character 4611 “turn the dial operation unit” are displayed, so that the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401) is displayed. A display prompting the player to perform a clockwise rotation operation is performed. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 is actually rotated in the clockwise direction by driving the dial drive motor 414 in the same manner as the image 4608 of the dial operation unit 401 rotating in the clockwise direction, and further, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is further rotated. In order to make the player recognize the operation, the dial operation unit 401 is illuminated and decorated by lighting and blinking driving of the full color LED 430b (operation demonstration control means).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 216 (C), when the effect display in which the middle decorative symbol 4602a for determining the loss pushes the middle decorative symbol 4602b for determining the big hit is started, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated accordingly. Operation and luminescent decorations are stopped. As described above, in the configuration shown in FIG. 216, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in accordance with the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the player can easily understand the operation method of the dial operation unit 401 during reach production. Can be done.

  As described above, according to the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, when an operation effect is executed by the effect control means (peripheral control unit 4140), the effect is achieved by driving the dial drive motor 414 before the operation effect is executed and controlled. The player is instructed to manually operate the dial operation unit 401 by demonstrating the movement of the dial operation unit 401 that can affect the contents of the effect of the means. Since the operation method can be directly understood, a player who is still unfamiliar with the game on the pachinko machine 1 can operate the operation unit 400 as the designer assumes. Further, since the movement of the dial operation unit 401 that can affect the production content of the production means can be actually demonstrated and shown to the player, the dial operation unit 401 is simply displayed to the player on the explanation screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Compared with the configuration that prompts the manual operation, it is easy to understand and impacts the player, and the player can be instructed to manually operate the dial operation unit 401.

  Further, when the selection effect is executed, by rotating the dial operation unit 401, the player is taught to manually operate the dial operation unit 401 to select one of a plurality of options. Therefore, the movement of the dial operation unit 401 for manual operation according to the selection effect can be actually demonstrated and shown to the player, and it is easy to understand and impacts the player so that the manual operation of the dial operation unit 401 can be performed. The player can be taught the operation.

  Further, when the player selects substitution of manual operation of the dial operation unit 401 during execution of the selection effect, the dial operation unit 401 is automatically rotated by the driving of the dial drive motor 414 so that the selection operation is automatically performed. In addition, when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 while the dial operation unit 401 is rotating, the driving of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped and the player's operation is given priority. A player who feels that manual operation of the dial operation unit 401 is sometimes troublesome work can be provided with comfortable game contents without forcing such operation. Yes.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the selection operation by pressing the pressing operation unit 405 at the time of the selection effect, the player is willing to operate the dial operation unit 401. The game can be advanced in a state where it is clear whether or not there is, and as a result, a player who is looking forward to manual operation of the dial operation unit 401, and a player who is not looking forward to manual operation of the dial operation unit 401, Comfortable game content can be provided to all players.

  In addition, when the selection effect is executed, if the player does not operate the dial operation unit 401 within a predetermined time, the selection effect is performed by a predetermined selection method. Can be advanced. Further, when it is determined at the time of execution of the selection effect that the ratio of the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player so far is high, the reception time of the operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player is extended. Therefore, by extending the effective detection time for a player who is looking forward to the operation of the dial operation unit 401, it is possible to make the game content according to user needs.

  In addition, when the player makes a selection agent during the selection effect, the dial operation unit 401 performs the selection agent by a predetermined selection method. The selection proxy can be executed in an equal manner. In addition, since the operation of the dial operation unit 401 operated by the player is stored at the time of the selection effect, when the selection agent is executed, the selection agent is reflected by reflecting the selection tendency of the player. Can be executed.

[4-3. About fluctuation display pattern]
An effect variation display pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described below. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control board 4100) of the present embodiment selects the variation display pattern in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 182). 217 and 218 are diagrams showing a variation display pattern table in the present embodiment. In the variation display pattern tables in FIGS. 217 and 218, the pattern number, variation name (variation content of variation display pattern), and variation time are shown in order from the left side. The variation display pattern table (also referred to as a total variation display pattern table) shown in FIGS. 217 and 218 is the above-described external disadvantage variation display pattern table (probability large hit variation display pattern table, certain variation special hit variation display pattern table, normal A big hit hour fluctuation display pattern table, a deviation fluctuation fluctuation display pattern table, and a loss reach fluctuation fluctuation display pattern table), a normal time short fluctuation fluctuation display pattern table, and a probability change short fluctuation fluctuation display pattern table. The total variation display pattern table is composed of 165 variation display patterns, and each variation display pattern belongs to one of the variation display pattern tables included in the total variation display pattern table. For example, the fluctuation display pattern of pattern number 1 belongs to the external disadvantageous fluctuation display pattern table (fluctuation display pattern table at the time of loss), and the fluctuation display pattern of pattern number 132 belongs to the normal time fluctuation display pattern table. The change display pattern 155 belongs to the probability change time change display pattern table.

  Note that the fluctuation display pattern (for example, the fluctuation display pattern of pattern number 155) described as “highly accurate” shown in FIG. 218 indicates that the pattern can be selected when the probability change external advantageous state. A fluctuation display pattern described as “short time” (for example, a fluctuation display pattern of pattern number 132) indicates that the pattern can be selected in a normal external advantageous state. In other words, the fluctuation display patterns described as “highly accurate” and “medium time” belong to the probability change short time fluctuation display pattern table and the normal time short time fluctuation display pattern table, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, a variation display pattern other than the variation display patterns indicated as “highly accurate” and “medium time”, and a variation display pattern indicated as “reach” (for example, The fluctuation display pattern of pattern number 25) is a pattern that can be normally selected in the external disadvantageous state, that is, belongs to the external disadvantageous fluctuation display pattern table.

  Here, the variation time in the comprehensive variation display pattern table will be described. In the above-described variation display pattern, in addition to a core effect (hereinafter also referred to as a main variation effect), an effect such as a notice effect or a pseudo-continuous effect described later (hereinafter also referred to as an additional effect) is added. An effect can be configured. In the comprehensive variation display pattern table shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, on the right side, as commands representing variation time, “10H”, “11H”, “12H”, “13H”, “14H”, “15H”, “16H” ”,“ 17H ”, and“ 18H ”. “10H” represents the time of main variation effect in each variation display pattern (hereinafter also referred to as main variation time). A command other than “10H” represents a total time in which a time (hereinafter also referred to as an additional time) used for an additional effect such as a notice effect or a pseudo-continuous effect to be described later is added to the variable time. . The additional time in each command other than “10H” is a constant value in any variable display pattern. For example, when “11H” is selected in the variation display pattern of pattern number 10, the variation time is 26000 (ms) as an additional time in the main variation time 17500 (ms) (time represented by “10H”). It is added to 43500 (ms). When “11H” is selected in the variation display pattern of pattern number 11, the variation time is 46000 (ms) by adding 26000 (ms) as an additional time to the actual variation time 20000 (ms). It becomes.

  The additional effect can be executed, for example, before the main variation effect. The notice effect includes various effects such as an effect in which a specific character appears while a specific music is played, and an effect in which a balloon effect in which a specific comment is displayed is performed a plurality of times.

  As shown in FIG. 217 and FIG. 218, the fluctuation display pattern is compared with the time of low accuracy (in the normal external advantageous state and in the normal external disadvantageous state) at the time of high accuracy (at the time of positive variation external advantageous state). , Fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the case of winning the big hit, the time until the big hit game is started after the end of the fluctuation based on the fluctuation display pattern is shorter in the high probability time than in the low probability time (for example, the low probability time is 10 seconds). High accuracy time is 5 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving a feeling of discomfort to a player who is considered to be a big hit because the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the big hit game becomes excessively long at a high probability. Details of the fluctuation display pattern (variation display pattern belonging to the short-time fluctuation display pattern table at the time of probability change) selected at the time of high accuracy (in the time of the probability change external advantageous state) will be described later.

[4-4. Example of production in liquid crystal display device 1900]
Examples of effects in the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described below in the order of pseudo-continuous effects, short-time effects, and a series of effects during probability change. Each of these effects is realized in the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the peripheral control MPU 4140a controlling the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

<Pseudo-continuous production>
The pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-variable effect) is an effect in which after the decoration pattern is changed, the decoration pattern is changed again by showing the player that the decoration pattern has been changed in a pseudo manner. Note that “show the player as if the variation of the decorative design is pseudo-finished” means, for example, a mode in which at least a part of the decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the decorative design is gradually made transparent during the variation of the decorative design. In addition, various aspects are included such as an aspect in which the player is made to feel that the variation of the decorative symbol has ended, and an aspect in which a specific decorative symbol that is not normally stopped is stopped.

  FIG. 219 is a table showing an example of pseudo-continuous effects. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects as shown in FIG. 219 can be realized. In the example of the pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 219, “pattern number”, “production content”, “remarks”, and “distribution” are shown in order from the left. In the pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 219, the contents of the production and remarks are shown for ten pseudo-continuous productions with pattern numbers 1 to 10. For example, it can be seen that the pseudo-continuous effect of pattern number 1 is a symbol rotation pseudo-ream in which the symbol rotates. Moreover, it turns out that the pseudo | simulation continuous production | presentation of the pattern numbers 1-3, 8, and 9 is an effect using an accessory. Specifically, in the pseudo-continuous effects of pattern numbers 1 to 3, 8, and 9, there is an effect in which the decorative symbol moves in accordance with the movement of the accessory (for example, an effect in which the accessory expels the decorative symbol from the display screen). Is called. Furthermore, it turns out that the pseudo | simulation continuous production | presentation of the pattern numbers 4-7 is an effect regarding a music (phrase). Specifically, in the pseudo-continuous effects of pattern numbers 4 to 7, an effect of moving (dancing) the decorative symbols together with the music (phrase) flowing from the speaker 821 is performed. In this embodiment, this pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that is normally executed in an external disadvantageous state or a probable variation external disadvantageous state, that is, executed when a variable display pattern is selected by an external disadvantageous variable display pattern table. obtain.

  Next, “distribution” will be specifically described. The pseudo-continuous performance shown in FIG. 219 may be repeated once to three times. “Distribution” represents the distribution ratio of each pattern number to the pseudo-continuous production in the case of performing one to three pseudo-continuous productions. For example, when performing the first pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous effect of pattern number 1 is selected at a rate of 25%, and when performing the second pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous effect of pattern number 2 is selected. In the case where the ratio is selected at a rate of 40% and the third simulated continuous effect is performed, it indicates that the pseudo continuous effect of pattern number 3 is selected at a rate of 50%. In the pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 219, when the pseudo-continuous production is performed a plurality of times, the plurality of pseudo-continuous productions are not necessarily performed by the pseudo-continuous production having the same pattern number, and each is based on “distribution”. It is determined. For example, in the case of performing the three-time pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous effect of pattern number 1 is selected as the first pseudo-continuous effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect of pattern number 2 is selected as the second pseudo-continuous effect. As the second pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous effect of pattern number 3 can be selected.

  Each of the pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIG. 219 is music that is played from the speaker 821 during the pseudo-continuous effects, and one of the plurality of music and one timing of the plurality of pseudo-continuous start timings. It is configured in combination. In this way, ten pseudo-continuous effects can be easily created as in the pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIG. The “plurality of quasi-continuous start timings” means, for example, the timing at which a quasi-continuous effect starts when one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the quasi-continuous effects start when two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. And a timing arbitrarily selected from the timing of starting the pseudo-continuous effect in a state where the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

<Direction of time shortage>
Next, the short and medium production will be described. At this time, the medium short effect is a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, pattern number 132, pattern number 133 in FIG. 218) in the normal short time variable display pattern table (see FIGS. 217 and 218) in the normal external advantageous state ( In the following, it is an effect that is executed when the short-time / intermediate effect variation display pattern is selected. FIG. 220 is a timing chart of the short and medium effect. FIG. 221 is a diagram for describing a display image in a short-time production. Specifically, FIG. 221 (A) is a display image example at the first step SS1 to be described later in the time-shortage effect, and FIG. 221 (B) is a display image at the second step SS2 to be described later in the time-shortage effect. FIG. 221 (C) is an example of a display image at the time of a third step SS3, which will be described later, in the time-shortage effect.

  In the short-time production, first, as shown in FIG. 220, after the production is started (after the start of decoration symbol change), the production in which a specific character appears wearing a costume is executed (first step SS1). The specific character in this embodiment is a girl. The costume is one out of a plurality of kinds of costumes (for example, one piece). In the present embodiment, different types of music are associated one-to-one with each of the plurality of types of costumes. For example, “Song A” is associated with the costume “One Piece”. In the present embodiment, each of a plurality of types of costumes is associated with a different piece of music on a one-to-one basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more costumes among a plurality of costumes are common. It may be associated with music.

  In the first step SS1, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), the specific character CRCT that has appeared is displayed in a hologram form that is relatively difficult for the player to identify (first step SS1). Holograms are often expressed in stripes in TV dramas and movies, and the hologram form refers to such a stripe form. This hologram mode is also referred to as a low-discrimination display mode because it is a mode that is relatively difficult for a player to identify.

  Next, after the first step SS1, the character CRCT displayed in the hologram form in the first step SS1 is converted into a materialized form that is relatively easy for the player to identify below (under the feet) or gradually (over time). As shown in FIG. 221 (B), the character CRCT is partially converted into a materialized form at a specific stage (in the example of the figure, below the face of the specific character). Conversion to the materialization mode is stopped (second step SS2). Here, the materialization mode means that the striped portion in the hologram mode has a clear outline.

  Subsequently, after the second step SS2, the process proceeds to one of a third step SS3 described later or a fourth step SS4 described later. Thus, which step to move to is determined by the selected variation display pattern.

  In the third step SS3, as shown in FIG. 221 (C), the hologram mode portion that has not been converted into the materialized mode in the character CRCT is converted into the materialized mode. That is, all parts of the character CRCT are converted into a materialized form. As described above, the character CRCT in which all the parts are converted into the materialized form is relatively easy to be identified by the player as compared with the character CRCT in the hologram form (low distinguishability display form) in FIG. It is a highly distinguishable display mode.

  As described above, when all the portions of the character CRCT are converted into the materialized form, the conversion from the hologram form to the materialized form becomes “success”, and the reach effect corresponding to the costume (music) of the specific character is achieved. Transition. This reach effect is an effect including an effect using a specific character that has been successfully converted (an effect in which a specific character appears), and is hereinafter also referred to as a character use effect after change of mode.

  This character use effect after the change of the aspect has a big hit expectation than the normal reach effect (for example, the effect included in the variable display patterns of pattern numbers 9 to 12 in the external disadvantage variable display pattern table selected in the normal external disadvantage state). It is set high. That is, the post-change character use effect is a high expectation suggestion effect that suggests a relatively high jackpot expectation, while the normal reach effect is a low expectation suggestion effect that indicates a relatively low expectation value. It is. Hereinafter, the variation display pattern that realizes the character change effect after the change of mode is also referred to as a character use effect change display pattern after the change of mode. Since there are a plurality of patterns with different costumes (music pieces) in the after-change character use effect, the present embodiment also has a plurality of after-change character use effect change display patterns. In addition, the normal reach production is, for example, after the reach mode in which two decorative symbols display the same display mode (numbers), immediately after the other decorative symbols stop, the symbol mode showing the lottery result is displayed. This refers to the production. In addition, the character change effect after change of mode is, for example, an effect whose change time is shorter than that of the character change effect after change of mode (for example, change display of pattern number 95 in the external disadvantage change display pattern table selected in the normal external disadvantage state) The big hit expectation degree may be set higher than the production included in the pattern.

  On the other hand, in the fourth step SS4, the hologram form portion that has not been converted into the materialized form in the character CRCT is not converted into the materialized form as it is, and the conversion from the hologram form to the materialized form becomes “failure”, and it is lost. The character appearance is executed by displaying the symbol form and ending the effect. Hereinafter, the variable display pattern for realizing the character non-appearance effect is also referred to as a character non-appearance effect variable display pattern.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the variable display pattern is different from the variable display pattern that realizes the character use effect after the change of the mode, and the external disadvantageous variable display pattern table is normally displayed in the external disadvantageous state. And a specific character effect variation display pattern (for example, FIG. 217: pattern numbers 95 and 99, which realizes a specific character effect that is an effect using the specific character (effect in which the specific character appears). 100, 101, 102). The specific character effect realized by the specific character effect change display pattern is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than at least a normal reach effect (low expectation effect). That is, the specific character effect is an effect that suggests that the degree of expectation for jackpot is higher than that of the normal reach effect. In this case, the post-mode change character use effect may be set with a higher jackpot expectation than the specific character effect.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display pattern that realizes the normal reach effect (low expectation suggestion effect) is not executed in the normal external advantageous state. Here, the normal time variable display pattern table may include a variable display pattern that realizes another effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a medium expectation effect) that is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect. That is, in the normal external advantageous state, in addition to the post-change character use effect change display pattern, the change display pattern may be selected from the change display patterns that realize the medium expectation effect.

  Each of the above-described multiple types of costumes (multiple types of music) is set so that the jackpot expectation is different when it appears.

  According to the above-mentioned short-time effect, the specific character (girl) that appears is displayed in a low-discriminatory display mode (hologram mode) that is relatively difficult for the player to identify. Thus, first, since a specific character is displayed in a low-discriminating display mode, it is possible to give the player an interest in the display effect such as “What is displayed?”. In this way, even when the player's thinking is stagnant, it is possible to activate the thinking. Then, after that, the display state of the specific character is changed from the low-discrimination display mode to the high-discrimination display mode (the whole of the specific character is converted into the materialized mode) that is relatively easy for the player to identify. (Switched). In this way, the player can clearly recognize the displayed specific character. Then, after the display mode is switched, an effect using a specific character is achieved, and an after-change character use effect having a relatively high expectation degree of big hits is realized at least as compared with the normal reach effect. In this way, compared to the case where the character use effect after the change of state is performed without performing the display in the low distinguishability display mode, the player is larger at the time of the introduction of the effect (at the time of the low distinguishability display mode). Since the character use effect after the mode change is realized in a state of being interested and having a great interest, the character use effect after the mode change can be observed with high interest. As a result, the player's interest in the display effect can be improved.

  According to the above-mentioned short-time production, when the display mode of a specific character is changed (switching from the hologram mode to the materialization mode) in the short-time mode production pattern, the distinctiveness gradually improves from the low-discrimination display mode. In addition, since it is converted to the high-discriminatory display mode, the player can enjoy the staged transition effect from the low-discriminative display mode to the high-discriminative display mode. As a result, the player can observe with high interest the effect of transition from the low-discriminatory display mode to the high-discriminative display mode.

  When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normally in the external advantageous state, lottery for whether or not the big hit is made is performed in a short time, so that the player in the normal external advantageous state is more than in the normal external disadvantageous state. , Make a big interest in whether the lottery result is a big hit. Therefore, as in the case of the above-mentioned short-and-short-time production, a short-and-long-time production variation display pattern is implemented that realizes a post-change character use production (high-expected suggestion production) that has a relatively high expectation degree of at least a big hit compared to the normal reach production in the normal external advantageous state. Then, the player can observe with great interest the effect of changing from the low discrimination display mode to the high discrimination display mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly interesting performance in the normal external advantageous state.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1, by realizing the specific character effect variation display pattern in the normal external disadvantageous state (normal game state), the expectation of relatively big hit is higher than the normal reach effect (low expectation suggestive effect). A specific character effect using a specific character is realized. In this way, the player can recognize that the expectation level is high if the specific character appears by experiencing the specific character effect in the external disadvantageous state. Therefore, in the normal external advantageous state, when the character use effect after the mode change in which the specific character appears is executed by the time change effect display pattern, the player always uses the time change effect display pattern. Even if the character usage effect has not been observed after the mode change, the effect can be observed with expectation.

  As described above, in a normal external advantageous state, the player is interested in whether or not the lottery result is a big hit. According to the above-mentioned short and medium production, the character use production variation display pattern (high expectation suggestion production pattern) after the mode change is executed without executing the variation display pattern that realizes the normal reach production (low expectation production) in the normal external advantageous state. Execute. Therefore, by executing the normal reach effect (low expectation suggestion effect pattern), it is possible to suppress the player from being excessively discouraged, and to change the character use effect change display pattern (including the high expectation suggestion effect) after the mode change. The expectation of the production by the variable display pattern) can be further increased.

  According to the above-mentioned short and medium effect, although a specific character is displayed in a hologram mode (low discrimination display mode) that is relatively difficult for a player to identify, the display state of the specific character is a hologram mode (low discrimination display mode). It is possible to execute a character non-appearance effect pattern that realizes a character non-appearance effect that ends the effect without switching from the realization mode to the materialization mode (highly distinguishable display mode). In this way, when a hologram mode (low discrimination display mode) appears, it does not always shift to the materialization mode (high discrimination display mode), so from the hologram mode (low discrimination display mode) A strong sense of urgency can be given to the situation of whether or not to shift to the materialization mode (highly distinguishable display mode).

  According to the above-mentioned short time production, the low discrimination display mode is expressed by the hologram mode in which thin portions with low saturation appear in stripes. If such a display mode is adopted, the character can be expressed as if it were virtualized rather than an entity. And in the striped part, if the ratio of the part that can be switched to the dark display in the thin part is gradually increased, it can be expressed as if a specific virtual character gradually materializes. it can.

  By the way, the specific character is not limited to a girl but may be a boy, or formed from something other than a person, for example, an animal, a fictional creature such as a dragon, a robot, a plant, or the like. Characters to be included.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned short and medium production, the low discrimination display mode is expressed by the hologram mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the low discrimination display mode may be expressed by at least a thin display mode. Here, the thin display mode is a mode in which the saturation is lowered. When the saturation is increased, the displayed color becomes vivid, and when the saturation is decreased, the displayed color is close to gray. Therefore, if a specific character is displayed with low saturation, it is difficult to recognize the character. Further, the low-discriminating display mode may be expressed by a mode in which only a part of the shape of the materialization mode (high-discrimination display mode) is visible. Furthermore, the low discrimination display mode may be expressed by a mode smaller than the shape of the materialization mode (high discrimination display mode). In the case of the low discrimination display mode, the brightness may be the same, may be brighter, or may be darker. The hues are preferably the same. However, the hue may change. Further, in the above-mentioned short time and medium effects, the shape of the low-discriminating display mode portion is a stripe shape, but is not limited thereto, and may be an arbitrary shape.

  Furthermore, although the first step SS1 to the fourth step SS4 in the above-mentioned short-time production are performed in the normal external advantageous state, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed in any of an advantageous state and a probable variation external disadvantageous state.

  In addition, the first step SS1 to the fourth step SS4 in the above-mentioned short-time production are executed after the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, that is, are executed while the decorative symbol fluctuates. You may make it perform irrespective of the fluctuation state of a decoration symbol. For example, it may be executed in a state where the decorative symbols are not changed or during a big hit game.

  Note that the first step SS1 to the fourth step SS4 in the above-mentioned short-time effect are not executed in the above-described pre-reading effect, that is, can be executed regardless of the hold state.

<Certain production during probability change>
Next, a series of effects during probability change will be described. This series of effects during probability change is an effect that is started when the lottery result is a big win excluding special wins in the probability change external advantageous state, and is executed during a big hit game through a predetermined effect. Specifically, the series of effects during probability variation is a specific variation display pattern (for example, pattern numbers 155 to 157 in FIG. 218) in the above-described probability variation time variation display pattern table (see FIGS. 217 and 218) in the probability variation external advantageous state. (Hereinafter also referred to as a notification selection effect variation display pattern) is selected and the effect is started, and the effect continues until the big hit game. In the series production during this probability change, “probability big hit” corresponds to “probability big hit excluding special hit”.

  When the lottery result is a special hit in the probability variation external advantageous state, a specific variation display pattern (for example, in FIG. 218) in the probability variation short time variation display pattern table (see FIGS. 217 and 218) described above. Pattern number 164) is executed. Further, when the lottery result is out of place in the probability variation external advantageous state, a specific variation display pattern (for example, the pattern of FIG. 217) in the above-described probability variation time variation display pattern table (see FIGS. 217 and 218). A pattern selected from numbers 4 to 7) is executed, and a shortened variation effect, that is, an effect in which the reach effect is not performed and an effect in which the decoration pattern stops immediately after the change is made.

  FIG. 222 is a timing chart of a series of effects during probability change. In the series of effects during the probability change, first, after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. First production ST1). This pre-type selection effect is a type of notification effect (mini game), which will be described later, realized during a big hit game, and a plurality of types with different expected expectations for probability big hit (hereinafter also referred to as probability change expectation) It is an effect that is selected from the notification effect (mini game) during the big hit game. The following roulette effects are realized as the advance type selection effects. In addition, it can be said that “the probability variation probability is larger, the smaller the probability is that the probability variation will not be a big hit”.

  FIG. 223 is a diagram for explaining candidates displayed in the roulette effect. In the roulette effect, a plurality of candidates are displayed in which a costume and a song of a specific character are associated with each other, and one candidate (a song and a costume) is selected from the displayed candidates (a song and a costume). It is a production to select. These candidates are associated with one of the jackpot gaming notification effects (minigames) among the plurality of jackpot gaming notification effects (minigames). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, there are seven candidates (candidates 1 to 7), and each candidate corresponds to one big hit game notification effect (in the figure, “effect content”). ). Therefore, the description of the advance type selection effect described above can be read as follows. In other words, “the advance type selection effect is an effect of selecting a candidate type (corresponding to a later-described jackpot gaming notification effect) from among a plurality of types of candidates with different expected expectations of winning for a promising jackpot”.

  Further, when the lottery result is a normal big hit and a probable big hit, a candidate (musical piece) to be finally selected is selected according to “Rate” shown in the right column of FIG. The numbers in “Distribution” represent the distribution rate (%). For example, if the lottery result is usually a big hit, candidate 1 (music 1) is selected with a probability of 17%, and candidate 3 (music 3) is selected with a probability of 22%. For example, if the lottery result is a probable big hit (excluding special hits), candidate 1 (music 1) is selected with a probability of 9%, and candidate 3 (music 3) is selected with a probability of 17%. . In this way, the distribution rate is set differently for each candidate. As a result, each candidate in the roulette effect has a different probability of expected change when selected (see “Remarks” in FIG. 223). In addition to the four mini-games shown in FIG. 223 (“effect content”), the door system effect, the seconds system effect, the timing system effect, and the jog effect, the notification effect during the big hit game is not shown. There are a door opening / closing effect, a character transformation effect, and an ending effect, which will be described in detail later.

  Specifically, in this roulette effect, a specific number (for example, four) of the candidates 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 223 are displayed (FIG. 222: step SA1). In this case, first, “candidate to be finally selected” is determined from one of candidates 1 to 7, and then the remaining candidates (for example, three candidates) are determined by lottery. Display candidates.

  In this roulette effect, when each candidate is displayed, each candidate's music (song name) and costume are displayed. Further, a star image as shown in “Song” in FIG. 223 is displayed, and the higher the probability variation probability is, the more stars are displayed (FIG. 222: Step SA2). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 223, the probability variation expectation is set higher as the candidate number increases (as the music number (number following the music) increases).

  Furthermore, in this roulette effect, the process of displaying one candidate (referred to as a temporary selection candidate) in a different manner from the other candidates is repeated while changing the temporary selection candidate. As a result, a state in which one temporary selection candidate changes one after another like a roulette is displayed. Further, in this roulette effect, when the temporary selection candidate is changed, a button image is displayed to prompt the player to press (operate) the pressing operation unit 405 (FIG. 222: Step SA3).

  In the roulette effect, when the player presses down the pressing operation unit 405, the “candidate to be finally selected” first selected when the candidate is determined in the process of step SA1 is selected (FIG. 222). : Step SA4).

  On the other hand, in this roulette effect, when the player does not press the pressing operation unit 405 within a predetermined time, the candidate having the lowest probability of expected change is selected from the plurality of candidates determined in the process of step SA1 (FIG. 222: Step SA5).

  The probability variation expectation is a numerical value based on the premise that the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed. When the pressing operation unit 405 is not pressed, an effect corresponding to the candidate with the lowest probability of probability variation is realized, but the probability that the probability probability is actually a big hit is likely to be higher than the probability variation probability.

  Subsequently, in the series of effects during probability change, as shown in FIG. 222, a temporary stop effect is performed as a symbol stop effect for stopping the variation of the decorative symbols (second effect ST2). Even if the lottery result is a probable big hit, the temporary stop effect is stopped in a stop mode (hereinafter, also referred to as a normal big hit symbol stop mode) in which the decorative symbol is a normal big hit. For example, a symbol aspect composed of odd numbered lozenges is a stop aspect indicating probability variation big hit (hereinafter also referred to as a probability variation big hit symbol stop aspect, such as 777), and a symbol aspect composed of even numbered double eyes is usually a big hit In the case of the symbol stop mode (666 or the like), the symbol mode composed of an even number of double eyes is stopped. As described above, the temporary stop effect is an effect that stops the game in the “probably” normal big hit symbol stop mode instead of the probable big hit symbol stop mode even if it is a probable big hit.

  The prior type selection effect and the temporary stop effect are effects realized by the notification selection effect change display pattern. In the present embodiment, the production time (also referred to as a series production variation partial production time) of the prior type selection production and the symbol stop production in the series production during the probability variation is about 24 seconds (24000 ms) to 29 seconds (29000 ms). (See FIG. 218: pattern numbers 155 to 157).

  After the symbol stop effect (temporary stop effect), a big hit game is performed (see FIG. 186). Then, in the promiscuous series production, as shown in FIG. 222, a big hit game effect, which is an effect performed during the big hit game, is performed (third effect ST3). Specifically, as an effect during the big hit game, first, one of four mini-games (refer to FIG. 223 “Production Contents”) of a door system effect, a seconds system effect, a timing system effect, and a jog effect. Do a mini game. As described above, the candidate (musical piece) selected in the advance type selection effect is associated with one of the big hit game effects (mini game). For example, as shown in FIG. 223, music 1 and music 2 are associated with door system effects, music 3 and music 4 are associated with seconds system effects, and music 5 and music 6 are The music piece 7 is associated with the jog system effect. That is, when the music 1 or the music 2 is selected in the prior type selection effect, the door system effect is executed as the big hit game effect. When the music 3 or the music 4 is selected in the prior type selection effect, a second-number effect is executed as an effect during the big hit game. When the music 5 or the music 6 is selected in the prior type selection effect, the timing system effect is executed as the effect during the big hit game. When the music piece 7 is selected in the prior type selection effect, a jog effect is executed as an effect during the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 223, the probability variation expectation of these four mini-games is set such that “door system effect <seconds system effect <timing system effect <jog system effect”. Now, these four mini games will be described below.

  The door system effect is as follows, while the music (song 1 or music 2) selected in the prior type selection effect is played from the speaker 821 and a specific character sings a song corresponding to the music on the display screen. The production of. That is, a door (door image) appears in front of a specific character, and an effect (hereinafter also referred to as a shutter effect) is performed in which the specific character is gradually hidden behind the door. At this time, if the specific character moves to the front before the door closes and the display of the specific character can be continued, the shutter effect is successful (“CLEAR” etc. is displayed on the display screen), and the specific character is displayed before the door closes. If the character cannot move to the front and the door closes and the display of the specific character disappears, the shutter effect fails, and the door system effect ends at that time.

  When the lottery result is a probable big hit, the shutter effect is made a success several times (for example, 3 times), and the song corresponding to the song is sung to a specific character, and the door system effect is displayed. Can be displayed. In this case, for example, “completed” is displayed on the display screen. Thereby, the player can recognize that the lottery result is a probable big hit. That is, by displaying an image such as “complete” on the display screen, it is informed that the lottery result is a probable big hit. At the start of the door system effect, an image indicating "probable big hit if the specific character sings a song" or "probable big hit if the specific character succeeds in the shutter effect three times" is displayed to the player. In order to be a promising big hit, you may make it recognize beforehand what kind of state and what kind of image should be displayed. Thereby, when notifying that the lottery result is a probable big hit, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player misidentifies the notification result.

  In the second system effect, while the music (music 3 or music 4) selected in the prior type selection effect is played from the speaker 821, a state in which a specific character sings a song corresponding to the music is displayed on the display screen. The following effects are performed. That is, a button image is displayed and the player is prompted to press the pressing operation unit 405. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405 within a predetermined time, the number of hours (seconds) is displayed, and the time during which a specific character can sing a song (hereinafter also referred to as a limit time). An effect (hereinafter referred to as a seconds addition effect) is added. However, the limit time decreases as time progresses. If the second addition effect is performed once or more and a specific character can sing a song within the limit time, the effect is successful. On the other hand, if the limit time becomes 0 and a specific character cannot sing a song within the limit time, the production fails, and at that time, the seconds system production ends. In this second system effect, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is not pressed for a predetermined time after the button image is displayed, the limit time may be automatically added.

  When the lottery result is a probable big hit, the second addition effect is performed once or more, a specific character sings a song within the limit time, and the fact that the second system effect is successful can be displayed on the display screen . In this case, for example, “COMPLELE” is displayed on the display screen. Thereby, the player can recognize that the lottery result is a probable big hit. That is, by displaying an image such as “COMPLETE” on the display screen, it is notified that the lottery result is a probable big hit. It should be noted that at the start of the production of the seconds system, an image showing “probable big hit if a specific character sings a song” is displayed, and in order to make the player a probable big hit, what state and how It may be made to recognize in advance whether an appropriate image should be displayed. Thereby, when notifying that the lottery result is a probable big hit, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player misidentifies the notification result.

  In the timing system effect, the music (song 5 or music 6) selected in the prior type selection effect is played from the speaker 821, and a state in which a specific character sings a song corresponding to the music is displayed on the display screen. The following effects are performed. That is, when a marker (such as a note image) flows at a predetermined position and the player presses the pressing operation unit 405 at the timing when the marker reaches the predetermined position, the predetermined meter rises. (Hereinafter, also referred to as a meter raising effect). Then, by repeating the meter raising effect a plurality of times, when the meter rises and reaches a predetermined threshold, a specific character can sing a song, and the production is successful. On the other hand, if the meter does not reach the predetermined threshold, the specific character cannot sing a song and the production fails, and the timing system production ends. In this timing system effect, the meter may automatically rise even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not pressed for a predetermined time after the button image is displayed.

  If the lottery result is a probable big hit, the timing system effect can be made successful and the timing system effect can be displayed on the display screen. In this case, for example, “CLEAR” is displayed on the display screen. Thereby, the player can recognize that the lottery result is a probable big hit. That is, by displaying an image such as “CLEAR” on the display screen, it is notified that the lottery result is a probable big hit. In addition, at the start of the timing system production, an image showing “probable big hit if a specific character sings a song” or “probable big hit if the meter reaches 100” is displayed so that the player can be a promising big hit. May be made to recognize in advance what kind of state and what image should be displayed. Thereby, when notifying that the lottery result is a probable big hit, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player misidentifies the notification result.

  The jog system effect is as follows. The music (song 7) selected in the prior type selection effect is played from the speaker 821, and a specific character sings a song corresponding to the song on the display screen. I do. That is, a dial image is displayed and the player is prompted to operate the dial operation unit 401. Then, when the player operates the dial operation unit 401, a sound for notifying a probable big hit (hereinafter also referred to as a single notification sound) is played from the speaker 821 and the dial operation unit 401 is automatically lit while being lit brightly. If an effect (hereinafter also referred to as a rotation effect) is performed and a specific character can sing a song, the effect is successful. On the other hand, if the rotation effect is not performed and the specific character cannot sing a song, the effect is a failure effect, and the jog effect ends. Note that in a jog-type effect, there is a case where a rotation effect is automatically performed even if the player does not operate the dial operation unit 401.

  When the lottery result is a probable big hit, the jog effect can be made successful (rotation effect is executed), and the success of the jog effect can be displayed on the display screen. In this case, as described above, “COMPLETE” is displayed on the display screen. Thereby, the player can recognize that the lottery result is a probable big hit. Alternatively, by executing the rotation effect, the player can recognize that the lottery effect is a probable big hit. That is, by displaying an image such as “COMPLETE” on the display screen and executing a rotation effect, the fact that the lottery result is a probable big hit is informed. At the start of the jog-based production, an image showing "probable big hit if a specific character sings a song" or "probable big hit if a rotation effect can be activated" is displayed, and the player will be a promising big hit. For this purpose, it may be made to recognize in advance what kind of state it is and what kind of image should be displayed. Thereby, when notifying that the lottery result is a probable big hit, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player misidentifies the notification result.

  If any of the above door system effects, seconds system effects, timing system effects, and jog system effects fails, a button image is further displayed as a jackpot gaming effect, and the player is pressed. Prompts the user to press 405, and performs an effect of opening the door as the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed (hereinafter also referred to as a door opening / closing effect). In this door opening / closing effect, there are cases where the door opens and the effect is successful, or the door fails to open and the effect fails.

  Even when the lottery result is a probable big hit, the door system effect, the seconds system effect, the timing system effect, and the jog effect may be failed. In this case, the door opening / closing effect can be made successful, and it can be informed that the change is certain. At this time, for example, an image (characters such as “probability change”) that can be recognized as probable by the player may be displayed on the opened door portion or the like.

  Furthermore, even when the lottery result is a probable big hit, this door opening / closing effect may also fail. In this case, the character transformation effect is executed in a predetermined round (for example, the final round) of the big hit game as the big hit game effect. This character transformation effect performs an effect that a specific character transforms and notifies that the lottery result is a probable big hit. During the character transformation effect, for example, an image (characters such as “probability change”) that can be recognized by the player as being probable may be displayed on the display screen.

  When the lottery result is a promising big hit, if it is informed that it is a promising big hit in the big hit game effect, the big hit game effect is ended. If the lottery result is a probable big hit, the probable big hit will be reported in one of the following patterns: a pattern that succeeds in the mini game, a pattern that succeeds in the door opening / closing effect, and a pattern that performs the character transformation effect. However, it is determined before the start of the mini game as to which of these patterns the probability variation jackpot is notified. In other words, it is determined in which pattern the probability variation jackpot is to be notified if the pressing operation unit 405 or the dial operation unit 401 is not operated by the player. Further, in the pattern in which the production is successful in the timing system production, the meter is more likely to rise when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed than in the pattern in which the production fails.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is usually a big hit, the door system effect, the seconds system effect, the timing system effect, and the jog effect and the door opening / closing effect are all failed, and the character transformation The effect during the big hit game is terminated without performing the effect. This allows the player to recognize that the lottery result is a normal big hit instead of a probability big hit. When any of the above door system effects, seconds system effects, timing system effects, and jog effects, and door opening / closing effects fail, even if these effects are displayed on the display screen Good. For example, “Production failure” is displayed on the display screen.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the last round (henceforth the notification last round) in which the notification effect during the big hit game in the big hit game can be realized is set to a predetermined round (for example, the tenth round). The notification final round may be the same as the final round in the jackpot game, or may be a round in an order before that. In addition, when a game ball wins a predetermined count number at the big winning opening 2103, one round ends. On the other hand, in the above four mini-games, the time when all the music flows (when a specific character sings a song) is set to a predetermined time (hereinafter also referred to as a music stipulated time). . Therefore, in the big hit game, when a state where a large number of game balls wins in the big winning opening 2103 continues in a short time, one round becomes short, and as a result, the big hit game time is shorter than the music regulation time. There is a possibility of becoming. Therefore, in such a case, when a successful presentation is scheduled to be performed in each mini-game, the mini-game being produced is forcibly terminated and an ending presentation is performed in the middle of the final notification round. That is, the probability change big hit is not notified in the mini game, but the probability change big hit is notified in the ending effect. In the ending effect, for example, characters such as “probability change” are displayed on the display screen. In the present embodiment, the music prescribed time is set to about 60 seconds.

  Further, the door opening / closing effect and the character transformation effect are executed when the mini game is a failure effect as described above. The time it takes for the mini game to fail and the door opening / closing effect and the character transformation effect to end is also referred to as a failure effect time. In a big hit game, if a state where a large number of game balls win in the big winning opening 2103 continues in a short time, one round becomes short, and as a result, the big hit game time becomes shorter than the failure effect time. There is a possibility. Therefore, in such a case, even if a successful effect is scheduled to be performed by the door opening / closing effect or the character transformation effect, the mini-game being effected is forcibly terminated and the ending effect is performed in the middle of the final notification round. That is, the door opening / closing effect and the character transformation effect are canceled, and the probable big hit notification is given by this ending effect.

  In the present embodiment, as the prior type selection effect, not only a roulette effect but also a ranking effect or a costume change effect may be performed. Therefore, it has a pattern that shifts to the above-mentioned effect during the big hit game (mini game) through these ranking effects or costume change effects.

  In the ranking effect, points are associated with a plurality of candidates, each of which is shown by associating a costume and music of a specific character, and points are added when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed by the player. This is an effect that finally selects candidates (music and costumes) according to the points. Similar to the roulette effect, these candidates are associated with one of the jackpot gaming notification effects (minigames) among the plurality of jackpot gaming notification effects (minigames). Therefore, when the game is shifted to the big hit game effect through the ranking effect, the mini game associated with the candidate selected in the ranking effect is executed as the big hit game effect.

  The costume change effect is an effect in which, for a specific character, the costumes associated with the music are changed one after another and determined as one costume (music). Similarly to the roulette effect, the costume (musical piece) of a specific character is associated with one big hit game notification effect (mini game) among a plurality of big hit game notification effects (mini game). Therefore, when the stage shifts to the jackpot game effect through the costume change effect, the mini game associated with the costume (music) determined in the costume change effect is executed as the jackpot game effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the case of the probability variation external advantageous state, if the probability variation is a big hit, the probability variation is not performed without performing the above-described series effect during the probability variation, that is, without performing the temporary stop effect for stopping in the normal big hit symbol stop mode. There is also a variable display pattern that realizes an effect of notifying a promising big hit in a big hit symbol stop mode.

  According to the above-mentioned series of effects during probability change, the jackpot game, which is an effect for notifying which of the normal jackpot or the probability change jackpot is won in the notification selection effect variation display pattern that is executed when winning a normal jackpot or a probability change jackpot Advance type selection that is an effect that selects the types of candidates (songs and costumes) associated with the medium notification effect (mini game) from among a plurality of types (songs and costumes) that have different expected expectations for winning the probable big hit The effect is performed as a changing effect before the big hit game starts. In other words, according to the above-described series of effects during probability change, in the notification selection effect variation display pattern, the types of notification effects (minigames) during the big hit game are changed to a plurality of types of jackpot games during the big hit game with different expected expectations of winning. A pre-type selection effect that is an effect selected from (mini game) is performed as a changing effect before the big hit game starts. In this way, in the effect during the change, the notification effect during the big hit game that notifies the player of “high probability (whether the normal big hit or the probable big hit has been won)” is high. Since the state of selecting the type (music and costume) is displayed, the player's interest in the display effect can be improved.

  In addition, according to the above-described series of effects during probability change, in the notification selection effect variation display pattern, a temporary stop effect that temporarily stops a combination of a prior type selection effect and a symbol that suggests that the lottery result is usually a big hit is realized. Accordingly, when the jackpot game is started, the notification effect (mini game) during the jackpot game selected in the advance type selection effect (for example, roulette effect) in the notification selection effect variation display pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Realize and notify which of the normal jackpot or the probable jackpot is won in the jackpot game informing effect. In this way, in contrast to an effect in which it is simply notified whether or not a promising big hit is won in the big hit game, the player's game for a series of display effects from the changing effect to the big hit game. It is possible to continue without disrupting the level of interest. As a result, the player can say, “Whether the winning probability is set to a high probability over a long period from the changing effect (pre-type selection effect) before the start of the big hit game to the middle of the big hit game. The game can be advanced while maintaining the sense of expectation such as “?” And looking forward to the notification effect during the big hit game selected in the advance type selection effect. As a result, the player's interest in the display effect can be improved.

  Players play a lot of time, usually in an external disadvantage. In this way, when the player spends a lot of time in a normal external disadvantageous state, the super-reach production time (hereinafter also referred to as super-reach production time), which has a high expectation of jackpot, makes it easier for the player to enjoy the production. Furthermore, it can be set to be a balanced time that is neither short nor too long (for example, about 80 to 90 seconds (FIG. 217: pattern numbers 45, 75, etc.)). On the other hand, according to the series of effects during the above-mentioned probability change, the player experiences the effects in the order of the advance type selection effect, the temporary stop effect, and the mini game. Here, as described above, the series effect changing partial effect time including the prior type selection effect and the temporary stop effect is about 24 seconds to 29 seconds, and the music stipulated time set for the mini game is as described above. Thus, it is about 60 seconds. Therefore, the production time until the mini game is finished in the series production during the probability change can be about 80 seconds to 90 seconds. In other words, the production time of the series production during the probability change can be approximately the same as the super reach production time. Accordingly, the player can preferably enjoy the series of effects during the probability change as an effect that is neither short nor too long.

If the probability of winning the jackpot is high (if the probability variation state), the probability of winning the lottery is higher than if the probability of winning the jackpot is low, so the player is usually in an external disadvantageous state. Compared to the time, rather than "whether or not to win", more interested in "whether or not the high probability continues (whether or not to win a promising big hit)".
According to the above series of effects during probability change, when the game state is won by a normal big hit or a probable big hit in a chance change external advantageous state (in the case of a probability change state) where the winning probability in the lottery is set to a high probability When an effect variation display pattern (for example, including a roulette effect) is executed, and then a big hit game is started, it is selected by a prior type selection effect (for example, a roulette effect) in the notification selection effect variation display pattern. The big hit game informing effect (mini game) is realized by the liquid crystal display device 1900, and it is informed whether the normal big hit or the probable big hit is won in the big hit game informing effect (mini game). In this way, in the case of the probability variation external advantageous state (in the probability variation state), the notification of “whether or not the high probability continues (whether or not to win the probability variation big hit)”, which is particularly interested by the player (normal hit and probability variation) Notification of which one of the jackpots was won) is performed through a series of effects over a long period from the changing performance (prior type selection effect) before the start of the jackpot game to the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the display effects from the changing effect to the winning game in the probability-variant external advantageous state (in the probability changing state).

As described above, in the probability fluctuation state, the player usually has a higher probability of continuing (whether or not he / she wins a probable big hit) than “whether or not” in comparison with the external disadvantageous state. ) ".
According to the above-mentioned series of effects during probability change, the time required for the prior type selection effect and the temporary stop effect (series effect change partial effect time), that is, from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, in the case of the probability change external advantageous state (in the probability fluctuation state) The time to change stop (change time) is a relatively short time (for example, shorter than the super reach production time) (see FIGS. 217 and 218). Then, in the production from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the variation stop (temporary stop production), the final conclusion as to whether or not the winning promising big hit is won is not informed, but is informed for the first time in the subsequent big hit game effect. . In this way, if you win the jackpot, the fluctuation time will end soon and you will enter the jackpot game, and the high interest rate of the player will be high or not (whether or not you will win the promising jackpot ) "Is quickly transferred to the effect during the big hit game, so that it is possible to give the player a refreshing feeling. Then, the player is informed of the final conclusion as to whether or not he / she has won the promising big hit, through a series of flow from the start of the change of decorative symbols to the stoppage of temporary change (temporary stop production) to the big hit game production. It can be enjoyed as a series of performances. In addition, when the lottery result is out of place in the probability variation external advantageous state, a shortened variation effect is performed, and an effect of stopping immediately after the decoration symbol variation is performed. In this way, in the probable external advantageous state, the extra performance is eliminated and the big hit lottery is executed quickly (quickly), so that it is possible to quickly shift to the big hit game during which the player is highly interested. A high refreshing feeling can be given to the player.

  According to the above-mentioned series of effects during probability change, when a prior type selection effect (for example, a roulette effect) is realized, if the player does not operate (presses) the pressing operation unit 405, a plurality of displayed candidates ( Since the candidate with the lowest probability of probability variation is selected from among the music) and the costume), the player who wants to win the probability variation jackpot will operate the pressing operation unit 405, that is, actively participate in the production. Can be urged. Further, since it is possible to provide the player with the recognition that “the operation content changes when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated”, the player can operate the pressing operation unit 405 even in the notification operation during the big hit game realized in the big hit game. Can be encouraged. According to the above-described series effect during probability change, in response to such a player's expectation, the content of the effect is changed by the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 when the notification effect during the big hit game is executed. With the above configuration, compared to the case where there is no prior type selection effect in which the probability variation expectation suggested according to the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is not present, the player is more active in the prior type selection effect and the big hit game notification effect. Can promote active participation. In this way, the player's interest in the display effect can be improved over a long period from the changing effect to the big hit game.

  Note that, in both the above-described advance type selection effect and the jackpot game effect (mini game and door opening / closing effect), the player can operate the pressing operation unit 405 to participate in the game. For example, a mode in which the player can participate in the game by operating the pressing operation unit 405 may be applied only to some or all of the prior type selection effects, You may make it apply only to part or all.

  The series of effects during the probability change is such that the game state is started when the probability change external advantage is not limited to this. For example, the game state is a normal external disadvantage state, a normal external advantage state, And, it may be started in any of the cases when the probability variation external disadvantageous state.

  The images displayed as candidates in the advance type selection effect in the above-mentioned series of effects during the probability change are not limited to music (song name) and costumes, but may be any image that can identify the type of effect during the big hit game. For example, when the character that appears for each type of effect during the big hit game is different, the character may be displayed as a candidate.

  In the above-described series production during probability change, in the prior type selection production, the types of candidates (music and costumes) associated with the big hit game announcement production (mini game) are selected from a plurality of types of candidates. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the prior type selection effect, a type of an image (hereinafter also referred to as a suggestion image) that directly suggests a notification effect during a big hit game (mini game) is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion images. Also good. The suggestion image may be, for example, a door image that suggests a door system effect or a jog image that suggests a jog effect. In addition, the suggestion image may be, for example, a character that directly indicates the notification effect during the big hit game such as “door effect” or “jog effect”.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree associated with a certain performance indicates a high possibility that the lottery result is a jackpot when the performance is realized. Similarly, the probability change expectation level associated with a certain effect indicates the possibility that the lottery result is a probability change big hit when the effect is realized.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a function expressed as the following technical idea.

[Technology 1]
A game board in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number when the game ball passes through a predetermined passage provided in the game board;
A game state control means for controlling a normal game state and an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
A transition determination result display means for displaying a result of the transition determination to the advantageous gaming state determined based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means by displaying the predetermined symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display;
When the variation time of the symbol is controlled and controlled by the gaming state control means to the advantageous gaming state, the variation in which the average variation time of the symbol is shorter than that when the normal gaming state is controlled Display control means;
Effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect during the variation of the symbol;
While the symbol displayed on the determination result display means is variably displayed, the game ball temporarily stores the random number acquired by passing through the passage, and the stored number is set as the reserved number. Holding number storage means;
When the number of holds in the holding number storage means is a small number of holdings while being controlled to the advantageous gaming state by the gaming state control means, the variable display device is more than when the number of holdings is larger than the number of small holdings. A variation time extending means for increasing the average variation time of the symbol displayed on the screen,
By determining the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means based on the number of times that the number of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage means in the advantageous gaming state becomes an infinite number of reservations, the variation of the symbol About time, the creative means that can suppress the easy predictability of the production at the time of the number of the small number of reservations, although it is common regardless of the number of times of the number of the small number of reservations,
A gaming machine comprising:

  The gaming machine according to the above technical idea 1 includes a gaming board (gaming board 4) in which a gaming area (gaming area 1100) in which gaming balls can flow down, and a predetermined passage port provided in the gaming board ( Random number acquisition means (main control board 4100) for acquiring a random number when a game ball passes through the start opening 2101, 2102). In addition, after the game state control means (main control board 4100) for controlling the normal game state and the advantageous game state (probability fluctuation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, the predetermined symbols are variably displayed. And a transition determination result display means (liquid crystal display device 1900) for displaying the result of the transition determination to the advantageous gaming state determined based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means. Furthermore, when the variation time of the symbol is controlled and controlled to the advantageous gaming state by the gaming state control unit, the variation display control unit which makes the average variation time of the symbol shorter than when controlled to the normal gaming state (Main control board 4100) and effect execution means (liquid crystal display device 1900) for executing a predetermined effect during the variation of the symbol. Furthermore, while the symbols displayed on the determination result display means are variably displayed, the random number acquired by the game ball passing through the passage opening is temporarily stored, and the number of holds is the number of the holds. When the number of reservations in the storage number storage means is the minimum number of reservations while the storage unit (main control board 4100) and the gaming state control unit are controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the number of reservations is larger than the number of minimum reservations As compared with the time, a fluctuation time extending means (main control board 4100) for increasing the average fluctuation time of symbols displayed on the fluctuation display device is provided. Then, by determining the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means based on the number of times the number of reservations stored in the reservation number storage means in the advantageous gaming state becomes the number of infinite reservations, the variation time of the symbol Includes a creative means (main control board 4100) that can suppress the easy predictability of the production at the time of the small number of holdings, although it is common regardless of the number of times of the small number of holdings. .

  In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, when the symbol variation time is controlled and controlled in the advantageous gaming state, the average variation time of the symbol is shorter than when controlled in the normal gaming state. . For this reason, the digestion time of the advantageous game state can be shortened, and a sense of superiority can be given to the player by shifting to the advantageous game state in a short time. By the way, if the change time of the symbol is shortened when the number of holdings is an infinite number of holdings during the advantageous gaming state, the symbols often do not change. When the symbol does not fluctuate, it is impossible to have a sense of expectation for the big hit, which may cause a decrease in interest. Therefore, in the case where the number of holdings is a small number of holdings, the fluctuation of the symbols occurs by increasing the average fluctuation time of the symbols displayed on the variable display device than when the number of holdings is larger than the number of holdings. The situation that disappears is suppressed.

  However, even if the average change time of the symbol is increased when the number of reservations is a small number of reservations, if the super reach effect is always performed at the time of the change of the symbol, for example, there is an opportunity to generate a similar super reach effect. There is a risk that the number of players will get tired of the players and cause a decrease in interest. Furthermore, even when a super reach production is performed in which the possibility of shifting to the big hit gaming state is increased at times other than this small number of reserves, the possibility of shifting to the big hit gaming state is not increased here, and the player May lead to a decline in interest.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, by determining the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means based on the number of times that the number of reservations has become a small number of reservations, Although it is common regardless of the number of times that the number of reservations is small, the easy predictability of the production at the time of the number of small reservations is suppressed. For this reason, since the selection ratio of the production can be changed depending on the number of times that the number of holdings is small, for example, a situation in which the player gets bored due to an increase in the chances that the same super reach production occurs. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, even if a super reach production is performed, the situation that the possibility of transition to the big hit gaming state is not high can be reduced here, the feeling of boredom given to the player can be alleviated, and the player's interest Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, “the number of on-hold reservations” means a case where there is no reservation number, a case where the number of reservations is small, or a number of reservations smaller than the maximum number of reservations. The case where the number of holds is small means that the number of holds is less than half of the maximum number of holds, for example. Specifically, when the maximum number of holds is 4, 1 or 2 is a small number of holds, and 0 is a no-hold number. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration and operation of the pachinko gaming machine according to these technical ideas will be mainly described.

[5. Expectation suggestion]
The expected suggestion effect which is a characteristic function in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. The expected suggestion effect is executed using the peripheral control board 4010, the upper movable effect unit 3300, the lower movable effect unit 3600, the rotating body unit 3410, and the like (see FIG. 166). The expected suggestion effect is the number of holdings relating to the reception of game balls to the first starting opening 2101 (FIG. 109) displayed on the first special symbol memory display 1184 (see FIG. 103) (hereinafter referred to as “first starting opening holding number”). (Also called). Furthermore, it is executed according to the number of holdings (hereinafter also referred to as “second starting port holding number”) related to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2102 (FIG. 109) displayed on the second special symbol memory display 1187. Is done. By executing this expectation suggestion effect, the expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state corresponding to the provision of the advantage described in the solving means is suggested. The peripheral control board 4010, the upper movable effect unit 3300, the lower movable effect unit 3600, the rotating body unit 3410, and the like correspond to movable bodies that can be changed to predetermined modes described in the solving means. Further, the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 correspond to the passing ports described in the solving means.

[5-1. Reservation ball image]
In addition to being displayed on the special symbol memory displays 1184 and 1187, the number of reserved starting openings is also displayed on the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, which is the effect display means described in the solving means, as shown in FIGS. 224 and 225. Is displayed. The display image of the reserved ball image is different between the normal game state and the probability variation game state (probability variation state). First, the display of the reserved ball image in the normal gaming state will be described.

  During the normal gaming state, the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 and the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 are also displayed at the lower position of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The first reserved ball images H11 to H14 are displayed on the lower left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 are displayed on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  As for the display of the first reserved ball images H11 to H14, for example, the first start port hold number is “1”, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on, and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off. When it is, the first reserved ball first image H11 is displayed. In addition, when the first start opening reservation number is “2” and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both lit, the first reserved ball first image H11 and the first reserved ball second image H12 are displayed. Is displayed. Furthermore, when the number of first start port reservations is “3”, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks, and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit, the first reserved ball first image H111. A first reserved ball second image H12 and a first reserved ball third image H13 are displayed. Then, when the first start port retention number is “4” and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both flashing, the first reserved ball first image H11, the first reserved ball second image H12, A first reserved ball third image H13 and a first reserved ball fourth image H14 are displayed. In addition, when the first start opening reservation number is “0” and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both turned off, the first reserved ball image is not displayed.

  Further, regarding the display of the number of second start opening reservations, for example, the number of second start opening reservation is "1", the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off. When there is, the second reserved ball first image H21 is displayed. In addition, when the second start opening reservation number is “2” and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are both lit, the second reserved ball first image H21 and the second reserved ball second image H22 are displayed. Is displayed. Furthermore, when the number of second start opening reservations is “3”, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks, and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit, the second reserved ball first image H21. The second reserved ball second image H22 and the second reserved ball third image H23 are displayed. Then, when the second start opening retention number is “4” and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are both flashing, the second reserved ball first image H21, the second reserved ball second image H22, A second reserved ball third image H23 and a second reserved ball fourth image H24 are displayed. It should be noted that when the second start opening reservation number is “0” and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are both turned off, the second reserved ball image is not displayed. In addition, during the normal gaming state, since the game balls are rarely received at the second start port 2102, the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 are rarely displayed.

  During the probability change gaming state, as shown in FIG. 225, the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 and the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 are displayed side by side at the lower center position of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The reserved ball image in the probability variation gaming state is represented by an image imitating a coin. Here, the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 are displayed on the left side, and the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 are displayed on the right side thereof. Further, when the number of second reserved sphere images is three or less, the first reserved sphere image is displayed following the right side of the second reserved sphere image displayed on the rightmost side.

  The first reserved sphere images H11 to H14 are displayed in the form of spheres of the same color in principle. The second reserved ball images H21 to H24 are also displayed in principle in the form of spheres of the same color, and the color is different from the colors of the first reserved ball images H11 to H14. For this reason, the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 and the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 are distinguished by the difference in color. Moreover, about the 2nd reservation ball image, when the expectation suggestion effect (prefetch effect) demonstrated later is performed, the color of the display is displayed with the color different from the color at the time of principle.

[5-2. Movable movement]
When executing the expected suggestion effect, the upper movable effect unit 3300, the lower movable effect unit 3600, and the rotating body unit 3410 move. The expected suggestion effect progresses step by step as the reserved balls are digested, and in each step, the lower movable effect unit 3600, the rotating body unit 3410, and the upper movable effect unit 3300 move sequentially. As described above, when the expectation suggestion effect progresses step by step, the progress step is expressed by using the accessory, thereby making it possible to clarify the progress step of the stepwise progress.

[5-3. Expectation suggestion behavior]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 226 to FIG. 230, the operation procedure of the expected suggestion effect will be described. The expected suggestion effect can be performed in any of the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the short-time gaming state, but here, a case where it is performed in the normal gaming state will be described. The expectation suggestion effect is executed as a part of the prefetching effect, and the expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state is suggested depending on the presence or absence of the expectation suggestion effect or the content thereof.

  The main control board 4100 (see FIG. 169) acquires various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a big hit symbol random number in accordance with the acceptance of the gaming machine into the start winning ports 2101 and 2102 and stores the acquired random number. The main control board 4100 corresponds to a random number acquisition unit and a random number storage unit described in the solution unit. The main control board 4100 executes a preceding determination process based on the last acquired random numbers, and determines whether or not to execute an expected suggestion effect as a prefetch effect. The main control MPU 4100a determines whether to execute the expected suggestion effect, and then transmits a winning notification command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 169). In the peripheral control board 4010, when the received winning notification command is a command having a content for executing the expected suggestion effect, the expectation suggestion effect is executed. The main control board 4100 corresponds to the advance provision means described in the solution means.

[5-3A. Expectation suggestion effect by holding image]
The peripheral control board 4010 moves the upper movable presentation unit 3300, the lower movable presentation unit 3600, and the rotating body unit 3410 when it is determined that the main control board 4100 provides an indication of the transition to the big hit gaming state by the prefetching presentation. Thus, the execution area of the expected suggestion can be made variable. Also, the peripheral control board 4010 can suggest the transition to the big hit gaming state by the production by the liquid crystal display device 1900, but also suggests by the form of the upper movable production unit 3300, the lower movable production unit 3600, and the rotating body unit 3410. Possible. Further, the peripheral control board 4010 can change the execution region where the expectation is performed by changing the mode of the movable body when the hold is digested. In this way, the peripheral control board executes the expectation suggestion effect. The peripheral control board 4010 corresponds to the suggestion area expanding unit described in the solving unit.

  The peripheral control board 4010 first changes the forms of the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as an expected suggestion effect. This corresponds to the suggestion area expanding means described in the solving means. Specifically, when the expected suggestion effect is performed when the number of first start opening reservations is 4, for example, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), all of the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 are substantially rectangular. Change the image from the image to the image imitating a monster. Thus, the expectation suggestion effect is started by changing the form of the first reserved ball images H11 to H14. While the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 are displayed, the result of the lottery based on the reception of the game balls to the first start opening corresponding to these first reserved ball images H11 to H14 (hereinafter, “ "First start opening lottery result") is displayed.

  In the expected suggestion effect, when the display of the result of the lottery at this time ends, as shown in FIG. Is the state in which the three first reserved sphere first images H11 to the first reserved sphere third image H13 are displayed. While this display is being performed, the result of the lottery based on the acceptance of the first starting opening of the holding ball previously displayed as the first holding ball first image H11 is displayed. If a game ball is subsequently received at the first starting port and a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100, the display of the first reserved ball image is sequentially increased.

  Subsequently, when the display of the lottery result at this time ends, as shown in FIG. 227 (a), the display of the leftmost first reserved ball third image H13 is erased, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 has Two first reserved balls first image H11 and first reserved ball second image H12 are displayed. Further, when the display of the lottery result at this time is finished, as shown in FIG. 227 (b), the display of the leftmost first reserved ball image H12 is deleted, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 has one first display. The one reserved ball first image H11 is displayed. After that, when the display of the first start opening lottery result at this time is finished, the display of the first reserved ball first image H11 is erased, and the corresponding reserved ball previously displayed as the first reserved ball first image H11 is dealt with. The first starting port lottery result to be displayed is displayed.

  When the expected suggestion effect is not executed, the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 are simple substantially rectangular images and are displayed as relatively plain images, so that the sense of exaltation given to the player can be reduced. . On the other hand, the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 when the expectation suggestion effect is executed make the player have a higher expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state because the appearance is flashy. Can do.

  Further, the expected suggestion effect is executed by using an accessory such as the lower movable effect unit 3600, the rotating body unit 3410, and the upper movable effect unit 3300 in addition to changing the form of the first reserved ball images H11 to H14. Hereinafter, the relationship between the progress of the expectation suggestion and the movement of the accessory will be described.

[5-3A. Expectation suggestion by an accessory
Assume that the expectation suggestion effect is started and, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), all of the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 are changed from a substantially rectangular image to an image imitating a monster. At this time, an accessory such as the movable effect unit 3600 is left unmovable. Next, the expectation suggestion progresses, and as shown in FIG. 226 (b), the display of the first reserved ball fourth image H14 is erased, and the first reserved ball first image H11 to the first reserved ball third image. In the state where H13 is displayed, of the four elevating decoration bodies 3611 (see FIG. 165) in the lower movable effect unit 3600, the two elevating decoration bodies 3611 arranged outside are moved. At this time, the movable manner of the elevating decorative body can be moved up and down, for example, or rotated around an axis along the vertical direction. Moreover, the LED provided on the lifting / lowering decorative body substrate 3621 disposed immediately below the lifting / lowering decorative body 3611 can emit light to decorate the lifting / lowering decorative body 3611. As described above, by decorating the elevating decoration body 3611 in various manners, it is possible to increase the expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  Subsequently, the expected suggestion effect proceeds, and as shown in FIG. 227 (a), the display of the first reserved ball third image H13 is erased, and the first reserved ball first image H11 and the first reserved ball second image. When H12 is displayed, all four elevating decorative bodies 3611 in the lower movable effect unit 3600 are moved. At this time, the movable decoration 3611 can be moved in the above-described manner or can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, when the expectation suggestion progresses and the display of the first reserved ball second image H12 is erased and the first reserved ball first image H11 is displayed as shown in FIG. All of the four elevating decorative bodies 3611 in the effect unit 3600 are moved, and the six rotating decorative bodies 3410A in the rotating body unit 3410 are moved. As a movable aspect of the rotating decorative body 3410A, the rotating decorative body 3410A can be rotationally driven, slid, or decorated with light emission. Thus, by decorating the rotating decoration body 3410A in various modes, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  Thereafter, when the display of the first reserved ball first image H11 is erased and the first reserved ball image is not displayed, the four elevating decorative bodies 3611 in the lower movable effect unit 3600 and the six in the rotating body unit 3410 are displayed. The two rotating decoration bodies 3410A are moved, and the character body 3311 (see FIG. 131) in the upper movable effect unit 3300 (see FIG. 166) is moved. As a movable aspect of the character body 3311, the character body 3311 can be rotationally driven, moved up and down, and decorated with light emission. In this way, by decorating the character body 3311 in various ways, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  As described above, by executing the expectation suggestion effect, the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 change from a simple substantially rectangular image to an image imitating a monster. For this reason, the expectation that the 1st start mouth lottery result corresponding to the 1st reservation ball images H11-H14 will be changed to a big hit game state can be expanded.

  Furthermore, in executing the expected suggestion effect, the display mode of the first reserved ball image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed, and the lower movable effect unit 3600, the rotating body unit 3410, and the upper movable effect unit 3300 are moved. ing. For this reason, the execution area when the expected suggestion effect is executed is expanded from the inside of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the outside thereof. For this reason, diversification of the execution pattern at the time of performing an expectation suggestion effect can be achieved, and the fall of the interest of a game can be suppressed. In addition, since the execution area of the expected suggestion effect is expanded, the player's viewpoint can be diffused. For this reason, when an effect is executed in a wide range, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the effect, and this can contribute to the suppression of the decrease in the interest of that effect.

  Further, in the above-mentioned expected suggestion effect, whenever the display of the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 is changed, in other words, whenever the expectation suggestion effect progresses and the first start port lottery result is displayed, the accessory that moves. Will increase. Moreover, the movable accessory increases stepwise according to the change of the first reserved ball image. In this way, the expectation suggestion effect progresses in stages, expressing how the possibility gradually increases as the possibility of transition to the big hit gaming state (giving advantage) increases. can do. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state can be raised.

  In the above example, the case where the expected suggestion effect is executed is described for the first start port lottery result in the normal gaming state, but the expectation suggestion effect can also be executed in other cases. For example, an expected suggestion effect can be executed for a lottery result (hereinafter referred to as a “second starter lottery result”) based on acceptance of a game ball at the second starter in the normal gaming state, Expectation suggestion effects can also be executed for the first start port start lottery result or the second start port lottery result during the short-time gaming state. Alternatively, the expected suggestion effect can be executed by overlapping in these states. Hereinafter, an example of the expectation suggestion effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described.

  When the game ball is received at the second starting port from the state where the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 and the second reserved ball images H21 to H23 are displayed in the probability variation gaming state, FIG. 228 (a). As shown in FIG. 5, the second reserved ball fourth image H24 is displayed. At this time, when the expected suggestion effect is started, the second reserved ball fourth image H24 displayed last is different from the other second reserved ball first image H21 to the second reserved ball third image H23. Is displayed. In this example, the second reserved ball fourth image H24 has the same shape, but is displayed in a different color from the other second reserved ball first image H21 to the second reserved ball third image H23.

  Next, the expectation suggestion progresses, and as shown in FIG. 228 (b), the display of the second reserved ball fourth image H24 is erased, and the second reserved ball first image H21 to the second reserved ball third image. In the state where H23 is displayed, of the four elevating decoration bodies 3611 (see FIG. 165) in the lower movable effect unit 3600, the two elevating decoration bodies 3611 arranged outside are moved. At this time, the movable manner of the elevating decorative body can be moved up and down, for example, or rotated around an axis along the vertical direction. Moreover, the LED provided on the lifting / lowering decorative body substrate 3621 disposed immediately below the lifting / lowering decorative body 3611 can emit light to decorate the lifting / lowering decorative body 3611. As described above, by decorating the elevating decoration body 3611 in various manners, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state. Further, on the right side of the second reserved ball images H21 to H24, the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 are displayed. As these first reserved ball images H11 to H14, colors that are common to each other are displayed, but are different from the colors used in the second reserved ball images H21 to H24. The difference between these colors represents the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 and the first reserved ball images H11 to H14.

  The display of the second start lottery result is executed prior to the display of the first start lottery result. For this reason, when the display of the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 remains, the second reserved ball image is gradually erased while the display of the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 remains, and an expected suggestion effect is produced. Progress. Note that the display of the second start-out lottery result may be executed prior to the display of the first start-up lottery result even in the normal game state other than in the probability variation game state or the short-time game state.

  Subsequently, the expectation suggestion effect proceeds, and as shown in FIG. 229 (a), the display of the second reserved ball third image H23 is erased, and the second reserved ball first image H21 and the second reserved ball second image. When H22 is displayed, all the four elevating decorative bodies 3611 in the lower movable effect unit 3600 are moved. At this time, the movable decoration 3611 can be moved in the above-described manner or can be decorated with light emission.

  Furthermore, when the expectation suggestion progresses and the display of the second reserved ball second image H22 is erased and the second reserved ball first image H21 is displayed as shown in FIG. All four elevating decorative bodies 3611 in the effect unit 3600 are moved, and the six rotating decorative bodies 3410A in the rotating body unit 3410 are moved. As a movable aspect of the rotating decorative body 3410A, the rotating decorative body 3410A can be rotationally driven, slid, or decorated with light emission. Thus, by decorating the rotating decoration body 3410A in various modes, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230, when the display of the second reserved ball first images H21 to H24 is erased and the second reserved ball image is not displayed, four elevating decorations in the lower movable effect unit 3600 are displayed. The six rotating decorative bodies 3410A in the body 3611 and the rotating body unit 3410 are moved, and the character body 3311 (see FIG. 131) in the upper movable effect unit 3300 (see FIG. 166) is moved. At this time, the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 are displayed. As a movable aspect of the character body 3311, the character body 3311 can be rotationally driven, moved up and down, and decorated with light emission. In this way, by decorating the character body 3311 in various ways, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  Thus, by executing the expectation suggestion effect, the colors of the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 change. For this reason, the expectation that the 2nd start mouth lottery result corresponding to the 2nd reservation ball images H21-H24 will be changed to a big hit game state can be expanded. Further, in executing the expected suggestion effect, the display mode of the second reserved ball image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed, and the lower movable effect unit 3600, the rotating body unit 3410, and the upper movable effect unit 3300 are moved. ing. For this reason, the execution area when the expected suggestion effect is executed is expanded from the inside of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the outside thereof. For this reason, diversification of the execution pattern at the time of performing an expectation suggestion effect can be achieved, and the fall of the interest of a game can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the expectation suggestion effect, an effect using a reserved ball image or an accessory is performed, and the expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state is increased. In addition, the expectation suggestion effect can be executed in a mode other than the above mode. For example, in the above example, the expected suggestion effect is started when the retained ball fourth images H14 and H24 are displayed, but the other retained ball first images H11 and H21 to the retained ball third images H13 and H23 are displayed. An expectation suggestion effect can be started when displayed.

  Further, after the reserved ball fourth images H14 and H24 are displayed, the expected suggestion effect can be started when the reserved images are erased and the displayed reserved images are reduced. For example, when a substantially rectangular image is displayed as the first reserved ball first image H11 to the first reserved ball fourth image H14, the first reserved ball fourth image H14 is erased and the first reserved ball first image H11. When the first reserved ball third image H13 is displayed, it can be changed to an image imitating a monster as the reserved ball image. Furthermore, in the above example, when the display of the first reserved ball images H11 to H14 is changed, the entire first reserved ball image is changed to an image imitating a monster, but part of the images It is also possible to change only. Conversely, when changing the display of the second reserved sphere images H21 to H24, only the color of the last displayed second reserved sphere fourth image H24 is changed as a part of the second reserved sphere image. However, it is also possible to change the entire second reserved ball image. In addition, it is possible to change the display of an appropriate reserved ball image.

  Furthermore, as for the mode of change of the reserved sphere image, the shape of the first reserved sphere image is changed, and the color of the second reserved sphere image is changed. (Form) can be changed. Also, the mode of change is not limited to one type, but can be changed to various types. At this time, the degree of expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state can be changed according to the mode and timing of the change. On the other hand, in addition to the shape of the holding sphere, various aspects of effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be changed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the expectation suggestion effect is performed by increasing the number of movable objects each time the start port lottery result is displayed, but the expectation suggestion effect can also be performed in other modes. For example, in the above example, when performing the expectation suggestion, the three types of actors of the upper movable production unit 3300, the lower movable production unit 3600, and the rotating body unit 3410 are moved. It can also be moved.

  Furthermore, it can also be set as the aspect from which a degree of expectation differs according to the movable aspect about these each accessory. For example, in the above example, the expected suggestion effect is performed by moving the accessory in the order of the lower movable effect unit 3600, the rotating body unit 3410, and the upper movable effect unit 3300. Following the lower movable effect unit 3600, the upper movable effect unit 3300 can be moved.

  In addition, the degree of expectation of the transition to the big hit gaming state can be changed in the order in which these actors start moving. For example, when the rotating body unit 4100 moves first, the probability of transition to the big hit gaming state can be made higher than when the lower movable effect unit 3600 moves first. Of course, other combinations may be used in relation to the order of movement of each accessory and the probability of transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  At this time, in the expected suggestion effect, not all of the lower movable effect unit 3600, the rotating body unit 3410, and the upper movable effect unit 3300 can be moved, but only a part of them can be moved. For example, after the lower movable effect unit 3600 is moved, the expected suggestion effect can be ended without the rotator unit 3410 and the upper movable effect unit 3300 moving thereafter. At this time, it is possible to increase the probability of transition to the big hit gaming state when more actors move. In this case, after the expectation suggestion effect is started, it is possible to make the player expect that more actors move, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Furthermore, in this case, the higher the probability of transition to the big hit gaming state, the larger the area, the expected suggestion effect is executed. For this reason, an effect with a high degree of expectation can be executed in a wide range, and a flashy effect according to the degree of expectation can be easily executed.

  Furthermore, it is possible to change the order in which the accessory moves. In the above example, the actors are moved in the order of the lower movable effect unit 3600, the rotator unit 3410, and the upper movable effect unit 3300. However, for example, the lower movable effect unit 3600, the upper movable effect unit 3300, The accessory can also be moved in the order of the rotating body unit 3410.

  Further, the probability of transition to the big hit gaming state can be changed according to the order of movement of the accessory. For example, the lower movable effect unit 3600, the upper movable effect unit 3300, and the rotating body unit 3410 are used in this order, rather than the case where the accessory is moved in the order of the lower movable effect unit 3600, the rotating body unit 3410, and the upper movable effect unit 3300. When moving an object, the probability of transition to a big hit gaming state can be increased. In this case, after the expected suggestion effect is started when the lower movable effect unit 3600 starts moving, the degree of expectation of the transition to the big hit game state changes depending on which of the rotating body unit 3410 and the upper movable effect unit 3300 moves. . For this reason, it is possible to increase the degree of attention as to which of the actors starts moving first, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The degree of expectation may be changed depending on the relationship between the reserved ball image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the movable accessory. For example, in a mode in which the lower movable effect unit 3600 starts moving when the reserved ball third images H13 and H23 are displayed, the lower movable effect unit 3600 is movable when the reserved ball second images H12 and H22 are displayed. The probability of transition to the big hit gaming state can be made higher than the mode of starting the game. As described above, the degree of expectation changes depending on the relationship between the reserved sphere image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the movable accessory, etc., thereby increasing the degree of attention to the movable accessory and the reserved sphere image. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the entertainment.

  Alternatively, it is possible to execute only the expected suggestion effect using the accessory without executing the expectation suggestion effect for the reserved ball image. As an effect using an accessory, for example, a normal effect executed when displaying whether it is a big hit or off, but in the same effect mode, the accessory is actually used as a pre-reading effect. By preparing an effect, even if the expected suggestion effect is not executed in the reserved ball image, the player can have an expectation that “the expectation suggestion effect is being executed”. Can do. In addition, the case where the expected suggestion effect is executed by the reserved ball image and the accessory and the case where the expectation suggestion effect is performed only by the reserved ball image or the accessory can be used in combination. In this case, for example, after the expectation suggestion effect by the reserved ball image is started, the player can be expected to start the expectation suggestion effect by the accessory, and the decrease in the interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when an expected suggestion effect is executed by changing an accessory step by step, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for a big hit gaming state according to the progress stage. For example, assuming that the expectation suggestion effect in three stages is executed, the first stage and the third stage have a common movable mode, but the second stage movable mode is different from each other. The probability of transition to the gaming state can be changed. In this case, if you do not check the moving flow of the actors that change in stages, it will be difficult to recognize the possibility of transition to the big hit gaming state, so you can make the expectation suggestive effect noticeable, and the amount of interest will decrease Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above example, the granting of the advantage is a transition to the big hit gaming state. However, as long as it gives a state advantageous to the player, the mode other than the transition to the big hit gaming state is set. You can also. For example, although there is no transition of the gaming state, etc., the electric chew can be easily opened, or in the case of a feather game machine, the feather accessory can be easily opened.

[6. Production control during probabilistic gaming]
Next, the effect control when the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 are turned off among the effects in the probability variation external advantageous state in which the time-saving function is operating in the probability variation game state will be described. Also, the same effect control can be performed in the normal external advantageous state where the gaming state is not the probability variation state but the short-time gaming state. In this example, the effect control described here is not executed during the probability variation external disadvantageous state and the normal external disadvantageous state, but the same effect control can also be executed in these states. Various game states such as a probabilistic external advantageous state (probable variation gaming state), a probable variation external disadvantageous state, a normal external advantageous state (short-time gaming state), and a normal external disadvantageous state (normal gaming state) are controlled by the main control board 4100. The The main control board 4100 corresponds to the game state control means described in the solving means.

  The production in the probability variation gaming state is performed by the peripheral control board 4010. Peripheral control board 4010 controls the effect displayed on liquid crystal display device 1900 based on a winning notification command, an effect command, etc. transmitted from main control board 4100. In the main control board 4100, when a game ball is received at the first start port 2101, various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number are acquired and the start of the variable display is suspended (stored). The number of holds is stored. Also, when a game ball is received at the second start port 2102, various random numbers such as jackpot determination random numbers are acquired, and the number of second special symbols on which the start of variable display is suspended (stored) is also stored. I remember it. The main control board 4100 corresponds to a random number acquisition unit and a hold number storage unit described in the solution unit. The start ports 2101 and 2102 correspond to predetermined passage ports described in the solution means.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 displays the contents of the presentation based on the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols and the presence / absence of big hits determined by the first winning / decision determining means 4506. decide. The main control board 4100 transmits the determined contents of the effect to the peripheral control board 4010 as an effect command.

  The peripheral control board 4100 controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display various effects and whether there is a big hit based on various commands such as effect commands transmitted from the main control board 4100. The liquid crystal display device 1900 that displays various effects and the presence / absence of big hits corresponds to the transition determination result display means described in the solution means.

  In the control executed on the main control board 4100, the display time of the start port lottery result is shortened on average on average during the positive variation external advantageous state than in the normal external disadvantageous state. For this reason, the start port lottery result display proceeds quickly during the probability variation external advantageous state. Since the game balls are frequently received at the second start port 2102 during the probability change external advantageous state, the display of the start port lottery result can be quickly advanced to speed up the digestion of the probability change external advantageous state. In addition, when the number of first start port hold and the number of second start port hold is not 0 during the probable external advantageous state, a lottery based on the acceptance of game balls to the first start port (hereinafter referred to as “first start port lottery”). The lottery based on the reception of the game ball at the second starting port (hereinafter referred to as “second starting port lottery”) is executed with higher priority. When either the first start port hold number or the second start port hold number is not 0, the start port lottery for the start port hold number that is not 0 is executed.

  Further, when the second start port lottery is executed and the second start port hold number is 0, the second start port hold number is not 0 as the display time of the second start port lottery result. Often times longer times are selected. For this reason, the average fluctuation time when the second start port hold number is 0 is set longer than the average change time when the second start port hold number is not zero. The second start lottery is often more advantageous to the player than the first start port lottery, and if the first start lottery is executed during the probable external advantage state, the second start lottery is executed depending on the result May be more disadvantageous to the player than if For this reason, since the player may not desire the first starting lottery during the probable external advantageous state, if the first starting lottery is executed during the probable external advantageous state, there is a possibility that the interest will be reduced. .

  In this regard, the second start port lottery result is displayed while the second start port lottery result is displayed by lengthening the display time of the second start port lottery result. There is an acceptance of a game ball in the mouth, and the possibility that the number of the second start opening reservations increases can be increased. As a result, it is possible to reduce the opportunity to perform the first opening lottery during the probable external advantageous state, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. The main control board 4100 averages the display time of the start-up lottery result during the probability variation external advantageous state shorter than that during the normal external disadvantageous state. The main control board 4100 corresponds to the variable display control means described in the solving means.

  In main control means 4100, the contents of effects executed in liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the number of times the number of holds stored in the number-of-holds storage means in the probability-variant external advantageous state becomes zero, which is the minimum number of holds. With regard to the variation time of the symbol, it is common regardless of the number of times that the number of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage means becomes the number of small number of reservations. Easy predictability is suppressed. The main control means 4100 corresponds to the creative means described in the solving means.

  For example, when a long time is selected as the display time of the second start port lottery result, an effect that the second start port lottery result is a big hit, such as a super reach variation, is often executed, During the state, when the second start port hold number is zero based on the number of times that the second start port hold number becomes zero during the certain variation external advantageous state (hereinafter also referred to as “hold zero number”) ( The effect at the time of displaying the second starting port lottery result (hereinafter also referred to as “time 0”) is determined as follows. The peripheral control board 4010 stores an effect determination table shown in FIG. 231 in order to determine the effect at the time of holding 0, and the result of the jackpot lottery and the number of times of holding 0 during the certain variation external advantageous state are stored in this effect determining table. The production contents are determined with reference to the above. In addition to the number of times that the number of holdings is changed from 1 to 0, the number of times of holding 0 is also 0 if the game ball is received from the starting port and the effect is executed from the state where the number of holding dragons is 0. Can be included in the number of times. However, this case can be excluded from the number of times of holding 0.

  For example, when the big hit lottery result is a loss, the content of the effect is determined using the effect determination table at the time of failure shown in FIG. For example, when the number of times of holding 0 in the probability variation external advantageous state is 0, reach-free production is executed at a rate of 70%, small chance production is executed at a rate of 20%, and large at a rate of 10%. Chance production is executed. In addition, when the number of times of holding 0 in the probability variation external advantageous state is 1, a non-reach effect is executed at a rate of 60%, a small chance effect is executed at a rate of 30%, and a large chance at a rate of 10%. Production is performed.

  Furthermore, when the number of times of holding 0 during the probability variation external advantageous state is 2 to 3, the non-reach effect is executed at a rate of 50%, the small chance effect is executed at a rate of 30%, and the rate of 20% A big chance production is executed. Then, when the number of times of holding 0 in the certain external variation advantageous state is 5 times or more, the reach non-effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the small chance effect is executed at a rate of 40%, and the rate of 50%. Large chance production is executed.

  Further, when the big hit lottery result is a big hit, the content of the effect is determined using the big hit effect determination table shown in FIG. 231 (b). For example, when the number of times of holding 0 in the probability variation external advantageous state is 0, reach-free production is executed at a rate of 0%, small chance production is executed at a rate of 20%, and large at a rate of 80%. Chance production is executed. In addition, when the number of times of holding 0 in the probability variation external advantageous state is 1, a non-reach effect is executed at a rate of 60%, a small chance effect is executed at a rate of 50%, and a large chance at a rate of 50% Production is performed.

  Furthermore, when the number of times of holding 0 in the probability variation external advantageous state is 2 to 3, the non-reach effect is executed at the rate of 0%, the small chance effect is executed at the rate of 50%, and the rate of 50% A big chance production is executed. When the number of times of holding 0 during the probability variation external advantageous state is 5 times or more, the non-reach effect is executed at the rate of 0%, the small chance effect is executed at the rate of 60%, and the rate of 40%. Large chance production is executed.

  Here, when the start port lottery result is displayed, as shown in FIG. 232, the left decorative symbol DL, the middle decorative symbol DC, and the right decorative symbol DR displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are variably displayed. Subsequently, the decorative symbols DL, DC, and DR are stopped and displayed. Note that a background image other than the display of the decorative symbols DL, DC, and DR is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, but the display thereof is omitted here. Here, when the reach non-production is executed, first, the left decorative symbol DL and the right decorative symbol DR are stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative symbol DC continues to be changed. At this time, different symbols are displayed for the left decorative symbol DL and the right decorative symbol DR. After that, the medium decorative design DC is stopped and displayed, and the start port lottery result display ends.

  In the small chance effect, as shown in FIG. 232, after the left decorative symbol DL, the middle decorative symbol DC, and the right decorative symbol DR are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, then, as shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol DL and the right decorative symbol DR are stopped and displayed. At this time, the same symbol is displayed for the left decorative symbol DL and the right decorative symbol DR, normal reach variation is performed, and then the middle decorative symbol DC variation display is continued for a few seconds. DC is stopped and displayed. Here, if the middle decorative symbol DC that is stopped and displayed is a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols DL and DR, it is displayed that the start port lottery result is out of place. In addition, if the middle decorative symbol DC that is stopped and displayed is the same symbol as the left and right decorative symbols DL and DR, it is displayed that the starting lottery result is a big hit.

  Further, in the great chance performance, as shown in FIG. 232, after the left decorative symbol DL, the middle decorative symbol DC, and the right decorative symbol DR are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 1900, then, as shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol DL and the right decorative symbol DR are stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a flashy effect image is displayed on the background symbols displayed in the background of the left and right decorative symbols DL and DR that are stopped and displayed, thereby increasing the expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state. Then, the medium decorative design DC is stopped and displayed. Here, if the middle decorative symbol DC that is stopped and displayed is a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols DL and DR, it is displayed that the start port lottery result is out of place. In addition, if the middle decorative symbol DC that is stopped and displayed is the same symbol as the left and right decorative symbols DL and DR, it is displayed that the starting lottery result is a big hit.

  Among the above effects, when the non-reach effect is executed, the start-out lottery result is out of place and is not a big hit. In addition, when the small chance effect and the large chance effect are executed, the start opening lottery result may be out of place or may be a big hit. For this reason, when the start opening lottery result is out of place, any one of the non-reach effect, the small chance effect, and the large chance effect is executed, and when the start opening lottery result is a big hit, the small chance effect Alternatively, any one of the great chance effects is performed.

  In general, when a great chance effect is displayed when the second start opening lottery result is displayed, the second start opening lottery result is often a big hit. Expectation can be increased. However, at the time of holding 0 when the second starting port hold number is 0, the display time of the second starting port lottery result is often selected longer than the time other than the holding time, and at this time Even if a big chance production is executed, if the chance to execute the big chance production increases, the player may be given a chronic feeling, and as a result, the expectation for the transition to the big hit gaming state is reduced. There is a risk of it.

  In this regard, in this example, the effect determination table shown in FIG. 231 is used as an effect when displaying the second start port lottery result at the time of holding 0. For this reason, when executing the non-reach effect, the small chance effect, and the large chance effect, the number of times of holding 0 in the probability variation gaming state is referred to. For this reason, depending on the number of times of holding 0 in the probability variation gaming state, it is possible to reduce the situation where the second start opening lottery result is not a big hit even though the large chance effect is displayed. Specifically, when the number of times of holding 0 is 0, the large chance effect is executed at 80% of the big hit, but the ratio of the large chance effect at the time of loss is 10%. For this reason, when the big chance effect is executed, the chance for shifting to the big hit gaming state is really increased. In addition, if the number of holdings 0 increases, the proportion of large chance effects that are executed even at the time of losing increases, but it is rare that the number of holdings 0 increases during one probability-changing gaming state. It is possible to reduce the chance that the person feels that the chance to produce a great chance is low.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present example, an effect for displaying the second start port lottery result is determined based on the number of times of holding 0 in the probability variation gaming state. For this reason, for example, as a large chance effect, for example, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is bored due to an increased number of opportunities for super reach. Furthermore, as a big chance production, for example, even when super reach occurs, the situation that the possibility of transition to the big hit gaming state is reduced here can be reduced, and the feeling of boredom given to the player is eased, A decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above example, among the effects in the probability variation external advantageous state, various effects have been described when the second reserved ball images H21 to H24 are turned off during the probability variation game state. You can also run For example, in the above example, the content of the effect is determined with reference to the number of times of holding 0 in the certain variation external advantageous state and the result of the big hit lottery, but the variation time when the effect is executed other than the content of the effect Can also be changed. For example, when the retention time is 0 to 2, the variation time is set to a long time, for example, 30 seconds, and when the retention time is 3, the variation time is set to a short time, for example, 1 second. You can also.

  In addition, in the normal external advantageous state (short-time gaming state), the content of the effect can be changed when the retention 0 number reaches a predetermined number based on the retention 0 number and the result of the big hit lottery. At this time, the content of the change in production can be different between the probable external advantageous state and the normal external advantageous state. In this case, different interests can be imparted between the normal external advantageous state and the probable variation external advantageous state.

  Furthermore, the content of the performance is determined based on the result of the number of holdings 0 and the jackpot lottery within a specific time range in the probability variation external disadvantage state (so-called latent probability variation game state) and normal external disadvantage state (normal game state). In this case, the specific time range may be, for example, the time range after reaching the reach state last time.

  Further, in the above example, the production content is determined based on the result of the retention 0 number and the big hit lottery for the second start opening number, but the retention 0 number and the big hit lottery for the first start port retention number. It is also possible to determine the production contents based on the result, the number of times of holding 0 for the number of first start-ports retained and the number of second start-ports retained, and the result of the big hit lottery. However, even if the first start port hold number is 1 or more, since the second start port lottery result is displayed first, there are many opportunities to display the second start lottery result. For this reason, it is suitable to determine the content of the production based on the number of times of holding 0 for the second starting port hold number and the result of the big hit lottery.

  Furthermore, in addition to the retention 0 times and the big hit lottery for the second start opening hold number, the contents of the production can be determined in relation to the first start hold number at that time. In this way, the use of the relationship with the number of first start reservations can also diversify the production. Furthermore, since the content of the effect changes depending on the number of the first start hold number, the first start hold number is linked to the effect. For example, when a predetermined effect is executed when the first start hold number is an odd number, It is also possible to have a relationship such as the possibility of being increased, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  At this time, for example, the greater the number of first start suspensions, the more favorable the effects in the normal external advantageous state (short-time gaming state), and the wider range of effects that can be selected. For example, when the number of the first start hold is 1, the effect in the normal external advantageous state (short-time gaming state) is selected from the effect group “A”, but the first start hold number is two In the above case, the effect in the normal external advantageous state can be selected from the effect group “A + B”. In this way, in the normal external advantageous state, the player is more willing to save more hold from the normal game state by expanding the range of production as the number of first start hold is larger. become. For this reason, it is possible to give a profit to both the player and the game store, which is improved for the player and contributes to an increase in sales for the game store.

  In each of the above examples, the number of holdings 0 and the result of the big hit lottery are used when determining the production, but only the number of holdings 0 is used or based on the number of holdings 0 and other factors. The contents of the production can also be determined. In each of the above examples, the number of retentions 0 is defined as the number of small retentions. However, when the number of retentions is a small retention number such as 1 or 2 instead of 0, these small retention numbers are obtained. It is also possible to determine the contents of the production based on the number of times of playing.

  Furthermore, when the number of holdings becomes a small number of holdings such as 1, for example, when the number of holdings increases from 0 to 1, the number of holdings decreases from 2 to 1 Both can be included, and only one of them can be included. In addition, the contents of the production can be changed based on the case where the number of reservations increases to become a small number of reservations (small number of reservations) and the case where the number decreases to a small number of reservations. In this case, since the production can be diversified, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the decrease in interest. Furthermore, it is possible to determine the production according to the number of times that each of the small number of reservations is made. In this case, it is possible to provide an effect table for each small number of reservations (0, 1, 2, etc.).

  Here, when the number of reservations increases to become a small number of reservations (small number of reservations), the chance of a big hit lottery increases as the number of reservations increases. Since the content of the performance is determined according to the number of times that the chance of winning the big hit is increased, it is possible to increase the expectation for the big hit. For this reason, the more the number of holdings increases and the number of times that the number of holdings becomes small (the number of small holdings) increases, it is easier to execute an effect that enhances the expectation for the big hit, for example, an effect that is easily selected when the big hit Is preferred.

  In addition, when the number of holdings decreases and becomes a small number of holdings, the chance of a big hit lottery decreases due to the reduction of the number of holdings. Decreasing the chances of winning a lottery may cause disappointment and discomfort to the player, but by determining the content of the presentation according to the number of times the chance of winning the lottery is reduced, the player can be determined according to the content of the presentation. Discouragement and discomfort can be reduced. For example, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect that comforts the player, an apology to the player, etc., in accordance with the number of times that the chance of winning the lottery has decreased.

  In addition, when the number of minimum pending is increased, for example, when the number of minimum pending is 10 times or more, an effect with few display opportunities such as a so-called premium effect is executed as an effect when shifting to the big hit gaming state. You can also The increase in the number of times that the number of infinite hold is increased means that it is in a so-called humming state that does not shift to the big hit game state, or the number of lottery lotteries itself is reduced because the game ball is not accepted at the starting port. is there. For this reason, in any case, the player is likely to feel discomfort. In such a situation, an unpleasant feeling that may be given to the player can be reduced by executing an effect with a small display opportunity such as a premium effect.

  In the above example, a so-called reach state is set as a small chance effect or a large chance effect in the case of a big hit, but a big hit symbol may be displayed without going through the reach state. In this case, for example, after displaying the off symbol pattern, the symbol can be changed again to display the jackpot symbol.

[7. Spherical ball elimination control]
When shifting to the big hit gaming state, the opening / closing member 2106 in the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIGS. 119 to 121 is opened and closed intermittently. When the opening / closing member 2106 is opened, the special winning opening 2103 is in an open state in which a game ball can enter, and when the opening / closing member 2106 is closed, the game winning ball 2103 is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. As shown in FIG. 235, when the big prize opening 2103 is in an open state, the game ball B can be received in the big prize opening 2103. In this way, during the big hit gaming state, the opening / closing member 2106 is opened, and the game balls frequently enter the big winning opening 2103 which is a ball entry device, so that the number of game balls to be paid out can be increased. Further, while the opening / closing member 2106 is closed, the opening / closing member 2106 is in a substantially vertical state, and a wall is formed together with the opening / closing peripheral member 2106A to close the special winning opening 2103 so that the game ball cannot enter.

  Further, when the special winning opening 2103 is closed, the game ball can pass between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594 (FIG. 107) which is a peripheral arrangement provided around the opening / closing member 2106. Is done. Further, when the special winning opening 2103 is in an open state, the game ball cannot pass between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594. Opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2106 is realized by rotating the opening / closing member 2106 around a rotation shaft 2106 </ b> B provided on the lower side of the opening / closing member 2106.

  The opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled by the main control board 4100, and the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled to open / close when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, etc. to the big hit gaming state. The transition to the big hit gaming state is the opening / closing condition. The main control board 4100 opens the opening / closing member 2106 when a predetermined waiting time elapses after the gaming state shifts to the big hit gaming state. The elapse of a predetermined waiting time after the transition to the big hit gaming state is satisfied as an opening / closing member opening condition. Further, the main control board 4100 performs opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 2106 a predetermined number of times during the big hit gaming state. Until this predetermined number of times of opening / closing control is completed, after the opening / closing member 2106 is closed, the opening / closing member 2106 is opened when a predetermined interval time elapses. The passage of the interval time after the opening / closing member 2106 is closed also satisfies the opening / closing member opening condition.

  Furthermore, after the opening / closing member 2106 is opened, the opening / closing member 2106 is closed by entering a predetermined number, for example, nine game balls into the special winning opening 2103. This predetermined number of balls is a closing condition for the opening and closing member. The closing condition may be that the opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 has reached a predetermined opening time, for example, 30 seconds, in addition to the number of game balls entering. Thus, the main control board 4100 performs control that can alternately establish the opening condition and the closing condition for a predetermined number of times during the big hit gaming state in which the opening / closing condition is satisfied. In addition, when the opening condition is satisfied, a “round” in a so-called jackpot gaming state starts, and when the closing condition is satisfied, the “round” ends. The main control board 4100 corresponds to the opening / closing condition control means described in the solving means.

  By the way, when the opening / closing member 2106 is opened, when viewed from the side, the upper end of the opening / closing member 2106 forms an arc so that the game ball can pass between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594 (hereinafter referred to as “passing”). It is assumed that the game ball cannot pass through (hereinafter also referred to as “passable state”). When in the passable state, the width between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594 is made wider than the diameter of the game ball, and when not in the passable state, the width between the open / close member 2106 and the glass plate 594 is set. The width is narrower than the diameter of the game ball. Here, the width between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball B while the passage is possible and the passage is impossible.

  If the game ball B is about to pass between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594 at this time, the game ball B is sandwiched between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594 as shown in FIG. May occur. When this ball smear occurs, the opening operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is hindered by the game ball B, and the opening / closing member 2106 is incompletely opened. For this reason, the game ball B may not be smoothly entered into the grand prize winning opening 2103.

  The main control board 4100 performs the control for eliminating the spherical debris in order to suppress such debris. The main control board 4100 corresponds to the clogging means described in the solving means. In the ball smear elimination control, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 237 (a), the opening / closing member 2106 is closed for a short time, and the distance between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594 is slightly increased. Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (b), the game ball B sandwiched between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594 falls, and the ball smack is eliminated. After that, by opening the opening / closing member 2106, the opening / closing member 2106 can be completely opened, and the game ball can be smoothly inserted into the big winning opening 2103.

  Here, the timing for causing the opening / closing member 2106 to perform a closing operation for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as a “ball smear eliminating operation”) when executing the ball smear eliminating control in the main control board 4100 will be described. For example, it is necessary to provide a detection means for detecting the occurrence of a ball bit in order to perform the ball bite eliminating operation when the ball bit is generated. On the other hand, for example, when the opening condition of the opening / closing member 2106 is established, if the ball dust eliminating operation is performed at regular intervals, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the ball scratch without providing the detection means. However, if the ball bite eliminating operation is frequently performed, the timing at which entering the winning prize opening 2103 is hindered while satisfying the opening condition increases, and there is a possibility that the player may be dissatisfied.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined number of times that the opening condition of the opening / closing member 2106 is established in the big hit gaming state in which the opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 2106 is performed a predetermined number of times. When the opening / closing member 2106 is opened after the second time, control is performed to close the opening / closing member 2106 when the closing condition is satisfied, but the opening / closing member 2106 is slightly changed even when the closing condition is not satisfied. Execute control to close time. By executing the control for closing the opening / closing member 2106 for a short time, if there is a ball flaw between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594, the ball flaw can be eliminated.

  The ball smear usually occurs when the launched game ball passes through the opening / closing member 2106 performing the opening operation. Here, for example, at the timing when the opening / closing member 2106 is released in the first round of shifting to the big hit gaming state, the player often stops the launch of the game ball. For this reason, it is rare that a ball bite is generated in the first round, and even if the ball bite elimination operation is performed in the first round, it is difficult to contribute to the elimination of the ball bite. There is a concern that this will lead to a decrease in winning opportunities. Similarly, when the opening / closing member 2106 is opened in a round in which the player is expected to stop launching the game ball, it is preferable not to perform the ball smear eliminating operation for the same reason.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present example, when the opening / closing member 2106 is opened, the ball dust eliminating operation for closing the opening / closing member 2106 for a minute time is controlled. For this reason, it is possible to eliminate the ball smear generated between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass member 594. Further, the ball smear eliminating operation is performed in a prescribed number of rounds, for example, rounds other than the first round. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the ball bite eliminating operation in the round where ball bites are unlikely to occur, and thus the opportunity for the game ball to enter the grand prize winning opening 2103 is impaired by frequently performing the ball bite eliminating operation. Situation can be suppressed, and discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

  In addition to the big prize opening 2103 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, the ball entry device can enter the game ball when it is opened and opened, and the game ball when it is closed. It may be impossible to enter the ball. Specifically, it can be a so-called electric tulip, a so-called winged object in a so-called wing game machine, a so-called Velo-type winning opening, or the like. Further, as the peripheral arrangement, it is only necessary to allow the game ball to pass between the closed entrance device and to prevent the game ball from passing to the open entrance device. An accessory or a nail provided around the ball entry device can also be used.

  In the above example, the ball smear elimination control is executed in the second and subsequent rounds other than the first round as the specified number of times. Alternatively, a predetermined round, for example, an odd round, an even round, or a round that is a multiple of 3, can be executed. Furthermore, when the interval time between rounds changes as in the so-called rank-up bonus, the ball smear elimination control can be executed in a round excluding the round immediately after the long interval time. If the interval time is long, there is a high possibility that the launch of the game ball will be stopped during that time, so the possibility that a ball will be generated will be low. In such a round immediately after the long interval time, the ball ball control is not executed, so that the chance of the game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 is impaired due to frequent ball ball elimination operation. Can be suppressed, and discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

  Further, when executing the ball smear elimination control, the closing operation time of the opening / closing member 2106 is set to a minute time. Specifically, before the opening / closing member 2106 in the opened state is closed, the opening / closing member 2106 is moved. It is preferable to set the time to allow the open state. In order to eliminate ball play in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, it is not necessary to open a large gap between the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594, and it is sufficient to secure a width that allows the game ball B to pass. Further, if the opening amount of the opening / closing member 2106 is reduced and the opening / closing member 2106 and the glass plate 594 are opened widely, the chance of entering the winning prize opening 2103 is increased. Here, if the opening / closing member 2106 is opened before the opening / closing member 2106 is closed, the opening / closing member 2106 can be opened, so that a sufficient width for the game ball B to pass therethrough can be secured and the big prize opening 2103 can be secured. The decrease in the chance to enter the ball can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suitably eliminate the ball gap while suppressing the discomfort given to the player.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4 gaming board 1100 gaming area 4010 peripheral control board 4100 main control board 4100a main control MPU
4513 Command transmission means 4506 First hit determination means 4507 First hit determination random number extraction means 4508 First hit design random number extraction means 4509 First fluctuation time random number extraction means 4511 First fluctuation time determination means 4525 Second hit determination Random number extracting means 4526 Second per symbol random number extracting means 4527 Second variation time random number extracting means 4528 Second success / failure determining means 4530 Second variation time determining means 5100 Random number obtaining means 5110 Lottery means 5120 Variation time determining means 5130 Lighting pattern table 5140 Lighting pattern determination means 5150 Identification display control means 5131 Lighting pattern data 5131A Fluctuation display lighting pattern data 5131B Stop display lighting pattern data

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a game board having a game area where a game ball flows down, and performing a winning lottery based on the game ball passing through a starting port provided in the game board,
The game board is provided with a ball entry device having a closed state in which the open / close member is closed so that the game ball does not enter and an open state in which the open / close member is opened to allow the game ball to enter And
Advantageous gaming state control means for controlling the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player when the winning lottery result is obtained by the winning lottery,
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the opening / closing member that is in the closed state is opened when a predetermined opening condition is satisfied, and a predetermined number of games are given to the pitching device as a condition for closing the opening / closing member. An opening / closing operation means for executing an opening / closing operation for closing the opening / closing member when a ball enters or a predetermined time has elapsed ;
Limited opening means for closing the opening / closing member in the open state for a short period of time without satisfying the condition for closing the opening / closing member by the opening / closing operation means,
The advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the opening / closing member is repeatedly opened and closed.
The closed state by the limited closing means is made not to appear continuously in the repeated opening and closing operations,
The advantageous gaming state includes the first time and the second time longer than the first time until the opening / closing member in the closed state is opened. The gaming machine is characterized in that the closed state by the limited closing means does not appear after the open state in which the opening and closing member is opened.

Images